Volvo - S60 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2003

Page 1740
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Control System, Fuel Supply
Temperature and pressure sensors, replacing
Removal and Installation
NOTE: As the illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and/or
models, some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always
correct.
Removing the temperature and pressure sensors
Remove the boost pressure sensor which is on the pipe coming from the charge air cooler (CAC).
Installing the temperature and pressure sensors Install a new sensor.

Page 892
Fault-tracing information
Condition
- No steering wheel module diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are stored in the central electronic
module.
- No diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are stored in the steering wheel module.
Possible source
- Defective tailgate wiper.
- Defective control module.
Fault symptom[s]
- The rear windshield wiper motor does not operate.
Checking the Tailgate Wiper
Checking the tailgate wiper
Checking components
Activate the tailgate wiper using the wiper switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the wiper switch status is OK, the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Was the tailgate wiper status OK?
Yes - No Fault Found
No - Replacing components
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing components
Check the tailgate wiper fuse; replace as necessary. Replace relay 2/16.
Other information:
- For further information about the fuses and relays, see the Wiring Diagram
- To access the relay/fuse box in the cargo compartment: Relay/fuse box cargo compartment/Rear
electronic module (REM), replacing See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse
Block/Service and Repair/Integrated Relay/Fusebox Cargo Compartment/Rear Electronic Module
(REM), Replacing
Page 459
Fuses 11C/34-38
Fuses in the Cargo Area/Compartment
Cargo Compartment Fuses

Page 842
Was a fault detected?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Fault-Tracing Information
Condition
- No SWM DTCs are stored in the Central electronic module (CEM).
- No DTCs are stored in the Steering wheel module (SWM).
Possible source
- Faulty turn signal lamp switch.
- Faulty control module.
Fault symptom[s]
- Direction indicators, malfunction
Checking the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Activate the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the direction indicator switch status is OK the problem is in the Steering wheel module
(SWM).
Page 1163
Fuses 11B/11-23
Fuses in the Passenger Compartment
Passenger Compartment Fuses

Page 1584
- Ignition off
- Reinstall the connectors, components etc.
Open the driver's door. Check to see if the key warning signal functions normally and silences
when the key is removed from the ignition switch
Was the function OK?
Yes - Fault Found
No - Fault-tracing information
-------------------------------------------------
Information
The fault should have been detected and remedied. As this is not the case fault-tracing has failed.
Exit fault-tracing for this diagnostic trouble code (DTC) or make another attempt.
Do you want to exit fault-tracing?
Yes - FAULT-TRACING FAILED

Page 547
3/80 Switch, Left-Hand Central Lock
3/82 Switch, Right-Hand Central Lock
3/85-86 Rear Left and Right Door Power Window Switch
3/91 Switch, Left-Hand Heated Seat
3/92 Switch, Right-Hand Heated Seat

Page 342
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble
Codes
Connecting the Volvo Communication Tool 2000 (VCT 2000)
In order to be able communicate with the car control modules, the VCT 2000 must be connected to
both the VIDA PC and the car data link connector (DLC).
-------------------------------------------------
Reading Off Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information, Steering Wheel Module
Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information, steering wheel module
Reading off extended fault-tracing information, steering wheel module

Page 570
7/130 Fuel Level Sensor, Injector Side
7/135 Glass Breakage Sensor, Left-Hand
7/136 Glass Breakage Sensor, Right-Hand
7/137 Glass Breakage Sensor, Tailgate
7/139 Brake Pressure Sensor 1

Page 532
Page 61
Hint: Test the communication with another corresponding vehicle to decide if the malfunction is in
the vehicle or in VIDA/VCT/cable harness. If the communication works on another vehicle, the
malfunction is in the vehicle.
Hint: For current information about each circuit and signals, see wiring diagram and signal
description for each system.
Diagnostic outlet
- Check the voltage feed to diagnostic outlet #16. The voltage shall match battery voltage.
- Check the cable for power ground and signal ground to diagnostic outlet #4 and #5.
Hint: When VCT2000 is connected to the diagnostic outlet (is supplied with voltage), the indicator
diode shall be activated with a green light. Then the indicator diode flashes quickly when
communication takes place with a control module. In case of certain internal malfunctions on
VCT2000 the indicator diode is activated with a red light!
Communication cables
- For communication problems with control units onthe high-speed network, check communication
cables between diagnostic outlet #6/ #14 and central electronic module (CEM) #B11/ #B12 for
open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references above.
- For communication problems with control units onthe low-speed network, check communication
cables between diagnostic outlet #3/#11 and central electronic module (CEM) #B16/#B15 for open
circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references above.
- Also check the communication cables for the low and high-speed net between the central
electronic module (CEM) and the other connected control modules according to troubleshooting
above.
Control modules
- Check that the control module's voltage feed and ground connection are trouble-free.
Caution! If none of the above checks help, try reading out diagnostic trouble codes in the central
electronic module (CEM). Done via VIDA vehicle communication. A prerequisite for being able to
communicate with the control modules in the vehicle is that the central electronic module (CEM) is
active and can be communicated with. If communication is not possible with the central electronic
module (CEM), check the voltage feed and ground for the central electronic module (CEM).
VCT2000 and cable harness
- Connect VCT2000 to the vehicle so that it is supplied with voltage. Test VCT2000 by selecting the
system's self-test and VCT Test in the VIDA main menu. If any malfunction is found according to
the test, first replace the cable harness then the VCT2000, if the test still indicates a malfunction.
- If no malfunctions were found after troubleshooting according to above, try with a new cable
harness and/or new VCT2000.
VIDA
- If no malfunctions were found after troubleshooting according to above, try performing a complete
system reset of VIDA.
Other information
- Checking wiring and terminals See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring And Terminals
Continue - Fault Found
------------------------
Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Control Module: Service and Repair
Replacing the driver information control unit
Preparation
Note! Before replacing the control module all the program data should be read from the control unit.
This is done in VIDA vehicle communication. After replacement the program data should be written
to the new control module.
Removal of driver information control unit
Remove:
- the dashboard cover panel.

Page 1698
Install
- the sensor. Use anewnut. Tighten to 10 Nm
- the connector
- the hoses and close the clamp
- the tie strap on the torque rod.

Page 957
- Ignition off
- Disconnect the RTI switch
- Ignition on.
Activate and read off the status of the buttons in the audio / carphone switch. If the readings give a
correct result, the fault is in the RTI switch.
Other information:
- To access the RTI switch, see RTI switch See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Sensors and
Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Assembly/Service and
Repair/RTI Switch.
Was the audio / carphone switch status OK?
Yes - Fault Found
No - Checking components and wiring
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components and wiring

Page 984
Did read-out of status on read button give a correct result?
Yes - Fault Found
No - Replacing the component
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing the component
Test by replacing the control unit.
Caution! A new control unit is supplied without software. The new control unit must be programmed
before it will work.
Additional information:
- To replace and program the control unit, see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See:
Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair.
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Trouble-Shooting Information
Trouble-shooting information
Locations
Power Door Lock Relay: Locations
Fuse/Relay Identification and Location
Fuses in the Engine Compartment

Engine Compartment Fuses
Fuses 11A/1-8
Rear Left Angle Sensor
7/120 Rear Left Angle Sensor

Page 699
Caution! Protect the surroundings from the heat.
951 2850 Hot air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951 2850 Hot Air Gun 951 2851 Hot-air gun See:
Tools and Equipment/951 2851 Hot-Air Gun 951 2777 Hot-air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951
2777 Hot-Air Gun
Cable Shoe
Cable shoe
Note! The illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and/or models.
Some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Information
Page 1519
Install:
- the new level sensor
- the wiring in the holder
- the thin pipe in the holder on the outside of the fuel tank unit
- the tie strap around the wiring above the pump.

Page 1641
Install:
- the bracket with the sensor on the rear axle
- the nut for the lever arm
- the connector.
Note! The initial setting for the lever arm should be pointing straight upwards at the rear axle.
Lower the car.

Page 686
Note! The relay holders can be connected and several locks may need to be adjusted at the same
time.
At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Alternatively use tool 951 2852 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2852
Terminal Removal Tool as illustrated.
Installation
Primary lock
Check that the cable terminal is undamaged. Press the cable terminal into the housing. Check that
the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on the cable.
Secondary lock
Slide back the secondary lock.
Finishing work
Install the relays.

Note! Take care with the positioning.
Reinstall the central relay box.
Connector Relay Box, Repair
Connector relay box, repair
Special tools: 951 2633 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2633 Terminal
Removal Tool
951 2639 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2639 Terminal Removal Tool
Page 664
Angle out the catches on both sides. Pull out the secondary lock.
Primary lock
Page 1019
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Power Supply and Ground Terminals. Intermittent Fault
Checking the power supply and ground terminals. Intermittent fault
Checking the power supply and ground for the control module
Check steering wheel module connector A. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Check fuse
22 in the passenger compartment fusebox for the steering wheel module. Note! If the fuse was
blown, check the circuit after the fuse. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Check the cable
for power supply between fuse 22 in the passenger compartment fusebox and the control module
terminals #A1 and #A6. Check for an open-circuit. Check the ground lead between control module
#A22 and ground terminal 31/84. Check for an open-circuit. Check ground terminal 31/84. Check
for contact resistance and oxidation. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access the control module, see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See: Steering
Column Control Module/Service and Repair
Page 2001
7/103 Heated Oxygen Sensor 3
7/105 Outside Temperature Sensor, Engine Control Module
7/108 - 109 Left/Right Hand Rear Side Impact Sensor
7/110 - 111 Left-Hand and Right-Hand Seat Temperature Sensor
7/115 - 116 Left/Right Hand Front Side Impact Sensor

Page 1378
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Sensor Front, Replacing
Wheel sensor front, replacing
Preparatory work
Raise the vehicle. Remove the front wheels.
Replacement
ABS sensor front, replacing
Note! The work must be carried out on both sides unless otherwise indicated in the heading.
Clean the sensor seat using a soft brush. Blow clean.
Remove:
- the screw for the sensor
- the cable from the brackets and the clip.

Page 565
7/25 Impulse Sensor
7/31-32 Left-Hand and Right-Hand Front ABS Sensor
7/41 Temperature Sensor, Evaporator
7/51 Accelerator Pedal Sensor
7/56 - 57 Left-Hand and Right-Hand Rear ABS Sensor

Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1935
Tighten the screws. Tighten to 25 Nm. Plug in the connector from the car. Ensure that the rubber
seal is in position in the upper section of the connector.
Install the air cleaner (ACL) housing
See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing, B5254T2 See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS
Unit, Replacing
Top up the transmission fluid
Note! After replacing the transmission oil, the "Transmission oil change" counter must be reset.
See Resetting Transmission fluid change counter, AW50/51 AWD, AW55-50/51SN See:
Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Resetting the Transmission Fluid Change Counter
Checking diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
Check and erase any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).

Page 1002
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking components
Hint: If the turn signal lamp switch status is OK, the fault is not in the steering wheel module
(SWM).
Page 556
6/1 Windshield Wiper Motor
6/2 Windshield Washer Pump
6/3 - 4 Right-Hand and Left-Hand Headlight Wiper Motor
6/15 Sunroof Motor
6/16 Driver Seat Motor, Backrest Angle

Page 421
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1762
7/82 Heated Oxygen Sensor, Diagnosis 1

Page 478
Passenger Compartment Relays/Shunts

Locations
Windshield Washer Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 955
Condition
- No SWM diagnostic trouble codes are displayed in the CEM
- No diagnostic trouble codes are displayed in the PHM.
Possible source
- Open circuit, short-circuit to earth or short-circuit to voltage supply on the wire

- Defective RTI switch unit
- Defective audio/telephone switch unit
- Defective cruise-control switch unit.
Fault symptom[s]
- Audio/telephone switch unit does not work.
Checking the Audio / Carphone Switch
Checking the audio / carphone switch
Checking components
- Ignition on.
correct result, the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Page 654
Press in the locking tab on the cable terminal and carefully pull out the cable and the cable
terminal. Use tool 951 2812 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2812 Terminal
Removal Tool or tool 951 2637 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637
Terminal Removal Tool , as illustrated.
Connector, assembling
Primary locking
Secondary locking
Press the secondary lock into place.
Connector Type 1
Connectors, repair
Special tool 951 2637 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637 Terminal
Removal Tool.
Note! As the illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and / or
correct.
Connector, dismantling
Secondary lock
Page 440
Other Relays
Locations
4/33 Sunroof Control Module SRM

Page 152

Page 294
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications
Outer temperature sensor

Page 1053
Reading Off Parameters, Digital Display
Parameter, digital display
Hint: Engine must be running for certain values to be updated.
- Ignition on or engine start-up.
Activate parameter read-out by clicking on the symbol for VCT 2000. For information on the various
parameters see Description of parameters See: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/Description of
Parameters.
Continue - DONE
Numeric Result 0 - Communication fault
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Page 1006
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
- No diagnostic trouble codes are displayed in the SWM.
Possible source
- Defective windscreen-wiper switch
- Defective control unit.
Fault symptom[s]
- Windscreen wipers operate at low speed.
Checking the Windshield Wiper Switch
Checking the windshield wiper switch
Checking components
Activate the windshield wiper switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the wiper switch status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Brake Control Module (BCM), Replacing
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Brake Control Module (BCM), Replacing
Brake control module (BCM), replacing
Removal
Preparation
Note! In week 35 year 2001 a new brake control module (BCM) is being introduced along with a
new sensor in the brake electronics.
Remove the battery cable. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
and Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting.
Removing the air cleaner (ACL) housing
Remove the air cleaner (ACL) housing. See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe
Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing.
Removing the integrated relay / fusebox
Remove the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit. See Brake pipe
from hydraulic unit / front wheel / junction, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe From Hydraulic Unit / Front Wheel /
Junction, Replacing. Remove the screw on the bracket. Lift the box out of the bracket and put it to
one side.
Disconnecting the connector

Page 770
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1289
Ultrasonic Sensor: Service and Repair
Movement sensor
Movement sensor
Note! This accessory is connected to the car's electrical system. It requires software unique to the
car.
Illustration A applies to the S60 and the S80
Illustration B applies to the V70

Page 724
Engine Control Module: Tools and Equipment
Volvo ECU Release Key
AST tool# V9995722
Volvo ECU Release Key. Applicable to: V70 XC (01-) / XC70, C70 Coupe, V70 (-00), V70 XC (-00),
S80, XC90, V70 (00-), S60, C70 Conv, S70.
- Made in Germany
- Call AST for Pricing
Contact AST for pricing.
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943

Page 1346
- Install the yaw rate sensor on the bracket. Tighten the nut to 10 Nm.
- Install the lateral acceleration sensor on the bracket.
- Press the clamp down the sensor until it locks.
The bracket on the bodywork

Locations
7/73 Coolant Level Sensor

Page 1725
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Fuel pressure sensor
Operation number: 28406-3
Note! Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
Removal
Note! Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Work on the fuel system. Refer to: Safety regulations for handling fuel See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions/Safety Regulations for Handling
Fuel
Depressurize the fuel system. Refer to: Fuel system pressure release See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair
Warning! Wear protective goggles.
Blow clean with compressed air around the fuel pressure sensor.
Remove the following items:
- cable tie
- Connector
- screw.
Place paper under the fuel pressure sensor to take care of any petrol that may remain in the fuel
distribution pipe. Cut out the bottom of a plastic bottle and place on the paper. Remove the fuel
pressure sensor.
Page 1008
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
- Front windscreen washer does not work.
Checking Windshield Washing
Checking windshield washing
Checking components
Activate the windshield washer using the windshield wiper switch. Read off the status.
Page 263
Remove:
- the switches. See Replacing climate control unit switches See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair/Replacing Climate Control Unit Switches
Install:
In reverse order.
Climate Control Switch
3/118 Climate Control Switch

Page 514
Check
Check that the control module's connectors are intact.
Installing the control module
This method of installation applies to both the driver door module (DDM) and the passenger door
module (PDM).
- Position the door module in the hole on the door panel.
Check that the lower mounting for the door module is correctly located in the support on the door
panel
- Press the door module into place
- Connect the connectors
- Install the nut and screw
- Install the door panel.
Ordering software
Order software for the driver door module (DDM) according to the table below.
Order software for the passenger door module (PDM) according to the table below.
Finishing
Initialise the window position in the communication input
Removing the upper panel

Page 1015
Page 1924
Separate the connector. Remove the nut for the cable duct and bracket. Unhook the components.
Clean thoroughly around transmission output speed sensor. Remove the sensor.
Installing the sensor
Lubricate the O ring for the new vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Install the sensor. Tighten to 5.5 Nm.
Install:
- the bracket and cable duct. Tighten to 5.5 Nm
- the connector.
Installing the air cleaner (ACL) housing

Page 862
Checking the Cruise Control Switch
Checking the cruise control switch
Ignition off. Ignition on. Read off the status of the buttons in the cruise control switch. If the cruise
control switch is functioning the fault is outside the steering wheel module (SWM).
Is the cruise control switch working?
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
Is the car equipped with RTI?
Yes - Checking components and wiring
-------------------------------------------------

Page 488
Unscrew the screw holding the connector so that it is free of its threads. Check that the screw is
free with your fingers. Disconnect the connector. Use an open spanner and a support. See the
illustration.
Note! Do not damage the pins. Always check that the control module's and control module box's
connectors do not have bent or damaged pins or sleeves. This may have be the cause of the
problem.
Page 1577
Does the voltage drop to approximately 0V?
Yes - Replacing the ignition switch
No - Checking the wiring
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the wiring

Page 1120
Line pressure solenoid, SLS
The line pressure solenoid, SLS is in the transmission control system, which is mounted on the
front edge of the transmission. The line pressure solenoid, SLS consists of an electrical coil which
controls a hydraulic valve. The solenoid is controlled by pulse width modulation (PWM) voltage and
is grounded via the transmission control module (TCM). The hydraulic function of the solenoid is
linear. The hydraulic valve is controlled by the varied current which is the result of the current pulse
conditions. During high pulse conditions, (at high currents (approximately 1 A)) the line pressure is
low. During low pulse conditions (at low currents) the line pressure is high. In the event of an
open-circuit the line pressure reaches maximum which causes hard shifting. The hydraulic valve is
then completely open. There are diagnostics for the solenoid.
Line pressure solenoid, SLT
The line pressure solenoid, SLT is in the transmission control system, which is mounted on the
front edge of the transmission. The line pressure solenoid, SLT consists of an electric coil which
controls a hydraulic valve. The solenoid is controlled by pulse width modulation (PWM) voltage and
is grounded via the control module. The solenoid is linear. The hydraulic valve is controlled by the
varied current which is the result of the current pulse conditions. During high pulse conditions, (at
high currents (approximately 1 A)) the line pressure is low. During low pulse conditions (at low
currents) the line pressure is high. The solenoid also engages and disengages neutral control. In
the event of an open-circuit the line pressure reaches maximum which causes hard shifting. The
hydraulic valve is then completely open. There are diagnostics for the solenoid.
Transmission input speed sensor (speed of the input shaft)
The transmission input speed sensor (speed of the input shaft) is on the top of the transmission
housing. The sensor is an active sensor and is supplied with 12 V. When the pulse wheel on clutch
C1 rotates, the sensor generates a pulsed current (quadratic wave) where the strength of the
current depends on the position of the pulse wheel. The signals from the coils in the sensor are
then affected by a magnetic resistance element, which
Page 1985
3/173 Switch, Tailgate Private Lock
3/174 Switch, Reduced Alarm
3/183
4/9 Control Module, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
4/16 Brake Control Module (BCM)

Page 1273
at least five minutes. Then disconnect the battery negative lead before disassembling any of the
connectors.
Steering wheel mounted remote control for the radio

Preparations
- Turn the ignition key to position 0
- Remove the ignition key.
Note! Wait at least five minutes before disassembling the connectors or removing other equipment.
- Disconnect the battery negative lead.
- Turn the steering wheel 90° so that is in the position illustrated and so that the two holes on the
reverse of the steering wheel are accessible.
Page 1443
Oil Level Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Oil level sensor, diagnostics
General
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the oil level sensor. A diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) will be stored if an internal fault is detected in the oil level sensor or if there is an open-circuit
or a short-circuit to ground or voltage in its wiring connectors. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) will
also be stored if the oil level is too low or high or if the oil level drops rapidly over a certain time
(leakage). The pulse ratio of all the oil level sensor pulses in a pulse train must be within the normal
operating range of 17-83 %. If this is exceeded, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) will be stored in
the engine control module (ECM).
Hint: Extremely diluted engine oil can result in a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for the oil level
being stored in the engine control module (ECM).
For further information about diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), see Information, diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) in VIDA.
Page 581
10/44-45,51-52 RH Tail Light Lamp, Lamp 2, LH Tail Light Lamp, Lamp 2
10/46-53 Fog Light, Right/Left Rear
10/47-54 Right/Left Rear Direction Indicator
10/48-55 RH and LH Reversing Light
10/64 Right-Hand High Beam

Page 624
9/1 Through C1-6 (Supplement)
Wire Color Code and Other Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Ignition switch symbols
x = Accessories (audio position)

S = Powered upon insertion of key
15 = The switch remains connected during start
15| = Contact is broken while starting
30 = Constant power from the battery
50 = Start
Countries/Markets
A = Austria
AUS = Australia
B = Belgium
CDN = Canada
CH = Switzerland
D = Germany
DK = Denmark
E = Spain
EU/OS = Markets outside USA and Canada FIN
= Finland
GB = Great Britain
Page 1992
6/33 Fuel Pump
6/37 Lock Motor, Fuel Filler Flap
6/38 - 39 LH and RH Headlight Level Adjustment Motor
6/44 Cooling Fan, Electrics Box, Engine Compartment
6/48 Damper Motor, Recirculation

Page 1167
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 508
Body Control Module: Service and Repair Central Electronic Module (CEM), Replacing
Central electronic module (CEM), replacing
For further information, see Downloading software and replacing the control module See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Downloading
Software and Replacing the Control Module/Central Electronic Module (CEM)
Preparatory work
Disconnecting the battery lead
Caution! The customer-programmed data must be read off before the control module is replaced.
The relevant data must then be programmed into the new control module, via VIDA vehicle
communication, after it has been installed.
Ignition off Disconnect the battery negative cable. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting.
Note! For vehicles equipped with Volvo On Call Plus, the automatic alarm for the emergency
services may deploy.
Note! The driver information module (DIM) must not be replaced at the same time. This would
erase the mileage.
Removal
Removing the wiper mechanism and cover

Page 1421
- Jack up the car.
- Remove protection cover from under engine.
- Drain the coolant as described in Radiator / charge air cooler (CAC), replacement See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Turbocharger/Intercooler/Service and
Repair/Radiator / Charge Air Cooler (CAC), Replacement.
- Lower the car.
- Loosen oil reservoir for servo pump as described in.
- Remove coolant reservoir and put it to one side.
- Remove screws and outer/upper timing-gear casing.
- Remove screws and wire channel.
- Disconnect connector.
- Remove 4 screws and thermostat housing.

- Remove sensor and wires.
Installation
Engine temperature sensor, 6-cylinder
- Install thermostat housing sensor.
- Position wires in slot on thermostat housing.
Note! The white marks should be positioned in lower opening of slot, from underneath.
- Position gasket on thermostat housing correctly and install thermostat housing using two of the
screws.
- Position thermostat housing correctly and tighten the four screws.
- Position wire channel correctly and position wire in channel.
- Tighten screw on wire channel.
- Connect the connector.
- Install outer/upper timing-gear casing.
- Install coolant reservoir.
- Install oil reservoir for servo pump as described in.
Follow-on work, 6-cylinder
- Fill up coolant.
- Warm the engine until the thermostat opens.
Switch engine off and check the level. Re-fill if necessary.
- Check for leaks.
- Check in VIDA vehicle communication (read-out of parameter values), for current engine system,
that the engine temperature shown appears correct.
Service and Repair
Entertainment System Control Module: Service and Repair
Entertainment equipment
TV receiver, replacing
Removal
- Remove the front floor hatch from the cargo compartment
- Fold up the short backrest
- Slacken off the front and rear screws for the receiver. Lift the receiver up
- Disconnect the connectors.
NOTE: The DIN connector and terminal on the receiver are marked yellow.
Installation
- Lightly tighten the screws for the receiver
- Install the connector.
NOTE: The DIN connector and terminal on the receiver are marked yellow.
- Install the receiver. Tighten the screws
- Reposition the backrest
- Install the front floor hatch.

Page 1473
Climate Control Exhaust Gas Sensor: Service and Repair
Air quality sensor
Note! A new air quality sensor has been introduced from specific chassis numbers for model year
2002.
The old air quality sensor is fitted in cars with the following chassis numbers: V70 2000: -179938
(factory 1) V70 2000: -178516 (factory 2) V70 XC 2001: -051467 S60 2001: -102442
The following method applies for cars with chassis numbers that higher that those above.
Preparations
Remove:
- windscreen wiper according to Wiper arm / blade, windshield, replacing See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arm / Blade, Windshield, Replacing
- cover panel windscreen wiper channel.

Open the shutter for the air intake (REC).
Removing the sensor
Turn the sensor about 60° anticlockwise (see the illustration).
Note! The sensor can only be positioned one way in the groove (see the illustration).
Pull out the sensor and cable a little so the connector is accessible. Disconnect the connector.

Page 912
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Power Supply and Ground Terminals. Intermittent Fault
Checking the power supply and ground terminals. Intermittent fault
Checking the power supply and ground for the control module
22 in the passenger compartment fusebox for the steering wheel module. Note! If the fuse was
blown, check the circuit after the fuse. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Check the cable
for power supply between fuse 22 in the passenger compartment fusebox and the control module
terminals #A1 and #A6. Check for an open-circuit. Check the ground lead between control module
#A22 and ground terminal 31/84. Check for an open-circuit. Check ground terminal 31/84. Check
for contact resistance and oxidation. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access the control module, see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See: Steering
Column Control Module/Service and Repair
Page 990
Was the status of the cruise control switch OK?
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Check the voltage between terminals #B1 and #B3. Voltage must be approximately 12 V. Check
the voltage between terminals #B2 and #B3. Voltage must be approximately 5 V. Check the
voltage between terminal #B3 and the battery negative terminal. Voltage must be approximately 0
V. If the above readings are OK, the fault is in the cruise control switch.
Other information:
- To connect the breakout box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and
Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM).
Page 145
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1484
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Pressure sensor receiver drier, replacing
Preparatory work
Draining coolant and removing components
Warning! Follow the safety instructions for work on air conditioning systems. See: Refrigerant,
safety regulations See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information.
Note! First read the instructions covering slow and fast leaks.
Note! Always plug the pipes and connections when working on the climate control system.
Drain the refrigerant from the system. See Refrigerant, draining See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant, Draining. Raise the vehicle. Remove the air baffle
beneath the radiator assembly, 2 x screws (1), the 2 x catches (2).
Removal
Removing the pressure sensor

Page 1831
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing the engine speed (RPM) sensor
Removing the engine speed (RPM) sensor
Remove the tie strap from the torque rod. Open the hose clamp.
Remove:
- the hoses
- the connector from the sensor
- the nut for the sensor
- the sensor.
Installing the engine speed (RPM) sensor

Page 691
Twist the strands on the stripped wire ends. Do NOT forget to do this on all four wire ends.
Note! Make sure the strands are twisted.
Joining the wire ends with the same colors/ single or multi-colored
Page 1284
- Disconnect the pre-routed green (GN) connector (1), taped on the cable harness under the fuse
holder. Connect the connector to the tilt sensor (2)
- Install the tilt sensor on the bracket (3)
- Reinstall the foldable panel.
Applies to all models
- Program the software according to the service information in VIDA.

Page 536
2/29 Relay, Extended X Feed
2/30 X to Feed Overload Relay
2/31 15-Feed Overload Relay
2/32 Engine Management System Main Relay
2/33 Fuel System Relay

Page 634
The commonest types of connector and central electrical unit in the vehicle are listed here. For
more information about secondary locking, primary locking, terminal removal tools, etc., see the
link by each type of connector.
Note! Before working in the connector, disconnect the battery negative terminal, Battery,
disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery,
Disconnecting.
Note! When several tools are recommended for the same type of connector, choose the correct
tool according to the size of the lock.
Page 1706
- Grip the right-hand level sensor and pump holder and pinch the float so that it is held in its lowest
position.
NOTE: Take care with the fuel tank.
Carefully and slowly pull up the holder. Carefully work the holder out.
Pull the hoses out from the tank without pulling up the entire wire from the right-hand hole in the
tank.
NOTE: It is extremely important that the float arm is not broken or bent.
Remove the wire from the old level sensor and pump ejector.
Removing the right-hand level sensor

Page 1138
Installation
Installing relevant components
Install:
- control module
- sealing panel
- washer
- the choke valve with O-rings
- the temperature/pressure sensor with O-ring
- the O-ring for the choke valve seat
- the screws.
Positioning the sealing panel in the control module
Press the choke valve and temperature/pressure sensor into place on the control module contacts.
Place the cupped washer with the convex side against the temperature/pressure sensor. Lubricate
the sealing rings on the valves with oil, P/N 116 1641-4 (0.3 litres).
Installing the O-ring

Page 1990
6/17 Driver Seat Motor, Up/Down Front Edge
6/18 Driver Seat Motor, Up/Down Rear Edge
6/19 Driver Seat Motor, Forward/Backward
6/20 Passenger Seat Motor, Forward/Backward
6/25 Starter Motor

Locations
Power Window Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1250
- Remove the seat cushion (1). First pull the front edge of the seat cushion up. Pull the cushion
forwards. Then lift the seat cushion out
- Fold the right-hand rear backrest forward.
Preparations in the cargo compartment
Note! Right-hand drive cars: Proceed directly to point.
- Remove the cargo compartment carpet at the rear edge. First turn the two knobs (1) 90°.
- Pull up the front of the cargo compartment carpet. Fold the front half back over the rear half of the
cargo compartment carpet
- Slide the entire cargo compartment carpet forwards slightly and then turn it
- Lift the carpet out of the car.

Page 1970
2/34 Fog Light Relay, Front
2/35 Starter Motor Relay
2/49 Relay, Rear Fog Light
2/52 Relay, 151 Feed, Rear
2/59 Unlocking Relay, Fuel Filler Flap

Page 129
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1604
- To access/replace the central electronic module (CEM), see Central electronic module (CEM),
replacing See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and
Repair/Central Electronic Module (CEM), Replacing.
- For information on signals and additional values, see Signal specification See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters.
- To connect the test box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the
Breakout Box/Connecting the Breakout Box, Central Electronic Module (CEM).
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1003
Was the status of the turn signal lamp switch correct?
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the turn signal lamp switch
Other information:
- To replace the turn signal lamp switch, see Turn signal switch, replacing, M58, M66, M66 AWD,
AW50/51 AWD, AW55-50/51SN, M56 See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors and Switches - Lighting
and Horns/Turn Signal Switch/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Switch, Replacing.
Select "Continue" when the fault has been remedied.
Continue - Checking components
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the turn signal lamp switch status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Try replacing the steering wheel module (SWM).
Caution! A new control module is delivered without software. The control module must be
programmed in order to function after replacement.
Other information:
- To replace and program the steering wheel module (SWM), see Steering wheel module (SWM),
replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair.
Page 1605
Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Trouble-Shooting Information
Reverse Light Does Not Work
Condition
No diagnostic trouble codes are displayed.
Possible source
- Short circuit to ground.
Fault symptom[s]
- Reverse light does not work when reverse is selected.
Reverse Light Remains On
Condition
Possible source
- Faulty switch
- Short circuit to voltage supply
- Open circuit.
Fault symptom[s]
- Reverse light remains on.

Page 935
------------------------
FAULT FOUND - Trouble-shooting information
-------------------------------------------------
Fault-tracing communication problems is now finished.
Do you want to try establishing communication again?
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Reading control unit id

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1825
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Sensor
The function of the camshaft position (CMP) sensor is to detect the camshaft flanks. The signal
from the sensor is used by the engine control module (ECM) to determine the radial position of the
camshaft.
Each camshaft has four flanks per camshaft revolution. A pulse wheel on the camshaft consisting
of four teeth (the teeth are positioned by each flank) is used by the camshaft position sensor (CMP)
to detect the flanks.
The flanks are not symmetric on the camshaft. This allows the control module to determine which
flank has been detected and therefore which operating cycle the camshaft is in.
When the operating cycle of the camshaft is established, the control module is able to determine
which cylinder should be ignited. In the event of misfire or engine knock, the control module is also
able to determine which cylinder is misfiring or knocking. Also see Knock sensor (KS) and Engine
speed (RPM) sensor.
Data about the position of the camshaft is used during camshaft control (CVVT). See Function.
The sensor, which is a magnetic resistor with a permanent magnet, is grounded in the control
module and supplied with 5 V from the control module. When one of the teeth on the camshaft
pulse wheel passes the camshaft position (CMP) sensor, a signal is transmitted to the control
module from the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. The signal varies between 0 - 1 V and is low
when a flank passes the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor is positioned at the rear of the engine by the controllable
camshaft (CVVT).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
Page 11
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1401
Fold up the floor carpet. Remove the screws. Lift up the bracket with the sensor. Disconnect the
connector. Remove the nuts for the sensor. Replace the sensor.
Installation
Yaw rate sensor (2)

Page 1918
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Input Speed Sensor, Replacing
Transmission input speed sensor, replacing
models, some variation may occur. However, the essential information is always correct.
Removing engine compartment components
Ignition off. Remove the air cleaner housing ACL assembly with the intake pipe.
Removing the gear selector cable
Page 1797
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor transmits signals to the engine control module (ECM) about the
mass of the intake air. This data is used by the engine control module (ECM) to calculate:
- the injection period
- the ignition timing
- turbocharger (TC) boost pressure (turbocharged engines only)
- the engine load.
The transmission control module (TCM) also uses this data for its gear shift calculations. This data
is transmitted to the transmission control module (TCM) from the engine control module (ECM) via
the high speed side of the Controller area network (CAN).
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor consists of a plastic housing with connectors, test electronics and
an aluminum heat sink. The test electronics in the mass air flow (MAF) sensor consist of a hot film
comprised of four resistors. The hot film is cooled by the air flow to the engine.
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor is supplied with battery voltage by the system relay and is
grounded in the engine control module (ECM). The signal from the sensor is analogue and varies
between approximately 1 - 5 V depending on the air mass. Low air flow (low mass) results in low
voltage, high air flow (high mass) gives high voltage. No air flow gives a reading of approximately 1
V.
Intake temperature The temperature sensor detects the temperature of the intake air after the
charge air cooler (CAC). This data is used by the engine control module (ECM) to calculate the
boost pressure control (turbocharger (TC) and to calculate the injection period. The control module
also controls certain diagnostic functions using the signal from the temperature sensor.
The sensor, which is an NTC resistor, is grounded in the control module and supplied with power
(signal) from the control module. The resistance in the sensor changes according to the
temperature of the intake air. This provides the control module with a signal of between 0 - 5 V.
The lower the temperature the higher the voltage (high resistance). A high temperature results in
low voltage (low resistance).
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor is positioned between the air cleaner (ACL) housing and the intake
manifold.
The engine control module (ECM) has diagnostics for the air mass and intake temperature of the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor. The signals can be read using VADIS/VIDA.
Page 474
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 1827
Install:
- the sensor
- screws. Tighten.
Connect the connector for the sensor.
Finishing
Start the engine. Check the function.

Page 689
Use tools 951 2633 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2633 Terminal Removal
Tool
951 2639 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2639 Terminal Removal Tool to
remove the primary lock, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Page 375
Cargo Compartment Relays/Shunts

Page 660
Note! tool 951 2852 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2852 Terminal Removal
Tool can only be used for socket housings.
Primary locking
Secondary locking

Connector Type 3
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Page 423

Page 692
Note! Cable should always be connected colour for colour, single colour to single colour or multiple
colors to multiple colors. The cables must NOT under any circumstances be incorrectly connected,
always colour for colour.
Install the shrink tubing 951 2783 in the pressure tool 951 2785 Crimping tool See: Tools and
Equipment/951 2785 Crimping Tool in output "Green". Clamp the pliers enough to hold the shrink
tubing.
Page 841
Checking the windshield washing
Checking components
Hint: If the read-out of the status of the wiper switch gave a correct result, the problem is not in the
Steering wheel module (SWM).
Was the status of the wiper switch OK?
No - Replacing a component
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing a component
Replace the wiper switch.
Other information
- Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and
Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and Repair
Select continue when the defect has been remedied.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the washer using the windshield wiper switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the windshield wiper switch status is OK, the fault is in the windshield wiper switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information
Page 1674
7/173 Sensor, Camshaft

Page 1764
Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID
Oxygen Sensor and Catalyst Configuration Example
V6/V8/V12 Engine W/2 Exhaust Banks & 4 Catalysts
V6/V8/V12 Engine W/2 Exhaust Banks & 3 Catalysts
L4 Engine W/1 Exhaust Banks & 2 Catalysts

Page 344
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1123
The gear selector control module (GSM) communicates with the central electronic module (CEM)
to activate the shift-lock. The shift-lock solenoid power supply and ground is directly connected to
the gear selector module (GSM). The "W" switch in the gear selector assembly top panel is
positioned on the printed circuit board for the gear selector module (GSM) and activates Winter
mode. There are diagnostics for the gear selector module (GSM). Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
are stored in the transmission control module (TCM) in the event of a fault.
Gear selector assembly for AW55-50
There are two new types of gear selector assembly for the AW55-50. There is one gear selector
assembly with seven positions and one with the Geartronic-function.
Gear selector assembly with 7 positions
The gear selector has seven positions with the following functions: -
P Park position
- R Reverse position
- N Neutral position
- D Automatic shifting between all gears. (Does not apply when the mode selector is in winter mode
(W), for further information see, Function/Shifting program/Winter mode)
- 4 Fifth gear is blocked in this mode
- 3 Fourth and fifth gear are blocked in this mode
- L Only first and second gear function in this mode. (Speed variation depends on which engine the
transmission is working with and does not apply when the mode selector is in winter mode (W), for
further information see, Function/Shifting program/Winter mode).
Gear selector assembly with Geartronic function
The gear selector assembly with Geartronic has a unique appearance and function. In addition to
P/R/N/D modes it also has "manual" (MAN) shifting mode. The gear selector for Geartronic has the
following functions: -
P Park position
- R Reverse position
- N Neutral position
- D Automatic shifting between all gears. (Does not apply when the mode selector is in winter mode
(W), for further information see, Function/Shifting program/Winter mode)
- MAN Manual shifting. There are three hall sensors on the gear selector module (GSM). A
permanent magnet on the gear selector lever affects the output signals of the sensors to the gear
selector module (GSM).
Page 1216
Fuses, Cargo Compartment
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Engine Compartment Relay

Page 879
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Page 2023
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 721
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
Engine control module (ECM), replacing
Special tools:
999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench
Points to observe when replacing the control module
Caution! New software can only be ordered when the control module is installed in the vehicle.
VIDA reads off the new control module identity which is required to order the correct software.The
software can only be ordered when the new control module is installed in the car.
Caution! Wait 2 minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The main relay must be
voltage-free before the control module can be removed from the car. If the engine cooling fan runs
on after the ignition has been switched off, wait until it stops and then wait for another 2 minutes.
Caution! Always check that the control module and control module box connector pins and sleeves
are not bent or damaged. This may have caused the fault.
Removing the engine control module (ECM)

Page 57
communication works on another vehicle, the malfunction is in the vehicle.
Diagnostic outlet
Communication cables k-line
- Check the communication cables between diagnostic outlet #7 and connected control modules for
open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage.
Communication cable for cruise control as own system (not integrated)
- Check the communication cable between diagnostic outlet #13 and cruise control for open circuit,
short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references above.
Communication cable for engine management system Fenix 5.1 and diesel (not Lucas)
- Check the communication cables between diagnostic outlet #11/#15 and engine control module
(ECM) for open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 276
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 823
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Description and Operation System Overview
System overview
Control module
The steering wheel module (SWM) has the task of managing the signals for those functions which
can be controlled via the steering wheel control stalks and buttons. The signals are transmitted to
the relevant control modules via the control area network (CAN). The actual functions are not in the
steering wheel module (SWM). The steering wheel module (SWM) manages the control signals for
the following functions:
- Volume control and CD track / radio selection
- Volume control during hands free carphone calls and menu selection for the phone module (PHM)
- Menu selection for traffic information
- Front windshield wipers/washers
- Rear windshield wiper/washer (V70, V70XC/XC70 and XC90)
- Cruise control
- Turn signal lamps

- High and low beam
- Trip computer and displaying / erasing text messages in the driver information module (DIM).
The control module is integrated in the steering wheel bracket. The steering wheel must be
removed to replace the control module. Control stalks, key pads and switches can be replaced as
separate units. Cars with DSTC also have a steering wheel angle sensor installed in the contact
reel in the steering wheel module (SWM). For further information, see Design and Function,
Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module (SAS). The steering wheel module (SWM) communicates
with directly connected components and communicates with other control modules via the Control
Area Network (CAN). The control module checks activations and input and output signals via an
integrated diagnostic system. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if the control module
detects an error. In certain cases the control module replaces the faulty signal with a substitute
signal. Any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are stored in the control module memory. This
information can be read off using VIDA via the data link connector (DLC) in the car. A simple way
to ensure that the steering wheel module (SWM) is powered and grounded is to flash the headlamp
high beam or to change the audio or carphone volume. For further information, also see Signal
specifications.
Signals
Throttle Control
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Control
Throttle Control
To ensure that the correct throttle angle is reached, the engine control module (ECM) controls the
throttle shutter in the throttle unit (6/120), mainly using the signal from:
- accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor (7/51)
- clutch pedal sensor (7/123)
- stop lamp switch (3/9)
- the throttle position (TP) sensor on the electronic throttle unit (6/120)
- brake control module (BCM) (4/16), signal for the brake pedal sensor.
Additional signals and parameters are used to ensure optimum throttle control. For example there
is compensation for the load from the air conditioning (A/C) compressor, load from the transmission
depending on the gear selected (automatic), engine temperature etc. In cars with Four-C
(Continuously Controlled Chassis Concept), the throttle characteristic changes depending on the
driving mode selected.
The position of the throttle is measured by two potentiometers, in the throttle position (TP) sensor,
which are on the throttle unit. These are connected, so that potentiometer 1 produces a higher
voltage as the throttle angle increases, while potentiometer 2 does the opposite.
In a combustion engine, the difference between the minimum and maximum airflow is
considerable. The smaller air flows need more thorough regulation, so the potentiometer signal
from potentiometer 1 is amplified approximately 4 times in the engine control module (ECM) before
it reaches the Analog/Digital converter in the engine control module (ECM). This means that there
are three, two real and one fictitious, input signals available to the engine control module (ECM).
These signals are used to determine the position of the throttle and to deploy the damper motor to
the correct position. In general the amplified signal is primarily used for small throttle angles (small
air flows), which are desirable when a high degree of accuracy is required, for idle air trim for
example.
Because the signal is amplified, it reaches its maximum value as early as approximately a quarter
of maximum deployment.
The engine control module (ECM) first uses the signal from potentiometer 1 to measure the throttle
opening. The signal from potentiometer 2 is mainly used to check that potentiometer 1 is
functioning correctly. The engine control module (ECM) then uses the signal to calculate a throttle
angle (actual value). This is the actual throttle angle. The value for the actual throttle angle is used
by those functions in the engine control module (ECM) which depend on this information so that the
throttle can be correctly regulated.
There is an adaptation (learning) in the engine control module (ECM) so that the control module
can calculate how the damper motor needs to be controlled. See "Adaptation of the throttle unit"
below. This adaptation is carried out during manufacture of the car, when the engine control
module (ECM) deploys the throttle disc to the different positions and reads off and registers the
actual values from the potentiometers.
Page 1196
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 460
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1564
Tape the fuel pump's fuel lines/electrical wiring to the plastic pipe. Pull the wiring out of the hole for
the level sensor. Remove the plastic pipe and the tape. Check that there is no tape/adhesive
residue on the wiring. Pull the wiring forwards and backwards to check that it has not bent or got
trapped.
Finishing
- Install the sensor, backrest, side cushion and seat cushion. See Draining the fuel tank See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service and Repair.
Right Side Fuel Pump With Level Sensor
Right side fuel pump with level sensor
Removal
Preparation
- Remove left side fuel gauge sensor as described in Left fuel gauge sensor See: Left Fuel Gauge
Sensor
- Attach a piece of string or steel wire onto attachments for wire and tube system on left side fuel
gauge sensor.
Page 601
16/60 Integrated Mobile Telephone PHM
16/62 Hand Unit, Mobile Phone
16/64 Antenna, Mobile Telephone
16/65 Antenna Ring/Ignition Switch Lighting
16/67 Amplifier Antenna, Bumper

Page 1194
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 75
ohms The ohmmeter should read 0.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Information
The fault should be diagnosed and remedied. Since this is not the case the fault-tracing process
has failed. Complete the fault-tracing for those fault or try again.
Do you want to terminate fault-tracing at this time?

No - Attempt New Test
------------------------
Page 976
- Ignition off
- Disconnect the audio / carphone switch by disconnecting the lower connector on the audio /
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Activate the buttons. Read off the status of the buttons in the cruise control switch If the readings
give a correct result, the fault is in the audio / carphone switch.
Other information:
- To access the audio / carphone switch, see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 636
Connectors occur in a number of variants with different numbers of conductors. See Connectors,
repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Type 3
Connector, see Connectors, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Type 4
Page 128
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 343
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 486
Relay Box: Service and Repair Integrated Relay/Fuse Box Cargo Compartment/Rear Electronic
Module, Replacing
Relay/fuse box cargo compartment/Rear electronic module (REM), replacing
correct.
Exposing the integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo compartment
Switch off the ignition.

Remove the left side panel in the cargo compartment. Release the integrated relay/fusebox. Lift the
catch by the upper edge and angle out the integrated relay/fusebox.
Page 960
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 31
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 53
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Checking communication errors, car model V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90
Different speed on the CAN-communication can lead to problems
Volvo's vehicles have different speed of communication on the high-speed part of the CAN-network
(HS-CAN), depending on model year.
- Model year -2004 communicates with 250 kbit/s.
- Model year 2005- communicates with 500 kbit/s.
Due to this, it is very important to specify correct vehicle profile before any communication is
started with the vehicle's HS-CAN. This is normally done by pressing on " Retrieve VIN" or by
manually specifying vehicle parameters under "Vehicle profile". If the wrong model year has been
selected, it may lead to blocking of the CAN-net, diagnostic trouble codes being stored in several
control modules or missing response from control modules at continued communication. The
following control modules may be affected by this problem:
- Brake control module (BCM)/(ABS)
- Engine control module (ECM)
- Electronic Throttle Module (ETM)
- Suspension Module (SUM)
- Central electronic module (CEM)
- Transmission control module (TCM)
- Steering wheel angle sensor module (SAS)
- Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
- Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS)
If this happens, take the following action:
- Turn off the ignition and remove the ignition key. Insert the key again in position II.
- If the above does not work, remove the battery cable and connect it again after a minute to reset
the control modules.
- Select the correct vehicle profile in VIDA and erase the diagnostic trouble codes. Check that the
symptoms have disappeared.
Diagnostic outlet
Oil Pressure Sensor, Replacing
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sensor, Replacing
Oil pressure sensor, replacing
Removal
Oil pressure sensor
The oil pressure sensor is located on the bottom edge of the engine between the dip stick and the
bracket for auxiliary equipment.
- Raise the car
- Remove the air baffles on both sides. Then remove the central air baffle from under the engine
- Disconnect the connector
- Unscrew the oil pressure sensor.
Installation
Oil pressure sensor
In reverse order.
Other information
- Tighten to: 27 Nm.

Page 665
Tool
Differential Electronic Module (DEM)
4/82 Differential Electronic Module (DEM)

Page 837
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 26
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 582
10/66 Right-Hand Low Beam
10/68 Left-Hand High Beam
10/70 Left-Hand Low Beam
10/114-115 LH and RH Vanity Mirror Lighting
10/125 Left-Hand Front Courtesy Lighting

Page 48
Communications Control Module: Description and Operation Function
Function
The audio module (AUM) functions as a sound unit in the car and is also connected to other control
modules on the Controller area network (CAN). The audio module (AUM) receives the vehicle
speed signal via the Control area network (CAN). Volume increases with speed (if the function is
selected; the function can be switched off). If a factory-installed carphone (option) is installed, the
audio module (AUM) is muted during telephone calls. If an accessory electronic module (AEM) is
installed, the audio module (AUM) is muted if either a handsfree telephone is used (accessory) or
back-up gear is selected if the car has a back-up warning system (accessory). If the car has the
Road Traffic Information system (RTI) (option), voice information is played back through the
existing loudspeaker. The keypad for remote operation (option) on the steering wheel is directly
connected to the steering wheel module (SWM) via serial communication. The remote control
keypad is on the right-hand side of the steering wheel. It is possible to control the volume
(increase-decrease) and change the preprogrammed radio stations via remote operation. The
buttons are used to select a track when playing a CD, cassette or Mini-Disk. The steering wheel
module (SWM) communicates with the audio module (AUM) via the Controller area network (CAN).
Page 2022
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 658
Socket housing
Open the catches and pull out the secondary lock, use tool 951 2853 Terminal removal tool See:
Tools and Equipment/951 2853 Terminal Removal Tool or an electrician's screwdriver, as
illustrated.
Page 613
54/43 Connector
54/44 Connector
54/45 Connector
54/50 Connector
54/51 Connector
Page 1984
3/131 Switch, Audio/Mobile Phone
3/135 RTI Switch
3/155 Automatic Transmission Program Selector
3/156 Gear Selector Module (GSM)
3/171 Switch, Retractable Door Mirrors

Page 1380
Disconnect the connector for the sensor. Disconnect the cable duct from the torque rod bracket by
carefully prying it off.
Replacing sensor cable, right-hand side
Pull up the sensor together with the cable duct so that the new sensor connector can be
connected.
Remove:
- the tape. Connect the connector
- the old sensor cable from the cable duct.
Install:
- the new sensor cable in the cable duct. Use a new tie strap
- the cable duct on the torque rod bracket.
Removing the air cleaner (ACL) housing, left-hand side
Remove the air cleaner (ACL) housing.

Page 2006
8/18 EVAP Valve
8/19 Solenoid, Variable Valve Time, Inlet
8/28 Turbocharger Control Valve
8/30 Driver Side Airbag Igniter
8/31 Passenger Side Airbag Igniter

Page 697
951 2620 Stripping tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2620 Stripping Tool See information about
stripping length. Refer to: Junction sleeve See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring
Harness/Service and Repair/Junction Sleeve
Page 1554
Finishing
Wipe up any fuel spillage. Position the wiring in the cut-out in the rubber ring. Connect the
connectors. Install the cover over the left-hand level sensor and right-hand level sensor and pump.
Tighten the nuts. Install the rear seat backrest. See Backrest See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Backrest.
Replacing the Level Sensor For the Gas Tank
Replacing the level sensor for the gas tank
Caution! When replacing the level sensor the tank must be removed from the car. The tank must
be placed upright so that the float is not damaged.
Caution! When replacing components on the tank, the gas pipes and the tank must be drained. The
battery negative terminal must be disconnected during all work carried out on gas installations. See
Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery,
Disconnecting.Do not damage the seals.
Removing level sensor assembly

Page 1031
------------------------
Checking communication errors car model S40 (-04) / V40
Diagnostic outlet
short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to
Page 1511
Remove the cover (2) over the level sensor. Disconnect the level sensor connector (3).
Removing the left-hand level sensor
Clean the area around the level sensor thoroughly. Open the left-hand level sensor. Use: 999 5720
Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5720 Wrench.
Page 952
Fault symptom[s]
- Rear windshield washing does not operate.
Checking Rear Windshield Washing
Checking rear windshield washing
Checking components
Activate the tailgate washer with the wiper switch. Read off the status.
Was the wiper switch status OK?
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- To replace the wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and Repair.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the tailgate washer. Read off the status.
Hint: If the tailgate washer status is OK the fault is in the tailgate washer.
Was the tailgate washer status OK?
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 15
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 608
54/1B Connector
54/3LA-G Connector
54/3LH Connector
54/3RA-G Connector
54/4 Connector
Page 1739
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Outside Temperature Sensor
Outside Temperature Sensor
The outside temperature sensor detects the temperature in the surrounding air. The signal is used
by the engine control module (ECM) as a substitute value in the event of a fault in certain
components or functions and to control certain diagnostic functions.
The sensor is a negative temperature coefficient (NTC) type which is supplied with power from the
control module (signal) and is grounded in the control module.
The resistance in the sensor, which provides a signal between 0 - 5 V, changes depending on the
outside temperature. Low temperatures produce high voltage (high resistance), high temperatures
produce low voltage (low resistance).
The outside temperature sensor is positioned in the left door mirror.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the outside temperature sensor. The sensor value
can be read off using VADIS/VIDA.
Page 710
Page 659
Primary lock
Tool
Page 406
Other Relays
Service and Repair
Parking Brake Release Switch: Service and Repair
Parking brake switch, replacing
Removal
Parking brake switch
- Remove the parking brake lever. See Replacing the parking brake lever See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Lever/Service and Repair/Replacing the Parking
Brake Lever
- Cut or grind off the rivet head. Remove the remainder of the rivet
- Remove the parking brake switch.
Installation
Parking brake switch
- Rivet the parking brake switch into position. Use pop rivet (937881)
- Install the parking brake lever. See Replacing the parking brake lever See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Lever/Service and Repair/Replacing the Parking
Brake Lever.
Page 2039
31/1 Ground Connection

Page 878
Condition
Possible source
- Defective indicator switch
Fault symptom[s]
- Text message in combined instrument cannot be erased.
Checking the Read Button on the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the read button on the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Activate the read button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the read button status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Was the status of the read button correct?
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the read button status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.

Page 575
8/44 Canister Shut-off Valve
8/46 DSTC Activation Module
8/51 - 52 Front Left And Right Side Airbag Igniter
8/59 - 60 RR/RL Head Restraint Solenoids
8/61 Driver Side Airbag Igniter Stage 2

Page 963
- Ignition off.
- Disconnect RTI switch unit.
- Ignition on.
Activate buttons and read status on audio/telephone switch unit buttons. If read-out gave a correct
result the fault is in the RTI switch unit.
- To access RTI switch unit, see the relevant service procedure.
Did read-out of status on audio/telephone switch unit give a correct result?
Yes - Fault Found
No - Checking the wires and components
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the wires and components

Page 1359
The control module for the steering wheel angle sensor is supplied with power from the overload
relay.
Steering wheel angle sensor
The steering wheel angle sensor is incorporated with the SRS contact reel, which in turn is installed
on the steering wheel module. The steering wheel angle sensor is equipped with a disc with two
code paths. Two circuits with light diodes read off a code path each. One circuit measures the
steering angle up to 360 degrees and the other records how many complete turns the steering
wheel has turned. Both circuits measure within ±700 degrees with a precision of 4.5 degrees. This
information is transmitted to the control module for the Steering wheel angle sensor as digital
signals.
Due to the reliance of the DSTC (Dynamic stability and traction control) on information from the
steering angle sensor it is extremely important that the contact reel has been centered correctly
and that only an original Volvo steering wheel is used.
Function For information regarding the brake control module or ABS control module, refer DSTC
(Dynamic stability and traction control) in Brake Control System.
SAS Diagnostic Functions

General
Locations
Brake Lamp Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1483
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Sensor
The air conditioning (A/C) pressure sensor detects the pressure in the high-pressure side of the air
conditioning (A/C) system. This is so the engine control module (ECM) can control:
- engine cooling fan (FC) start
- stopping the compressor if the pressure in the air conditioning (A/C) is too high
- constant idle speed compensation for the air conditioning (A/C) compressor load.
The sensor is linear. It is grounded in the control module and supplied with a 5 Volt current from the
control module. A linear signal (between 0 - 5 V depending on the pressure in the air conditioning
(A/C)) is transmitted to the control module. At 0.25 kPa or lower, the voltage is 0 V, at 3100 kPa the
voltage is approximately 4.75 V. Low pressure results in low voltage, high pressure in high voltage.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the air conditioning (A/C) pressure sensor. The
sensor value can be read off using VADIS/VIDA.
The air conditioning (A/C) pressure sensor is positioned on the high pressure delivery line for the
air conditioning (A/C) system.
Transmission Controls - Slip/Shudder/DTC 002F
Control Module: Customer Interest Transmission Controls - Slip/Shudder/DTC 002F
NO: 43-35
DATE: 1-17-2003
MODEL/YEAR: MY 03 S60 AWD/V70 AWD/XC 70/XC 90 2.5 LT
SUBJECT: SW FID 890, TCM DTC 002F, Torque Converter Slip / Shudder, CPS Plus Action
CHASSIS: Please See Table Below
DESCRIPTION:
Some MY 2003 cars built before the following chassis breaks, may set a 002F code or have a
slipping/shuddering torque converter. If the slip/shudder is present, it will be felt in 4 and/or 5th gear
with a locked converter.
SERVICE:
If a customer has a complaint that matches the above description, erase the DTC and load SW FID
890 (PN 30646927).
This SW is very similar to the original SW in the TCM, so there is no need to reset the adaptation to
zero.
Take the car for a test drive in 4 and 5 gear with a locked converter to verify its function.
Also, cars before the chassis breaks shown should have SW FID 890 loaded before they are road
tested as part of the Customer Preparation Service (CPS).
Warranty Information
Page 1127
- the transmission control system
- the transmission fluid
- the entire transmission
- the transmission control module (TCM). When the adaptation function has been activated, the test
drive instructions must be followed. The following shifts can be adapted:
- 1-2
- 2-3
- 3-4
- 4-5
- N-D
- 5-4
- 4-3
- 3-2
- 2-1
- N-R
- Neutral Control engagement and disengagement, if equipped.
While the car is in this mode, the orange/yellow warning lamp in the center of the combined
instrument panel is used to indicate when each shift has been adapted to its target value. When the
orange/yellow warning lamp (triangle) flashes after each of the listed shifts, the adaptation is
complete.
Note: The function is only available in certain software versions.

Adaptation of the transmission is activated via the VADIS/VIDA vehicle communication socket.
Counter for transmission fluid data
A counter for transmission oil quality is built into the software for the transmission control module
(TCM). The counter counts up the amount of time the oil is above a certain temperature. When the
counter has reached the maximum value, the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for an oil change is
stored in the control module. When replacing transmission fluid the counter must be reset to
prevent a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) being stored incorrectly. This applies when the
transmission fluid is changed and when the fluid is changed during a repair.
The reset function is activated via the VADIS/VIDA vehicle communication socket.
Emergency mode in the event of a fault
An emergency program is activated to deal with the fault when the transmission control module
(TCM) detects a transmission fault (permanent fault). If the transmission control module (TCM)
detects a permanent fault, an emergency mode is activated. The transmission control module
(TCM) then implements corrective action to protect the transmission, while leaving the car in the
best possible drivable condition. Minor malfunctions do not activate an emergency program. There
are different programs depending on the type of fault: -
Emergency mode
- Limp-home mode.
Emergency mode is activated for minor faults and the Limp-home mode for the most serious faults.
If the malfunction is intermittent, the transmission control module (TCM) returns to normal operation
the next time the ignition is switched on.
Emergency mode
The warning lamp in the combined instrument panel comes on and a or text message is displayed
for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored in the transmission control module (TCM). The
transmission shifts in all gears but transmits no signal to the lock-up solenoid. This means that
lock-up is not available.
Limp-home mode
The warning lamp in the combined instrument panel comes on or a text message is displayed for
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored in the transmission control module (TCM). The
transmission control module (TCM) interrupts the activation of all solenoids. This means that no
shifting is possible. The transmission operates only in 3rd gear in positions 3 and L, 4th gear in
position D and reverse in position R. Shifting can only be carried out manually between 3rd and 4th
gear and reverse gear.
Page 318
Other Relays
Page 1156
DTC
Text CSC=Customer Symptom Code
DTC=Diagnostic Trouble Code
Note!
If using a printed copy of this Retailer Technical Journal, first check for the latest online version.
NOTE!
THIS DOCUMENT SUPERSEDES THE PREVIOUS VERSION OF RETAILER TECHNICAL

JOURNAL DATED 06- 15-2010. DEM 0006 has been added to the DTC table in TIE. PLEASE
UPDATE YOUR FILES.
DESCRIPTION:
The DEM Upgrades in the attached document are available to correct the complaints / symptoms
listed in the attachment.
SERVICE: If the vehicle fits in the model year or chassis range for the symptom in the attachment
download a DEM Upgrade.
VOLVO STANDARD TIMES GUIDE (VSTG) INFO:

Operation number 36004-2 - Control module software download- See VSTG
- Claims may be submitted under the new car warranty when there is a documented customer
complaint using claim type: 01
- Labor times are valid at the time of release and are subject to change.
Page 668
Angle out the catches on both sides. Pull out the secondary lock.
Primary lock
Page 314
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1492
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
Sun sensor / alarm LED, replacing
Removal
Sun sensor and alarm LED
- Remove the sun sensor and alarm LED. Use a weatherstrip tool
- Disconnect the connector.
Installation
Sun sensor and alarm LED
Install in reverse order.

Locations
3/60 Auxiliary Light Switch

Locations
Backup Lamp Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 388
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 369
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1932
Clean thoroughly around the sensor. Remove it. Collect the oil in a container.
Install the new sensor
Apply some petroleum jelly to the sensor O-ring. Tighten to 25 Nm.
Insert the cables between the oil cooler hose and control system cover
Install the splashguard under the engine. Route the cables under the gear selector connector. Take
care not to damage the cables.
Install the cables in the socket

Page 1016
- Ignition off
- the control module disconnected.

- Switch off all equipment that takes power from the battery (courtesy lighting, radio etc).
For the control module, connect an ohmmeter between terminal #16 on the breakout box and the
battery negative terminal.
Page 1372

Page 1991
6/26 Generator
6/28 Motor, Passenger Compartment Fan
6/29 Motor, Electric Cooling Fan
6/30 Washer Pump, Rear Window
6/32 Rear Window Wiper Motor

Page 1824

Page 1128
No control of line pressure solenoids SLS and SLT. Maximum system pressure constantly which
results in harsh upshifting and downshifting and harsher shifts when engaging P-R, N-R and N-D.
Page 120
Navigation Module: Service and Repair
Road traffic information module (RTI), replacing
Removal
Hint: Try the latest edition of the DVD before replacing the road traffic information module (RTI).
The software on the DVD may solve problems with the control module. Then reinsert the old DVD
to see if the fault persists.
- Remove the left-hand side panel in the cargo compartment
- Disconnect the connectors
- Remove the screw holding the control module
- Unscrew the bracket from the control module.
Installation
- Screw the control module into place on the bracket
- Screw the bracket into place in the car
- Install the connectors
- Install the left side panel in the cargo compartment.
Ordering software
Order applicable software.
Finishing
Check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the repair.
Description and Operation
Oil Level Sensor: Description and Operation
Oil Level Sensor (2004-, Certain Markets And Models Only)
The oil level sensor provides the engine control module (ECM) with information about the quality
and temperature of the engine oil and the oil level in the oil trough. Which of these functions is used
by the sensor varies between different car models.
All three functions are combined in one unit with a sensor section and an electronics section. There
are no moving parts in the sensor.
The sensor consists of:
- a terminal with three pins
- integrated electronics
- 2 capacitive gauge elements
- a PTC resistor.
The oil level sensor is supplied with 5 V by the engine control module (ECM). The oil level sensor
generates a PWM signal for the engine control module (ECM). Also see Function.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the functions of the oil level sensor. Also see Oil
level sensor, diagnostics.
The oil level signal can be read out in VADIS/VIDA parameter read out.
Page 1388
- Clean the sensor seat so that the sensor will be in the correct position against the pulse wheel.
Use a soft brush
- Install the wheel sensor wiring. Tighten the screw. Tighten to 10 Nm
- Install the wiring on the brake hose.
Installing the wheel sensor connector

Page 2037
20/3-8 Spark Plug and Ignition Coil
20/16 Capacitor
20/27 Shunt, Low Beam CEM
20/28 Shunt, Parking Light/Tail Light REM
20/29 Shunt, Fog Light REM

Page 149
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1585
------------------------
FAULT-TRACING FAILED - No Fault Found
Attempt New Test - Checking the key sensor signal
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1703

Page 560
6/58 - 60 Motor, Front Left and Front Right Power Window
6/62 Left-Hand Power Door Mirror
6/63 Right-Hand Power Door Mirror
6/66 Passenger Seat Motor, Up/Down Rear Edge
6/65 Passenger Seat Motor, Up/Down Front Edge

Page 640
Data Link Connector (DLC). See Connector data link connector (DLC), repair See: Connectors,
Repair/Connector Data Link Connector (DLC), Repair.
Connector for the SRS module, see Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS),
repair See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), Repair.
Locations
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 416
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1029
network. First when communication takes place on this cable, the low and high-speed cables
between the diagnostic outlet and central electronic module (CEM) are connected to the rest of the
network in the vehicle. This is controlled via a relay in the central electronic module (CEM). This
relay is only found on vehicles of model year -2004.
cables between diagnostic outlet #6/ #14 and central electronic module (CEM) #B7/ #B8 for open
above.
Control modules
communicate with the control modules in the car is that the central electronic module (CEM) is

VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Checking communication errors, car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70/C70
Diagnostic outlet
Page 1410
Coolant Level Sensor: Service and Repair
Level sensor, engine coolant, replacing
Removal
Engine coolant level sensor
- Remove the fluid reservoir for the power steering pump from the bracket. Place it to one side. To
remove the fluid reservoir, see
- Disconnect the expansion tank and place to one side
- Remove the sensor using a screwdriver
Installation
Engine coolant level sensor
In reverse order.
Page 433
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 693
Note! The sleeve must sit in the correct output of the pressure tool, position "Green".
Feed the end of the wire in the shrink tubing that is held by the pliers. Feed the wire into the shrink
tubing until it stops, make sure that the wire insulation does not go near the clamp on the sleeve or
the stripped wire will protrude outside the sleeve.
Page 2010
8/81 Solenoid, Variable Valve Timing Outlet
9/1 Front 12V Outlet
9/2 Heated Rear Window
9/12-13 Left/Right Seat Heater
9/16 - 17 Left/Right-Hand Backrest Heating Element

Page 347

Page 919
Finishing the read off
The read off is now complete. Exit this procedure. Log off VIDA. The completed log can now be
printed or saved. Save the log to a disc or save it locally. To save it locally, name the
filevehcom.logunderC:\volvo\logs.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Communication has been interrupted for one of the following reasons:
- The ignition is switched off
- VCT2000 disconnected from the data link connector (DLC)
- VCT2000 disconnected from the VIDA cart
- Communication problems in VIDA application or in car.
- No voltage in the data link connector (DLC).
Check therefore:
- That the control module power supply and ground terminal are fault-free.
- That the fuse for the data link connector (DLC) is intact.
- that the ignition is on
- that the battery voltage (system voltage) is normal (approximately 12 V).
If necessary a battery charger can be connected during the test. For information about charge
currents and the battery, see: Battery, charging See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Battery, Charging
- that VCT2000 is correctly connected to the VIDA cart and the data link connector (DLC)
- that VCT2000 and the wiring is fault-free.
Other information
- For information about fuse and terminal numbers, see the relevant Wiring Diagram.
Try to establish communication again or exit reading off diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
Depending on the communication fault, select one of the following options.
1. Try again 2. Fault-trace more comprehensively for the communication problem that has occurred
3. Exit fault-tracing / Read off from the next system.
Which alternative is requested?
1 - Reading off diagnostic data
2 - Checking communication
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Checking communication
Checking communication errors
Selecting car model
Select car model to obtain relevant troubleshooting information.
Select one of the following model alternatives
1. S40 (04-) / V50.

Page 17

Page 1723
7/162 Pressure Sensor, Fuel Line

Page 1285
Tow Sensor: Service and Repair Tilt Sensor Alarm, Replacing
Tilt sensor alarm, replacing
Removal
Level sensor for the alarm
- Remove the hatch from the side panel. See Cargo compartment side panel cover See: Body and
Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Trunk / Liftgate/Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel/Service and
Repair/Cargo Compartment Side Panel Cover
- Press the catches down on the underneath of the sensor so that it releases from the bracket for
the integrated relay/fusebox. Then lift the sensor outwards and upwards so that the upper channels
release from the bracket
Installation
Level sensor for the alarm

In reverse order.
Page 895
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking components
Hint: If the turn signal lamp switch status is OK, the fault is not in the steering wheel module
(SWM).
Locations
3/4 Cruise Control Switch SWS

Page 1756
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Replacing the Oil Pressure Sensor
Replacing the oil pressure sensor
Removing the oil pressure sensor
Remove the hose from the charge air pipe.
Remove:
- the screw for the charge air pipe in the cylinder block
- the connector from the oil pressure sensor
- the oil pressure sensor. Use a long 24 mm socket.
Place paper underneath in case of oil leakage.

Installing the oil pressure sensor
Page 194

Page 956
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
Is the car equipped with the Road Traffic Information (RTI) system?
-------------------------------------------------

Page 16

Page 186
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1199
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 566
7/61 Input Speed Sensor
7/62 Output Speed Sensor
7/74 Oil Temperature Sensor, Automatic Transmission
7/77 Temperature Sensor, Intake Air

Page 1424
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Replacing the
Thermostat and/or Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Replacing the thermostat and/or engine coolant temperature sensor
Special tools:
951 2885 Sleeve See: Tools and Equipment/951 2885 Sleeve
Replacing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Removing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Remove:
- the upper timing belt cover
- cable from the sensor
- the sensor from the thermostat housing. Use socket951 2885 Sleeve See: Tools and
Equipment/951 2885 Sleeve.
Note! Put paper underneath the sensor to prevent coolant spillage.
Installing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Install:
- the sensor with a new seal
- Tighten to 22 Nm, use socket951 2885 Sleeve See: Tools and Equipment/951 2885 Sleeve
- the upper camshaft cover.
Replacing the thermostat
Preparation
Remove the cap from the expansion tank. Install a hose clamp on the upper coolant hose. Raise
the car. Remove the lower splashguard. Position a container under the engine drain cock. Drain 2
liters of engine coolant. Close the cock. Install the lower splash guard. Lower the car. Disconnect
the sensor cable connector. Remove the upper timing belt cover.
Removing the thermostat
Remove
- the auxiliaries belt.
Remove the delivery pipe from the power steering pump.
Note! Put paper under the generator (GEN) to avoid oil spillage.
Remove:
- the servo pump
- the thermostat housing from the cylinder head.

Remove the cover and the thermostat. Install a new thermostat with a new gasket.
Note! Ensure that the thermostat is positioned correctly in the thermostat housing.
Installing the thermostat
Caution! For tightening torques not in the text, see Tightening torque See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Tightening Torque.
Page 672
Press out the secondary lock from the cable side using tool 951 2811 Terminal removal tool See:
illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 1001
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the tailgate wiper. Read off the status.
Hint: If the tailgate wiper switch status is OK the fault is in the tailgate wiper.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- For replacing and programming and replacing the control module: Steering wheel module (SWM),
replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair
Page 1259
Reinstall:
- the sill trim panels, front and rear
- the side panels in the cargo compartment
- the floor carpet and sill moulding in the cargo compartment
- the panel and floor carpet at the front passenger or driver's seat.
- Program the system according to the service information in VIDA.

Page 1997
7/12 Solar Sensor, Indicator Alarm and Electronic Immobilizer
7/15 Heated Oxygen Sensor
7/16 Coolant Temperature Sensor
7/17 Mass Airflow Sensor MAF
7/23 - 24 Rear and Front Knock Sensor

Page 899
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Windshield Wiper Switch
Checking components
Page 297
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 402
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 355
Install the correct fuse / relay depending on the model (year) and desired function
Applies when connecting the fog tail lamp function
- Install the relay in the rear electronic module, terminal MI 7.
Applies when connecting the automatic shut-off function for the fog tail lamp Note! This function
requires software unique to the car.
Program the software according to the service information in VIDA.
Applies when connecting the positive power supply / charging function (15I supply) on the S80
(model year 1999)
- Install the relay in the rear electronic module (REM), terminal MA 1
- Install a 15 A fuse in the rear electronic module, terminal 9.
Applies when connecting the positive power supply / charging function (15I supply) on the S80,
S60, V70 (00-) and XC90
- Install the relay in the rear electronic module (REM), terminal MA 1
- Install a 20A fuse in the rear electronic module (REM), terminal 9, and a 15A fuse in terminal 15.
Applies to the S80/S60 manufactured before week 38-2001 without positive power supply
- Remove the two relays in terminals MI 6 and MI 4. Replace them with new relays with P/N
8651661. The third relay must not be used for these cars.
Applies to the V70 (00-) manufactured before week 26-2002 without positive power supply
- Remove the three relays in terminals MI 6, MI 5 and MI 4. Replace them with relay P/N 8651661
in terminal MI 6 and MI 4 and relay P/N 8663490 in terminal MI 5.
- Disconnect the connector for the towbar wiring. Locate the connector by following the wiring that
comes up through the rubber seal in the floor in the cargo compartment, where the battery breather
tube exits
- Release the red catches by pressing them forward
- Connect the blue (BL) cable to terminals 1, 5 or 12, depending on the desired function. Terminals:
1 = Charging; 5 = Fog tail lamp; 12 = Reversing lamp
- Return the catches to the locked position.
Note! If the "Charging" function is to be used, the existing cable terminal must be cut off and
replaced with the cable terminal from the
Page 1692
Install:
- the thermostat housing. Use a new gasket
- the connector for the sensor
- the servo pump
- the delivery line for the power steering pump
- the upper timing belt cover.
Finishing
Remove the hose clip. Fill with coolant. Install the cap on the expansion tank. Test drive the engine
until the thermostat has opened. Check for leakage. Top up the coolant and oil if necessary.
Page 73
Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 896
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the turn signal lamp switch status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 1340
Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Slacken off the snap ring around the mounting for the
sensor slightly. Insert a narrow screwdriver or wedge. Press one end of the snap ring in
approximately 10 mm. Press radially backwards in the groove for the snap ring. Remove the
sensor and the O-ring.
Installation
Installing pedal position sensor

LH & RH Front ABS Sensor

Page 464
Other Relays
Page 1270
Steering Mounted Controls Assembly: Service and Repair RTI Switch
RTI switch
Removing the steering wheel module
Remove the steering wheel module according to Steering wheel module See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module/Service and
Repair/Steering Wheel Module.
Removing the keypad
Remove the keypad according to Keypad unit, steering wheel, replacing See: Keypad Unit,
Steering Wheel, Replacing.
Removing the switch
- Remove the two screws from the mounting bracket
- Press the keypad out of the steering wheel cover.
Installation
In reverse order.
Page 590
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1248
- Remove the trim strip on the right and left-hand sides.
- Remove the two screws (1)
- Remove the front screws
- Press the centre pin on the six clips on the top of the bumper. Remove the clips
- Release the two clips (5) on the underneath of the bumper in the same way
- Remove the headlamp wiper arms. See the instructions in VIDA.
- Pull the bumper forwards whilst pulling both sides outwards until the edges release from the side
mountings.
Hint: This operation is easier with two people.
- Disconnect both the connectors for the fog lamp
- Release the quick-release connector for the headlamp washer if applicable.
- Install the backing paper on the bumper.

Page 1014
Select Continue when the fault has been remedied.
Continue - Verification
-------------------------------------------------
Verification
Page 918
- Ignition on.
This function is used to read off the diagnostic data from the control module in thebackground. If
the VIDA log function is activatedwhilethe read out is taking place, all data that is read off will be
logged. The VIDA log function allows logs to be saved or read off for example. This makes it easier
to analyze data or to include the log files in a report for example.
- VIDA log function activated (log status on).

Note! If this has not already been done, exit this procedure. Select vehicle profile and set the
logging status to On.
If the VIDA log function is already activated and has previously logged other activities which are not
required, exit this procedure and log off VIDA. The existing log can then be removed. Delete the log
and close it. Then log on to VIDA again.
Do you want to start reading off? The data read off starts automatically when YES is selected.
Yes - Reading off diagnostic data
No - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Reading off diagnostic data
Continue - Finishing the read off
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1518
Remove:
- the tie strap around the wiring above the pump
- the level sensor by pressing in the two clips and pulling upwards
- the thin pipe from the holder on the outside of the fuel tank unit
- the wiring from the holder in the fuel tank unit.
Installation
Only applies to vehicles with parking heaters
If the vehicle has an engine block heater, drill out the hole connection in the fuel tank unit. Use a -4
mm drill bit. Transfer the dip pipe.
Installing the right-hand level sensor

Page 1472
If the air quality sensor is fault free, the damper for the air intake will gradually open after
approximately 15 seconds.
Installation
Installing the windshield wiper and cowl
Install:
- the cowl over the windshield wiper recess. See Cowl and gutter, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl and Gutter, Replacing
- the windshield wipers. See Wiper arm / blade, windshield, replacing See: Wiper and Washer
Note! Cover the air intake to the passenger compartment when the engine compartment or the car
is being treated with wax or preserving agent.
Page 1339
Braking Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Pedal position sensor, replacing
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Press the brake pedal a few times until the pedal becomes stiff and rises slightly. This
releases the vacuum in the power brake booster and thus prevents the O-ring from being sucked in
when the pedal position sensor is removed.
Removal
Removing pedal position sensor

Page 869
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 293
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 487
Hint: The rear panel in the side panel of the cargo compartment can be removed to change fuses.
Relay and fuse location, 11D
For the location of the relays and fuses, see:
1. Wiring diagram for relevant model year 2. Decals at both the integrated relay box and fusebox in
the car 3. Pocket data book 4. Owner's Manual.
Installing the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment
Align the integrated relay/fusebox in the grooves in the bracket and press into place. Install the left
side panel in the cargo compartment.
Replacing the rear electronic module (REM)
The rear electronic module (REM) is a separate unit in the relay box in the cargo compartment.
Caution! New software can only be ordered when the control module is installed in the car. VIDA
reads off the new control module identity which is required to order the correct software.
Release the relay and fuse box. See Exposing the integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo
compartment.
Removing the control module

Page 851
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Locations

Locations
7/10 Interior Temperature Sensor

Page 1255
- Mark the rear section for holes. See the illustration. The illustration shows the right-hand side.
Make the same measurements on the left-hand side
- Drill through the rear section. Use a 50 mm hole saw.
Installing the sensor holders
- Wash any dirt and stones off the bumper casing. Use a mild soap solution
- Clean around the drilled holes. Use a wet cloth. Allow to dry
- Apply activator (P/N 8637076) around the holes on the inside of the bumper. Allow to dry.
- Clean the mounting surfaces on the sensor holders. Use the wet cloth. Allow to dry
- Apply activator (P/N 8637076) to the cleaned surfaces of the sensor holders. Allow to dry
- Clean the sensor surfaces on the sensor. Use the wet cloth. Allow to dry
- Apply a thin layer of activator over the sensors.
Note! Only paint the parts that are visible after installation.
Page 1253
- Remove the plug from the hole into the passenger compartment.
If the car has a rubber grommet without room for more cables
- Replace the existing rubber grommet with the rubber grommet from the kit.
If the car has a rubber grommet with room for more cables
- Cut the end off the spare rubber nipple and route the cable to the passenger compartment
- Thread the rubber grommet on from the kit. Lubricate the cable to facilitate sliding on the rubber
grommet. Use soap. Route the cable through the hole. Press the rubber grommet into place
- Ensure that the insulation sheath for the cable is positioned against the lead-in. Secure it using a
tie strap.
- Push the floor carpet to one side. Pull in the cable.
- Locate the connector that was disconnected earlier
- Release the catch
- Install the cable end pins in the connector.
1. Blue (Blue, BL) 2. Green (Green, GN) 3. Violet (Violet, VO) 4. Yellow (Yellow, Y) 5. White
(White, W) 6. Black (Black, SB). -
Press the connector catch back into place.

Page 465
Relay Box: Locations Relays, Fuse Boxes and Wiring
Relays, Fuse Boxes And Wiring
1. Integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo compartment, rear electronic module 2. Relay box in the
passenger compartment, central electronic module (CEM) 3. Fusebox in the passenger
compartment 4. Integrated relay/fusebox in engine compartment 5. Cable harness 6. Ground cable,
battery.
Page 914
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Contents
Select type of description.
- Frozen values steering wheel module, description See: Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module,
Description
- Counters, description
- Status identifier, description
Description of Parameters
Description of parameters
Note! The parameters that can be read off for the steering wheel module display how the steering
wheel module interprets the position on the buttons and control stalks. In the event of a fault in the
buttons or the wiring, the status will be constantly On or Off depending on the position on the
buttons and control stalks.
High beam flash, status
The value is displayed if the high beam flash is activated. Not activated Flash Rocker position high
beam / low beam
Read button, status
The value indicates if the read button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Reset button, status
The value indicates if the reset button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Right-hand indicator lamps, status
This value indicates whether the right-hand indicator lamps are activated. Not activated Activated
Left-hand indicator lamps, status
This value indicates whether the left-hand indicator lamps are activated. Not activated Activated
Cruise control on / off button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control on / off button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control +button, status
This value indicates whether the +button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Page 1503
Yes - Fault Found
No - Checking floats and wiring
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1736

Page 1812
7/81 Pressure Sensor, Intake Manifold

Page 2053
7/129 Through 10/52

Page 991
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the RTI Switch Unit
Checking the RTI switch unit

Locations
System Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 2056
5/1 Through 8/97 (Supplement)

Tilt Sensor
Tow Sensor: Service and Repair Tilt Sensor
Tilt sensor
Tilt sensor
car.
Applies to the S60/S80
Preparations
Locations

Page 1688
- Jack up the car.
- Drain the coolant as described in Radiator / charge air cooler (CAC), replacement See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Turbocharger/Intercooler/Service and
Repair/Radiator / Charge Air Cooler (CAC), Replacement.
- Lower the car.
- Loosen oil reservoir for servo pump as described in.
- Remove coolant reservoir and put it to one side.
- Remove screws and outer/upper timing-gear casing.
- Remove screws and wire channel.
- Disconnect connector.
- Remove 4 screws and thermostat housing.

- Remove sensor and wires.
Installation
- Install thermostat housing sensor.
- Position wires in slot on thermostat housing.
Note! The white marks should be positioned in lower opening of slot, from underneath.
- Position gasket on thermostat housing correctly and install thermostat housing using two of the
screws.
- Position thermostat housing correctly and tighten the four screws.
- Position wire channel correctly and position wire in channel.
- Tighten screw on wire channel.
- Connect the connector.
- Install outer/upper timing-gear casing.
- Install coolant reservoir.
- Install oil reservoir for servo pump as described in.
- Fill up coolant.
- Check for leaks.
Page 1012
- Ignition off
- the control module disconnected
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal #16 on the breakout box and the battery negative
terminal. To connect the breakout box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and
A/T Controls - TCM Updates For Various Concerns/Issues
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - TCM Updates For Various
Concerns/Issues
TIE Technical Journal
Title Transmission Control Module (TCM) Software (SW)
Ref No US16761.1.7 en-GB
Issuer -
Partner 3 US 7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group 4378
Func Desc software
Status Released
Status Date 2011-01-05
Issue Date 2011-01-03
Reference VIDA, VSTG, RTJs 17906, 20857, 23193
Attachment
Vehicle Type
Page 325
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 1033
------------------------
FAULT FOUND - Fault-tracing information
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Reading off diagnostic data

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 807
Other Relays
Checking Reverse Light Contact
Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Checking Reverse Light Contact
Reverse Light Does Not Work
Checking reverse light contact
Checking wire and replacement of component
Check the wire between the central electronic module (CEM) 1A and reverse light contact 2 (3/10)
for a short circuit to ground as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Also check the connector for a short
circuit to ground as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking
Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. If no fault is found on the wire, check the function of the
reversing lamp switch.
Hint: If brake light contact is closed, the voltage between 1 and 2 on the contact is 0 V.
Do the necessary corrective action.
Additional information
- To access/replace the CEM connector, see Central electronic module (CEM), replacing See:
Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair/Central
Electronic Module (CEM), Replacing
- For information on signals and additional values, see Signal specification See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
- To connect a test box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the
Breakout Box/Connecting the Breakout Box, Central Electronic Module (CEM).
Page 1264

Page 1069
- Remove the old horn. The horn will not be reused.
Installation
- Take the new horn from the kit

- Insert the new left dummy button in its socket
- Press the dummy button until the catch engages
- Install the screw. Tighten the dummy button
- Connect the connector to the dummy button.
- Take the remote control keypad (from the kit) and insert it in its socket
- Press the keypad until the catch engages
- Install the screw. Tighten the keypad
- Connect the connector to the keypad.
- Reinstall the horn. Ensure that the three springs are correctly positioned. Check that the ground
lead is not trapped
- Tighten the screws crosswise. Tighten to 6.5 Nm (5 ft.lb)
- Reinstall the ground lead. Tighten the ground lead
- Connect the connector for the horn and the keypads
- Check the function of the horn. Press the horn all the way round its circumference.
Page 1796
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (2002-2004)
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor gauges the air mass sucked into the engine. It continuously
transmits signals to the engine control module (ECM) about the mass of the intake air. This data is
used by the engine control module (ECM) to calculate:
- the engine load.
V.
manifold.
The shape of the mass air flow (MAF) sensor is slightly different on naturally aspirated engines and
also contains an air temperature sensor.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the mass air flow (MAF) sensor. The signal can be
read using VADIS/VIDA.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (2005-)
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor measures the air mass sucked into the engine. On naturally
aspirated engines and 5 cylinder turbocharged engines (except B5254T2/-T4), it also measures the
temperature of the intake air.
Air mass
Page 489
Remove all relays and shunts bridged to the control module. Note the locations.
Release the catch on the rear. Use a screwdriver. Lift and pull out the control module.
Check
Check that the control module's connectors are intact.
- Press the control module into place so that the catch on the rear engages
- Position the connector. Carefully press the connector down.
Note! The pins are fragile. Check that the connector goes straight down into the control module.
- Tighten the screw for the connector
- Check that the connector cover is correctly positioned. Remedy if necessary
- Install the relays and shunts. Note their locations

- Install the integrated relay / fusebox. See Installing the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo
compartment.
Ordering software
Order the software. See 9494723.

Page 645
Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Release the secondary lock. Use electrician's screwdriver as illustrated.
Caution! Disconnect and work with only one cable at a time to minimize the risk of mixing them up.
Primary lock
Page 707
Connector B
Page 2008
8/44 Canister Shut-off Valve
8/51 - 52 Front Left And Right Side Airbag Igniter
8/59 - 60 RR/RL Head Restraint Solenoids
8/61 Driver Side Airbag Igniter Stage 2

Page 447

Page 1103
Page 422
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 2042
54/7 Connector
54/8 Connector
54/9 Connector
54/10 Connector
54/11 Connector
Page 376
Other Relays
Page 600
16/46 RTI Display
16/47 GPS Antenna RTI
16/50-54 Left-Hand/Right-Hand Rear Window Antenna
16/55 - 56 Left/Right-Hand Front Tweeter
16/57 - 58 Speaker, Left/Right Hand D-Pillar

Page 461
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 1059
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 1524
Remove:
- the mounting screw for the hinge
- the screw for the hinge end mounting.
Release the strap/straps of the folding mechanism for the seat belt buckle. (Hooked into place on
the lower edge of the backrest). Lift out the backrest.
Removing the cover for the level sensor/fuel pump (FP)
Push the carpet to one side.
Remove:
- the insulation panel
- the cover (2).
Removing the fuel pump (FP)

Page 946
Condition
- No PHM DTCs are stored in the Central electronic module (CEM).
Possible source
- Open-circuit, short-circuit to supply voltage or short-circuit to ground in the cable.
- Faulty contact reel.
Fault symptom[s]
- Steering wheel keypads does not work
Checking Contact Reel
Checking contact reel
Disconnect contact reel from SWM control unit. Check resistance between B1 and B2. The
resistance should be infinite. Check resistance between B1 and B3. The resistance should be
infinite. Check resistance between B2 and B3. The resistance should be infinite. Check wire B1
between contact reel 1 for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals.
Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking
Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Check wire B2 between
contact reel 2 for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault
See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Check wire B3 between contact reel 3
for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Do the necessary corrective action.
- For information on signals, see Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
Parameters/Signal Specification, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
- To connect a test box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
- To access/replace the contact reel, see Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing.
Page 1528
Hold the float arm in the centre position and press the level sensor into position.
Installing the fuel pump (FP)
Lower the pump into the tank.
Install:
- the fuel hose
- the three connectors.
Turn the pump to the installation position. Install the mounting bracket and screw. (M6) Install the
cover. Use special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5720 Wrench. For
tightening torques, see Tightening torque See: Engine, Cooling and
Note! Check that the arrow on the cap ends up between the markings on the tank. If the arrow
ends up outside the markings it will result in the tank gauge indicating the wrong value and the float
may jam against the tank's inner wall.
Installing the cover for the level sensor/fuel pump (FP)

Install:
- the cover
- the insulation panel.
Reinstall the carpet.
Finishing
Install:
- the backrest
- the screw for the hinge mounting (M10)
- the connector for the hinge
- the end mounting for the seat belt.
For tightening torques, see Tightening torque See: Body and Frame/Specifications. Install the side
cushion. (V70) Fold the seat cushion forward. (S80, S60) Install the seat cushion.
Page 81
Note! The connectors on the adapter cable must have the correct color-coding for the signal table
to match.
Before taking any readings, see Checking the ground terminals See: Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Checking Ground Terminal.
Audio control module (to aerial)
Audio control module (cable between the audio module and the amplifier)
Oil Pressure Sensor, Replacing
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sensor, Replacing
Oil pressure sensor, replacing
Removal
Oil pressure sensor
The oil pressure sensor is located on the bottom edge of the engine between the dip stick and the
bracket for auxiliary equipment.
- Raise the car
- Remove the air baffles on both sides. Then remove the central air baffle from under the engine
- Unscrew the oil pressure sensor.
Installation
Oil pressure sensor
In reverse order.
Other information
- Tighten to: 27 Nm.

Service and Repair
Control Unit: Service and Repair
Differential electronic module (DEM), replacing
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Wait 3-4 minutes after the ignition is switched off to minimize oil leakage on removal.
Removal
Removing the differential electronic module (DEM)
Note! Clean the area around the control module thoroughly before beginning removal.
Position a container underneath the Active on Demand Coupling. Disconnect the connectors for the
control module and the oil pump.
Remove:
- the 2 screws for the control module
- the control module with the sealing plate and the cupped washer.
Removing components from the Active on Demand coupling
Remove the choke valve and the temperature/pressure sensor from the coupling. A = choke valve.
B = temperature/pressure sensor. To remove, grasp the end of the choke valve. Use a large pliers.
Hold the pliers steady. Pull the valve straight out.
Remove:
- the temperature/pressure sensor as above
- The O-ring from the choke valve seat in the Active on Demand Coupling housing.
Page 1638
voltage according to references above.
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1328
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Level sensor, brake fluid, replacing
Removal
Brake fluid level sensor
The brake fluid level sensor cannot be replaced separately. The entire reservoir must be replaced.
- Remove the brake fluid reservoir assembly. See:
Left hand drive Brake fluid reservoir, replacing, L.H.D See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair/Brake Fluid Reservoir, Replacing, L.H.D Right
hand drive Brake fluid reservoir, replacing, R.H.D See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Fluid Reservoir/Service and Repair/Brake Fluid Reservoir, Replacing, R.H.D
Installation
Brake fluid level sensor
In reverse order.
Page 603
16/79 Bass Speaker
17/13 Data Link Connector
17/17 Jump Start Connection
17/19 12V Outlet, Cargo Compartment
18/4 Contact Reel

Page 1131
Control Module: Service and Repair
Transmission control module (TCM), replacing
Points to observe when replacing the control module
Caution! Software can only be ordered when the control module is installed in the vehicle. VIDA
Caution! Wait two minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The main relay must be
voltage-free before the control module can be removed from the car. If the engine cooling fan runs
on after the ignition has been switched off, wait until it stops. Then wait another two minutes.
Caution! Always check that the control module and control module box connector pins and sleeves
are not bent or damaged. This may have caused the fault.
Preparations for replacement
Remove:
- the cable from the battery negative terminal. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting
- the cover over the control module.

Navigation System - Various Malfunctions
Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation System - Various Malfunctions
TIE - Technical Journal
Title: New SW upgrade disc for RTI, MMM, MMM+, and MMM2 available
Ref No: US15493.10.2 en-GB
Issuer: -
Partner: 3 US 7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group: 3972 Func Desc road navigation
Status: Released
Status Date: 2010-06-03
Issue date: 2010-06-03
Reference:
Attachment Vehicle Type
CSC
DTC
Text
This RTJ supersedes the previous one dated June 2, 2010, Changes to this document are:
- SW version corrected to 8BC6.
- Note added for clarification of Service SW disc purpose.
CSC = Customer Symptom Code
DTC = Diagnostic Trouble Code
MMM = Multi Media Module

Page 1361
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module (SAS), Replacing
Removal
Soundproofing panel Remove the driver's side soundproofing panel.
Control module
Remove the control module by pressing the 2 catches using a finger and pulling the control module
backwards (see the arrow in the figure).
Remove the connector and the cable.
Installation
The control module

AUM Diagnostic Functions
Communications Control Module: Description and Operation AUM Diagnostic Functions
AUM diagnostic functions
General
The control unit has built-in diagnostics, Volvo Diagnostics, that continually monitor the control unit
and the input and output signals.
Diagnostic trouble codes
If the control unit detects an error, it stores a diagnostic trouble code. There are 36 diagnostic
trouble codes in total. An error that was detected the last time the engine was running is defined as
permanent. Other detected errors are defined as intermittent.
Reading and erasing diagnostic trouble codes
Stored diagnostic trouble codes can be read and erased using this facility. Erasing diagnostic
trouble codes can only be done when all the diagnostic trouble codes have been read at least
once.
Reading and erasing the user information
Stored user information can be read and erased using this facility.
-4201 Focusing error
- CD inserted the wrong way
- Condensation in CD-player or on disc
- Faulty CD
- Faulty CD player
-4203 Servo error
- Read-out error in CD player
- Faulty CD
- Faulty CD player
-42F1 Disc feed error
- Dirt in CD compartment
- Faulty CD
- Faulty CD player
-42F3 Pick-up error
- Faulty CD player
- Condensation on MiniDisc or in MiniDisc player
- Faulty MiniDisc
- Faulty MiniDisc player

-4303 Servo error
- Read-out error in MiniDisc player
- Faulty MiniDisc
- Dirt in MiniDisc player
- Faulty MiniDisc
-43F3 Pick-up error
- Condensation on CD or in 4-disc CD changer
- Faulty CD
- Faulty 4-disc CD changer

Extended X Feed Relay

Page 292
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1256
- Check that the markings on the reverse (A) of the sensor holders are correctly positioned
- The holders must be positioned in the following order, from left to right: 1, 2, 1, 2.
Illustration A
- Remove the protective film from one side of the tape
- Secure the tape on the sensor holder
- Carry out the above procedure on the remaining three sensor holders
- Cut away a piece of the collar on the holders for the inner sensor where it is turned in towards the
centre of the bumper
- Cut away a piece of the collar which is turned downwards on the holders for the outer sensors
- Check the position of the holders. Place the sensors in the holders. The connectors for the inner
sensors must be turned outwards.
Note! Check that the sensor holders can be installed before removing the backing tape.
Illustration B
- Remove the protective film from the pieces of tape on the sensor holders
- Install the holders for the sensors. The numbers must be pointing upwards so that they are
horizontally in line with the bumper casing. See the illustration.
Page 872
Checking the error message
Note! Many serious error messages cannot be erased from the display window. This remains in the
display window until the error concerned has been dealt with.
Does the error message indicate a serious error?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
- Parking heater does not work.
Checking the Read and Reset Button on the Indicator Switch
Checking the read and reset button on the indicator switch
Checking the components
Activate the read and reset button on the indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read and reset button gave a correct result the fault is not in the SWM.
Did read-out of status on read and reset button give a correct result?

-------------------------------------------------
Replace the indicator switch.
- To replace indicator switch see Turn signal switch, replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors
and Switches - Lighting and Horns/Turn Signal Switch/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Switch,
Replacing.
Press Continue when fault has been repaired.

Service and Repair
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Pedal sensor power brake booster, replacing
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Press the brake pedal a few times until the pedal becomes stiff and rises slightly. This
releases the vacuum in the brake servo and thus prevents the O-ring from being sucked in when
the pedal position sensor is removed.
Removal
Removing pedal position sensor
Slacken off the snap ring around the mounting on the sensor slightly. Insert a narrow screwdriver or
wedge. Press one end of the snap ring in approximately 10 mm. Press radially backwards in the
groove in the snap ring. Pull out the sensor slightly and disconnect the connector. Remove the
sensor and the O-ring.
Installation
Installing pedal position sensor
Page 1555
Note! Always clean around any connections that will be disconnected. This is to prevent
contaminants from entering the system.
Remove:
- the guard for the gas tank
- the connector
- the four screws Note! There may be residual pressure in the tank. Slacken off the screws one
revolution and release using a screwdriver and allow the gas to hiss out.
Warning! Take care when working with highly pressurized gas. There is a risk of explosion and cold
damage. Carry out any work outdoors or in a workshop with extraction fans.
the level sensor assembly.
Installing the level sensor assembly
Caution! Before installation, check that the pipe ends and connections are undamaged.
Install:
- level sensor, assembly with new gasket
- four screws. Tighten to 6 Nm
- the connector. Check for leakage.
- the guard for the gas tank.
Connect the connector in the cargo compartment.
Replacing the electronic level sensor
Hint: The gas tank does not need to be emptied when replacing the analog level sensor.
Removing analog level sensors

Page 218
Check:
- that the control module is of the correct type (this depends on whether the car is equipped with
STC or not)
- that none of the pins or sockets on the connector are damaged
- that there are no contaminants on the mating surfaces between the control module and the ABS
hydraulic modulator
- that no part of the control module seals remain on the ABS hydraulic modulator valves.
Installation
Installing the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator

Page 537
2/34 Fog Light Relay, Front
2/35 Starter Motor Relay
2/49 Relay, Rear Fog Light
2/59 Unlocking Relay, Fuel Filler Flap

Page 432
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 1581
- Ignition off
- Key out.
Replace the ignition switch. See Steering wheel lock, replacing See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Steering Column Lock/Service and Repair.
Page 1375
- Press the pulse wheel into place. Use tool 999 5695 Socket See: Tools and Equipment/999 5695
Socket and the screw for the drive shaft
- Install the drive shaft. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle
Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Drive Shaft Right, Replacing
Page 1064
Programming and Relearning
Downloading software and replacing the control module
New software can be downloaded into the steering wheel module (SWM). When ordering software,
the hardware and the software in the car is compared to the data in the Volvo central database. If
the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the control module. If the comparison between
the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the database is updated with the car configuration.
When this is complete the software is downloaded. The control module is integrated in the steering
wheel bracket. The steering wheel must be removed to replace the control module.
Page 768
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 279
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 1781
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing the gear-shift position sensor
Removal

Removing the gear selector cable and connector

Page 709
Page 936
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Testing and Inspection
-------------------------------------------------
Reading off extended fault-tracing information, steering wheel module

Page 414
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 758
Fuses 11C/34-38

Recall 07V226000: Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement
Fuel Pressure Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V226000: Fuel Pressure Sensor
Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Volvo/S60 2003-2004 Volvo/V70 2003-2004
MANUFACTURER: Volvo Cars of N.A. LLC. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V226000 MFR'S
REPORT DATE: May 24, 2007
COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 38700
SUMMARY: On certain passenger vehicles, the fuel pressure sensor located on the left end of the
fuel rail may, at times, transmit incorrect signal regarding the fuel pressure to the engine control
module. If the signal is outside of the pre-programmed allowable limits, a diagnostic trouble code
may be set and the check engine light will come on. The soldered joints on the circuit board of the
fuel pressure sensor may crack due to temperature changes and excessive vibrations.
CONSEQUENCE: Misfire may occur during driving that, in turn, will reduce the engine torque and
in the worst case scenario, the engine may stall without warning. In certain traffic situations this
could cause an unsafe situation and possibly a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel pressure sensor free of charge. The manufacturer has not
yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners may contact Volvo at
1-800-458-1552.
NOTES: Volvo recall No. R181. Customers may contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1091
Page 682
Adjust the lock pins using an electrician's screwdriver and press up the secondary lock, as
illustrated.
The primary lock
Use tool 951 2637 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637 Terminal Removal
Tool to press down the cable terminal locking tab, as
Page 2011
9/18-19 Left/Right-Hand Seat Heating Element
9/25 Rear 12V Outlet
9/32 PTC Resistor - Air Preheating
10/1-2 Left/Right-Hand Front Lamp Housing
10/3 License Pate Lighting

Page 2048
54/79 Connector
54/106 Connector
How to Use the Wiring Diagrams

A/T Controls - TCM Updates For Various Concerns/Issues
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - TCM Updates For Various Concerns/Issues
Title Transmission Control Module (TCM) Software (SW)
Issuer -
Func Group 4378
Func Desc software
Status Released
Reference VIDA, VSTG, RTJs 17906, 20857, 23193
Attachment
Vehicle Type
Service and Repair
Trunk Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Replacing the switch for the lock unit / cargo compartment lighting
Removal
Lock unit
The switch for the cargo compartment lighting is positioned in the lock unit.
- Remove the upholstery on the tailgate. This is to gain access to the entire lock unit mechanism
- Unhook the lever from the lock cylinder mechanism
- Remove the screws (3 x) from the lock unit. Remove the lock unit
Installation
Lock unit
Install:
1. the connector, 2. the three screws for the lock unit. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm, 3. the lever for
the lock mechanism, 4. the upholstery.
Accessory Electronic Module (AEM)
Body Control Module: Service and Repair Accessory Electronic Module (AEM)

Page 711
Page 1523
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Level Sensor, Replacing
Level sensor, replacing
Special tools:
correct.
Preparation
Drain the tank. See Fuel tank, draining See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Service and Repair. Applies to V70:
Lift up the right-hand seat cushion. Remove the right side cushion. See Side cushion See: Body
and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Side Cushion. Applies
to the S60:
Remove:
- the seat cushion. See Upholstery, seat cushion, replacing See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat
Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Seat, Passenger Seat/Upholstery, Seat Cushion, Replacing
- the right-hand side cushion. See Side cushion See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Side Cushion.
Applies to all models:
Disconnect the connector at the hinge.

Page 579
10/5-6 Front Left and Right Fog Light
10/11-12 Front Left/Right Parking Light
10/13-14 Front Left/Right Direction Indicator
10/15-16 Direction Indicator, Left/Right Front Fender

Page 418
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 737

Page 1582
-------------------------------------------------
Verification
Hint: After carrying out the repair, check that the fault has been remedied.
Page 233
Center the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator valves before the valves are pushed
into place.
Install:
- the control module. Tighten to 1.8 Nm
- the connectors for the pump motor and the control module
- the integrated relay / fusebox. See Hydraulic unit, replacing See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair
- the air cleaner (ACL) housing. See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe Master
Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing.
Function test
Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Wheel Sensor Front, Replacing.
Page 920
2. V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90. 3. V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70. 4.
S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
2 - car model V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90
3 - Car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70
4 - Checking communication errors car model S40 (-04) / V40
------------------------
Checking communication errors, car model S40 (04-) / V50
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1309

Page 64
- Check the communication cable between diagnostic outlet #3 and engine control module (ECM)
for open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references above.
Control modules
Caution! Model year 99- and control modules on the CAN-network. If none of the above checks
help, try reading out diagnostic trouble codes in the driver information module (DIM). Done via
VIDA vehicle communication. A prerequisite for being able to communicate with the control
modules in the vehicle is that the driver information module (DIM) is active and can be
communicated with. If communication is not possible with the driver information module (DIM),
check the voltage feed and ground for the control module.
VIDA
Other information
Page 484
- Remove the tie straps from the cables
- Disconnect the connector by releasing the locks on the front edge
- Pull out and remove the connector.
Installation
Note! For tightening torques, see Tightening torque See: Specifications/Mechanical

Specifications/Starting and Charging.
Installing the connector
Press the connector into the holder.
Central electrical unit, installing
Install:
- the tie straps for the cables
- the bottom section. Hook into place at the front edge
- the screw in the rear edge. Tighten
- the connector holder. Press into the catch.
Note! The rubber grommet
- the screws
- the engine cooling fan (FC) if applicable
- the intermediate section. Check that all 3 clips have engaged.
Finishing work
Install:
- engine control module (ECM) Engine control module (ECM), replacing, B5244T5, B5254T2 See:
Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management/Relays and Modules - Computers and Control
Systems/Engine Control Module/Service and Repair and transmission control module (TCM)
Transmission control module (TCM), replacing, B5244T5, AW55-50/51SN, B5254T2,
AW55-50/51SN, B5254T2, AW50/51 AWD See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and
Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair
- the cover for the central electrical unit
- the battery negative pole. Also see Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery,
Page 301

Page 333
Other Relays
Page 695
Feel by hand to make sure the shrink tubing is correctly installed. Check that measurement B is
40mm (1-1/2 inches) between the joints from centre to centre.
Note! Remember the cable, colour to colour (with same colour/ single or multi-colored).
Locations
Audio Control Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1798
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor, replacing
S60, V70 2000-, V70 XC 2001-/XC70, S80, XC90
- For 1999-, see Mass air flow (MAF) sensor, replacing, B5254T2 See: .
S60, V70 2000-
- For B5254T4, see Mass air flow (MAF) sensor, replacing , B5244T5 See: .
Page 361
Headlamp Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Description of frozen values
Explanation
Frozen values are parameter values that are stored when a diagnostic trouble code is generated.
Not all parameters can be read out for all diagnostic trouble codes. The parameter values can only
be read if they can provide additional information on the prevailing conditions when the code was
generated.
Total mileage, value
Measurement range: 0-1,000,000 km The value indicates the vehicle's total mileage when the
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) was generated.
MECU power supply, value
Measurement range: 0 - 63 V Normal range: 12.0 - 14.5 V The value indicates the power supply to
the central electronic module (CEM) when the diagnostic trouble code was generated.
Passenger compartment temperature, value
Measurement range: -40 till +215 °C The value indicates the passenger compartment temperature
when the diagnostic trouble code was generated.
Outside temperature, value
Measurement range: -40 till +215 °C The value indicates the outside temperature when the
diagnostic trouble code was generated.
Power supply mode, status
The value indicates the status of the power supply mode when the diagnostic trouble code was
generated. Key removed Key recently removed Key approved Ignition off after Accessory position
Accessory position Accessory position after Ignition on Ignition on Running Start attempt Signal
missing
Speed, value
Measurement range: 0 to 255 km/h (158 mph). Indicates speed when the diagnostic trouble code
was generated.
Steering wheel angle, value
Measurement range: -780 to +780 °. Indicates current steering wheel angle. The normal value
when the steering wheel and front wheels point straight ahead is approx. 0°.
Page 861
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
- No DTCs are stored in the Phone module (PHM).
Possible source

- Defective power switch RTI.
- Defective power switch audio/phone.
- Defective power switch cruise control.
Fault symptom[s]
- Cruise control does not operate

Locations
7/159 Air Quality Sensor

Page 540
2/91 Relay, Intermittent Windshield Wiper
2/92 Relay, Windshield Washer Motor
2/93 Relay, Rear Window Washer Motor
2/101 Relay For Extended D2 Feed, Automatic Transmission
2/112 Unlocking Relay, Left-Hand Rear

Page 1546
Remove the cover. Use special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5720
Wrench.
Remove the screw (1).
Page 785
Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS)
SRS safety equipment
WARNING: The car has pyrotechnical airbags and seat belt tensioners. The components in the
SRS system must be treated very carefully during repair.
This is to help prevent:
1. Personal injury when carrying out repairs 2. Damage to or malfunction of the SRS system.
WARNING: The SRS system must always be worked on by a qualified workshop.
Location of components
1. The steering wheel module.
2. The passenger airbag module.
3a/b. SIPS module (Side Impact Protection System) and Sensors in B- and C-posts.
4a. Seat belt with seat belt tensioner, front seat
4c. Seat belt with seat belt tensioner, Rear seat
5b. IC, Inflatable Curtain
6. WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System).
7. The SRS control module.
Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), reuse
NOTE: The illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and/or
models. Some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always
correct.
When repairing a crashed vehicle, the Volvo policy is to replace those systems that may have been
damaged where full function cannot be guaranteed.
What is replaced and when? Driver/passenger airbag modules and seat belt tensioners indicate
clearly when they have deployed and must be replaced.
Locations
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Locations
Location Of Components
- SWM control unit (1)
- Cruise control switch unit (2)
- Radio/telephone switch unit (3)
- Indicator switch (4)
- Wiper switch (5)
- RTI switch unit (6).

Page 887
- Ignition off.
- Disconnect cable to audio/telephone by loosening the lower connector on the cruise-control
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
Activate buttons and read status on cruise-control switch unit buttons. If read-out gave a correct
result the fault is in the cable between the audio/telephone switch unit and cruise-control switch
unit.
- To access cruise control switch unit see the relevant service procedure.
Did read-out of status on cruise-control switch unit give a correct result?
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Locations
7/100 Vehicle Inclination Sensor ISM

Page 1420
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Temperature
Sensor
Engine temperature sensor
Removal
- Jack up the car.
- Drain the coolant as described in Replacing radiator/charge air cooler (CAC) See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Turbocharger/Intercooler/Service and Repair.
- Lower the car.
- Release coolant hose from thermostat housing using pliers.
- Remove thermostat housing.

- Remove sensor.

Page 454
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 870
- Ignition off
- Disconnect the audio / carphone wiring by disconnecting the lower connector on the cruise control
switch
- Ignition on.
give a correct result, the fault is in the wiring between the audio / carphone switch and the cruise
control switch.
Other information:
- To access the cruise control switch, see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
no - Checking components and wiring
-------------------------------------------------

Page 313
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1792
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal (AP) Position Sensor
The function of the accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor is to provide the engine control module
(ECM) with information about the position of the accelerator pedal. This data is used by the control
module to deploy the shutter in the throttle unit to the correct angle.
The sensor consists of a plastic housing with two potentiometers, an Analog/Digital converter and
circuits. The potentiometers are connected to a shaft which is affected by the position of the
accelerator pedal (AP). The resistance in the potentiometers changes with the position of the
accelerator pedal (AP).
The accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor transmits an analogue and a digital signal (pulse width
modulated (PWM) signal) to the control module. These signals indicate the position of the
accelerator pedal (AP). The digital signal is generated by the sensors Analog/Digital converter.
The analog and digital signals are used at the same time by the control module to regulate the
throttle shutter angle.
The sensor is supplied with 12 V by the system relay via a fuse and is grounded to the body.
The digital signal is also used in conjunction with the analogue signal for accelerator pedal (AP)
position sensor diagnostics. The accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor signals can be read using
VADIS/VIDA. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if the engine control module (ECM) detects
a difference between the analogue and digital signals. The engine control module (ECM) then uses
a minimal value to ensure the function (limp home).
The accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor is located on the accelerator pedal bracket.
Page 1606
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Back-up lamp switch, replacing
Removal
Removing the back-up lamp switch, gearbox M56 and M58
correct.
- Ignition off
- Remove the air cleaner (ACL) housing

- Clean around the back-up lamp switch.
- Remove the back-up lamp switch.
Installation

Specifications/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/System Specifications.
Installing back-up lamp switch, gearbox M56 and M58
Install the back-up lamp switch.
Installing the leads

Page 1362
- Install the cable in the holder for the control module. Press the connector into place.
- Reinstall the control module. Press the module into place until there is an audible click.
Ordering software Order software
Programming the steering wheel angle sensor module (SAS) Program the new control module
The soundproofing panel Install the driver's side soundproofing panel.

Page 762

Page 1384
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Sensor Rear, Replacing
Wheel sensors, rear, replacing
Left-hand side
Preparations
- Switch off the ignition
- Lift up the seat cushion on the rear seat by pulling the strap
- Push the cargo compartment carpet to one side
- Remove the wheel.
Removing the wheel sensor connector
Remove the wheel sensor connector. See Removing the wheel sensor connector.
Finishing work
- Fold back the carpet
- Fold the seat cushion for the rear seat back into position
- Install the wheel. See Installing wheels See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Service and
Repair
- Check the function. See Function test
Right-hand side
Preparations
- Switch off the engine
- Remove the side backrest from the rear seat
- Lift up the seat cushion on the rear seat by pulling the strap.
Page 951
Were any defects found?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
If there is a malfunction on the wiper switch or its connector in the Steering wheel module (SWM)
this may affect the direction indicator function. Disconnect the wiper lever and see if the direction
indicator function starts to work. Remedy as necessary.
Other information
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
module.
Possible source
- Defective tailgate washer.

Page 848
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Audio / Carphone Switch
Checking the audio / carphone switch
Checking components
- Ignition on.
correct result, the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Page 1895
Install the cable in the holder for the control module. Press the connector into place. Reinstall the
control module. Press the module into place until there is an audible click. To install, reverse the
removal procedure
Ordering software

Page 1616
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 126
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 814
Page 557
6/17 Driver Seat Motor, Up/Down Front Edge
6/18 Driver Seat Motor, Up/Down Rear Edge
6/19 Driver Seat Motor, Forward/Backward
6/20 Passenger Seat Motor, Forward/Backward
6/25 Starter Motor

Page 996
Checking the steering wheel buttons for RTI (road traffic information)
Checking the connector
- Ignition off.
Cars manufactured between 199943 - 200143 may have defective or bent terminal pins in the
connector which connect the wiring from the RTI (road traffic information) switch to the buttons on
the right-hand side of the steering wheel. As a result the ENTER and DOWN steering wheel
buttons for the road traffic information module (RTI) do not work. Check the connection to the
right-hand keypad on the steering wheel for bent or defective terminal pins. Replace the keypad if a
fault is found. Remedy as necessary
Other
- To access or replace the keypad unit on the steering wheel module (SWM), see Keypad unit,
steering wheel, replacing See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Sensors and Switches -
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Assembly/Service and
Repair/Keypad Unit, Steering Wheel, Replacing.
Page 804
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 1225
Antitheft Mode Switch: Service and Repair
Switch for the sensor shut off function
Switch for the sensor shut off function
car.
Preparations
Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1117
Page 982
Hint: If the read and reset button status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.
Was the status of the read and reset button correct?
Yes - Fault Found
no - Replacing the component
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1376
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Ring Gear (Toothed Wheel) Front, Change
Ring gear (toothed wheel) front, change
Removal
Note! Some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always
correct.
Remove drive axle front Refer to: Half shaft, left, replacing See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Half Shaft, Left, Replacing
Drive shaft right, replacing See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle
Installation
Page 195
Other Relays
Page 730
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 670
Page 1010
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Ground Terminal for the Steering Wheel Module
Checking the ground terminal for the steering wheel module
Checking the ground terminal

Page 1974
2/114 Unlocking Relay, Right-Hand Rear
2/115 Relay, Deadlock, Rear Doors
2/116 Rear Power Window Up Relay
2/117 Right Rear Power Window Up Relay
2/118 Rear Power Window Down Relay

Page 1980

Page 83
Page 833
Diagnostic outlet
- Check the communication cable (k-line) between diagnostic outlet #7 and central electronic
module (CEM) #D6 and other connected control modules for open circuit, short-circuit to ground
and short-circuit to voltage.
Caution! In case of malfunction on this communication cable, communication cannot be established

on either the low or high-speed network. First when communication takes place on this cable, the
low and high-speed cables between the diagnostic outlet and central electronic module (CEM) are
connected to the rest of the network in the vehicle. This is controlled via a relay in the central
electronic module (CEM). This relay is only found on vehicles of model year -2004.
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 944
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Switch, Tailgate Private Lock

Locations
Parking Lamp Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1183
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1547
Carefully turn the pump in order to access the fuel hose (1).
Remove:
- the hose (1)
- the three connectors (2).
Carefully lift up the pump.
Note! Ensure that the level sensor arm is not obstructed. Do not bend the arm when removing the
pump.
Removing the level sensor
Page 939
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------

Page 330
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 602
16/68 Antenna, Bumper
16/71 Amplifier, Right-Hand Window Antenna (1)
16/73-74 Window Antenna Amplifier 2, Left and Right
16/77 Microphone, Mobile Telephone
16/78 Speaker. Mobile Telephone

Page 166
Ordering software
Finishing
Check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the repair. Test operate the seat.
Check all the functions.
Page 130
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 366
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 835
with the driver information module (DIM), check the voltage feed and ground for the control module.
VIDA
Other information
Page 731
Fuses 11C/14-20
Transmission Controls - Slip/Shudder/DTC 002F
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Transmission Controls - Slip/Shudder/DTC 002F
NO: 43-35
DATE: 1-17-2003
MODEL/YEAR: MY 03 S60 AWD/V70 AWD/XC 70/XC 90 2.5 LT
SUBJECT: SW FID 890, TCM DTC 002F, Torque Converter Slip / Shudder, CPS Plus Action
CHASSIS: Please See Table Below
DESCRIPTION:
Some MY 2003 cars built before the following chassis breaks, may set a 002F code or have a
slipping/shuddering torque converter. If the slip/shudder is present, it will be felt in 4 and/or 5th gear
with a locked converter.
SERVICE:
If a customer has a complaint that matches the above description, erase the DTC and load SW FID
890 (PN 30646927).
This SW is very similar to the original SW in the TCM, so there is no need to reset the adaptation to
zero.
Take the car for a test drive in 4 and 5 gear with a locked converter to verify its function.
Also, cars before the chassis breaks shown should have SW FID 890 loaded before they are road
tested as part of the Customer Preparation Service (CPS).
Warranty Information
Page 1039
VIDA
Other information
Page 1986
4/28 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
4/31 Fan Control Module
4/46 Engine Control Module ECM
4/50 Electronic Throttle Module ETM

Page 1744
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The function of the knock sensor (KS) is to monitor combustion knocking from the engine.
Knocking may damage the engine and reduces the efficiency of engine combustion.
If the engine control module (ECM) registers knocking from any of the cylinders, the ignition will be
retarded for that cylinder at the next combustion stage. If repeated ignition retardation does not
prevent knocking, the injection period will be increased. This has a cooling effect. On turbocharged
engines the boost pressure will also be lowered, reducing the engine load.
The sensor is made up of a Piezo electrical crystal. If there is engine knock, vibrations (sound
waves) spread through the cylinder block to the knock sensor (KS). The resultant mechanical
stress in the piezo electrical material in the knock sensors generates a voltage. This signal is
transmitted to the engine control module (ECM). The signal corresponds to the frequency and
amplitude of the sound waves. This allows the Engine Control Module (ECM) to determine if the
engine is knocking. The camshaft position (CMP) sensor and engine speed (RPM) sensor are used
to determine the operating cycle of the engine (which cylinder is igniting) and thereby which
cylinder is knocking.
The knock sensors (KS) are positioned on the cylinder block below the intake manifold.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the knock sensors (KS).
Page 264
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Dashboard Environment Panel (Including Climate
Control Module), Replacing
Dashboard Environment Panel (including Climate Control Module (CCM)), Replacing
Preparations
NOTE: Read off data from the control module before replacing the control module. This is carried
out via VADIS/VIDA communication. After replacing the control module, the relevant parameters
must be programmed into the new control module.
Replacing dashboard environment panel

- Ignition off.
- Remove the key.
NOTE: -
The key must be removed to ensure that the ignition is not switched on by mistake.
- After the key has been removed: Wait 3 minutes before starting work.
Page 71
ohms The ohmmeter should read approximately 0.
OK - Fault Found
Not OK - contact resistance and oxidation
-------------------------------------------------
Checking for open-circuits, contact resistance and oxidation
Check ground terminal 31/84 and the wiring connected to it. Check for an open-circuit according to
Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent
Fault. Check for contact resistance and oxidation according to Checking wiring and terminals.
Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault.
Page 326
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1277
- Check that the two springs (1) are in position
- Press the two connectors for the sender cables for the airbag into the steering wheel module.
Note! The wiring must be routed through the existing holder (2).
- Insert the two pins on the reverse of the steering wheel module in the two springs. Ensure that the
sender cables are unimpeded
- Press the steering wheel module into the mountings. Two clicks should be heard.
- Turn the ignition key to position II
- Reconnect the battery negative lead.

Page 1044
- Ignition on or start the engine.
Activate reading off of the parameters: Click on the VCT2000 symbol. For information about the
different parameters, see Description of parameters See: Scan Tool Testing and
Procedures/Description of Parameters.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault

Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Switch, Replacing
Removal
- Remove the parking brake lever.
Installation
- Install the parking brake lever.

Page 1746
Disconnecting.
Starting System - Ign. Key Won't Turn Past Position 1
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Ign. Key Won't Turn
Past Position 1
Title Ignition key does not turn past position I (1).
Ref No US24374.1.1 en-US
Issuer -
Func Group 6400 Func Desc steering
Status Released
Reference
Attachment
Vehicle Type
CSC
DTC
Text CSC = Customer Symptom Code
Note!
If using a printed copy of this Retailer Technical Journal first check for the latest Online version.
DESCRIPTION:
An ignition key that can not be turned past Position 1(1) is most likely caused by a faulty ignition
column lock.
SERVICE:
Replace the column lock according to the procedure in VIDA function group 6400 "Steering wheel
lock replacement"
VSTG OPERATION NUMBER: 64108 Steering wheel lock replacement Time Allowance: See
VSTG
Page 391
Other Relays
Page 1946
Tighten, see applicable specifications. Connect the connectors for the control module and the oil
pump. Top up and check the oil level in the active on demand coupling (AOC). See: Final drive,
replacing. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Final Drive,
Replacing
Erase any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).

Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V226000: Fuel Pressure
Sensor Replacement
1-800-458-1552.
Page 131
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 777

Page 1780
Install the air cleaner housing (ACL) assembly with the intake pipe and connector.
Check and erase any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Check the gear-shift position sensor
positions: Use the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system.
Page 236
into place.
Install:
- the air cleaner (ACL) housing. See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing, B5254T2
See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake
Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing
Brakes/Service and Repair.
Function test
See Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Wheel Sensor Front, Replacing. Use
VIDA vehicle communication to calibrate the control module.
Page 545
3/47 Parking Brake Contact
3/53 Recirculation Switch
3/56 Fan Switch
3/59 Control, Beam Adjustment

Page 685
Tool
remove the primary lock, as illustrated.
Page 222
into place.
Install:
- the air cleaner (ACL) housing. See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing, B5254T2
See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake
Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing
Brakes/Service and Repair.
Function test
See Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Page 1527
Carefully press in both retaining clips and lift the level sensor approx. 5 mm. Lift up the float to the
centre position and remove the level sensor.
Lift up the float arm to the centre position and remove the level sensor.
Installing the level sensor

Page 776
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 972
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
- To access the cruise control switch, see RTI switch See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted
Controls Assembly/Service and Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1045
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - digital display
2 - Checking communication faults
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Checking communication faults
Selecting car model

1. Car model S40 (04-) / V50 2. Car model V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90 3.
Car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70 4. Checking communication errors car model S40
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
VCT2000 the
Page 383
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 790
Install 3 screws (torx 30). Tighten to 10 Nm.
Caution! It is important that the control module is securely mounted onto the bodywork if the sensor
module is to operate properly.
Other components are reinstalled in reverse order.
Ordering software
Programming control module
Applies to MY 2005-
After downloading and configuring the control module the control module receives the vehicle
configuration data from the central electronic module (CEM). This can take up to 15 seconds and
during this time the SRS lamp flashes in the Driver information module (DIM). Downloading and
configuration is complete when the SRS lamp stops flashing.
Final check
Page 397
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1398
- Install the screws. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm.
- Install the connectors.
- Remove the marking from the sensor and cable.
Checking the DSTC system

Page 528
- Disconnect the throttle body (TB) connector.
- Remove the 4 screws for the throttle body (TB).
- Remove the throttle body (TB) and the gasket. Clean the mating surfaces thoroughly.
Installing the throttle body (TB)
Install:
- the throttle body (TB). Use a new gasket. Tighten. Connect the throttle body (TB) connector
- the pipe between the throttle body (TB) and the charge air cooler (CAC)
- the intake manifold between the front cover plate and the air cleaner (ACL) housing
- the battery negative lead.
NOTE: After replacing the throttle unit, the throttle unit must be adapted using the vehicle
communication input: "Adaptation of the electronic throttle unit".
Remedy as necessary.
Page 275
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1763

Page 280

Page 1397
- Install the yaw rate sensor on the bracket. Tighten the nut to 10 Nm.
- Install the lateral acceleration sensor on the bracket.
- Press the clamp down the sensor until it locks.
The bracket on the bodywork

Locations

Page 769
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 1186

Page 420
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 911
FAULT-TRACING FAILED - FAULT-TRACING FAILED
Attempt New Test - Checking the ground terminal
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Power Supply and Ground Terminals. Permanent Fault
Checking the power supply and ground terminals. Permanent fault
Checking power supply and ground terminals
22 in the passenger compartment fusebox for the steering wheel module. Note! If the fuse is blown,
check the circuit after the fuse. Check for a short-circuit to ground before replacing the fuse. Then
replace the fuse. For further information about the circuit after the fuse, refer to the appropriate
wiring diagram. Check the cable for power supply between fuse 22 in the passenger compartment
fusebox and the control module terminals #A1 and #A6. Check for an open-circuit. Check the
ground lead between control module #A22 and ground terminal 31/84. Check for an open-circuit.
Check ground terminal 31/84. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access and replace the control module see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See:
Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair
- To access or replace the fuses, see Fusebox, passenger compartment, replacing See:
Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Fusebox, Passenger
Compartment, Replacing
- Checking wiring and terminals. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Page 970
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1977
3/10 Reversing Light Contact
3/25 Power Sunroof Switch
3/26 Power Driver's Seat Module
3/27 Power Passenger Seat Module
3/37 Horn Contact

Page 430
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 1514
Note! Check that the arrow on the cover is between the markings on the tank. If the arrow is
outside the markings the fuel gauge sensor will give an incorrect value and the float may catch
against the inner wall of the tank. If not: Slacken off the screw and adjust the position of the sensor.
Tighten as above.
Install the cover over the fuel tank unit. Tighten the nuts. Connect the cables and the connectors.
Reinstall the insulation panel and fold down the seat cushion.
Page 1921
Install:
- the large connector and the bracket. Tighten the smaller connector. Tighten to 25 Nm. Connect
the large connector
- the tie straps for the cable harness
- the cable on the lever
- the screws for the bracket. Tighten to 25 Nm.
Installing engine compartment components
Page 1040
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 2047
54/53 Connector
54/54 Connector
54/55 Connector
54/56 Connector
54/65 Connector
Page 1681
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
Pedal position sensor clutch, replacing
Removal
Clutch pedal position sensor
- Ignition off
- Remove the soundproofing panel. See Soundproofing panel, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Soundproofing
Panel, Replacing
- Remove the two ball connectors from the master cylinder and the arm
Installation
Clutch pedal position sensor
In reverse order.
Page 296
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1247
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Parking Assistance, Front
Parking assistance, front
Note! During installation the underlay must be kept at a temperature of at least +15°C (60°F)
- Remove the key from the ignition.
Note! Wait at least one minute before disconnecting the connectors or removing other electrical
equipment.
Removing the front bumper

Page 168
Ordering software
Finishing
Page 30
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 1973
2/91 Relay, Intermittent Windshield Wiper
2/92 Relay, Windshield Washer Motor
2/93 Relay, Rear Window Washer Motor
2/112 Unlocking Relay, Left-Hand Rear

ABS/TCS - DTC's 0076 and 0117
Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - DTC's 0076 and 0117
NO: 59-11
DATE: 10-10-2005
MODEL: S80, V70, XC70, S60, XC90.
M. YEAR: 2003 - 2004
CHASSIS: See list below
SUBJECT: BCM, DTC 0076 & BCM 0117 (updated with VIDA method)
THIS TECH NOTE SUPERCEDES THE PREVIOUS 59-11 DATED 12-17-03. PLEASE UPDATE
YOUR FILES. THIS UPDATE IS DUE TO METHOD CHANGE WITHIN VIDA DESCRIPTION:
DSTC (Dynamic Stability Traction Control system) equipped vehicles within the chassis range
shown may set BCM (Brake Control Module) DTC 0076 after performing a BCM software
download. On the XC90 DTC 0117 may also accompany BCM DTC 0076.
SERVICE: Configure the BCM by following the sequence listed below.
1. Using VIDA, go to Information/fault tracing/diagnostic trouble codes and associated procedures.
2. Select BCM DTC - 0076 Control module, Faulty configuration.
3. Answer the questions in this order:
A. Was the DTC generated after the BCM was reprogrammed? YES
B. Does the car equipment correspond to the car configuration? NO
C. Does the car have TRACS, STC or DSTC? YES
4. Then follow the procedure to reset BCM configuration. Select the START button; the yellow
status indicator should go from yellow to green.
5. After configuring the BCM it may be necessary to clear DTCs using VIDA.
Page 438

Page 435
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1092
TJ Instruction No 16761
Page 544
3/10 Reversing Light Contact
3/37 Horn Contact

Page 1395
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Replacing the Yaw Rate Sensor (1) and the Lateral
Acceleration Sensor In the Center Console (DSTC)
Replacing the yaw rate sensor (1) and the lateral acceleration sensor in the center console (DSTC)
Removal
Yaw rate sensor
The yaw rate sensor (1) and the lateral acceleration sensor is positioned on a bracket under the
parking brake lever. The yaw rate sensor is positioned under the right front seat.
Note! These sensors must be handled with extreme care. If one of the sensors is dropped, it must
be replaced.
Replacing the yaw rate sensor (1) / lateral acceleration sensor
- Lift the cover off the center console locker
- Remove the panel (use a small screwdriver).

The bracket for the yaw rate sensor (1) / lateral acceleration sensor
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Mark up a cable and the corresponding sensor (the connectors are not interchangeable).
- Remove the connectors.
- Lift up the bracket past the parking brake cables
The sensors (yaw rate sensor (1) / lateral acceleration sensor)

Page 1611
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Checking brake light switch adjustment
2 - Checking communication errors

3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Selecting car model
1. S40 (04-) / V50. 2. V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90. 3. V70 (-00), V70 XC
and S70 / C70. 4. S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
Page 616
How to use the wiring diagram
The descriptions below apply in general to all wiring diagram information, although not all sections
are necessarily contained in this information.
A. Component designation
Every component has a component designation that consists of two parts.

Page 1872
7/91 Steering Angle Sensor

Page 1022
The value indicates whether the -button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control resume button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control resume button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control disengage button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control disengage button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone search+ button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone search+ button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone search- button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone search- button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone volume+ button, status
The value indicates whether the audio / carphone volume+ button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio /carphone volume- button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone volume- button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Carphone YES button, status
This value indicates whether the carphone YES button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Carphone NO button, status
This value indicates whether the carphone NO button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) right-hand button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) right-hand button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) left-hand button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) left-hand button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) up button, status

Page 368
Fuses 11C/14-20
Specifications
Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Specifications
Outside temperature sensor

Page 1214
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 387
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 337
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1197
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 656
Tool to remove the primary lock, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Primary locking
Check that the catches for the cable terminal are undamaged. Press the cable terminal into the
housing. Check that the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on the cable.
Secondary locking
Connector Type 2
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
Page 663
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Type 4
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
951 2852 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2852 Terminal Removal Tool.
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 1551
Caution! Take care with the fuel tank.
Caution! It is extremely important that the float arm is not broken or bent.
Installation
Installing the level sensor / pump

Page 1181
Fuses 11C/21-23
Locations

Page 734
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1073
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Service and Repair Gear Selector Assembly
and Steering Wheel Module
Gear selector assembly and steering wheel module
Removing the gear selector assembly and steering wheel module
Remove:
- the cover, steering column and boot
- steering wheel: -
S60according to Steering wheel, replacing See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering

Wheel/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel, Replacing
- V70according to Replacing the steering wheel See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering

Wheel/Service and Repair/Replacing the Steering Wheel.
- 3 screws.
- Release the two clips
- Pull straight out.
Installing the gear selector assembly and steering wheel module
Install:
In reverse order.
Page 445

Page 639
Connector Type 3
Connector, see Connectors, repair See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connectors, Repair.
Connector, see Connectors, repair See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connectors, Repair.

Service and Repair
Power Mirror Control Module: Service and Repair
Upper Electronic Module (UEM)/Rear View Mirror, Replacing
Removal
Preparatory information
NOTE:
- As the illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and/or models,
some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
- A rear view mirror with manual function cannot be replaced with automatic anti-dazzle or vice
versa. The system will store diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). The upper electronic module (UEM)
is integrated in the rear view mirror.
- Read off data from the control module before replacing the control module. Program this data
back into the new control module. Programmed data is read off via VADIS vehicle communication.
- Always check that the control module and control module box connectors do not have bent or
damaged terminals or socket/sleeves. This may have been the cause of a fault.
CAUTION: New software can only be ordered after the control module has been installed in the
car. VADIS reads off the new control module identity which is required to order the correct
software.
Preparatory work Remove the interior lighting.
Removing the rear view mirror/control module
- Remove the cover over the connector for the rear view mirror and control module
- Remove the cable spring using a screwdriver
- For rear view mirrors with manual anti-dazzle: Flip the anti-dazzle button toward the lens.
Page 2003

Page 338
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 1505
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 458
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 188
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1562
Install:
- the tie strap under the protective sheath
Note! Fasten the cable tie on the smooth central section of the corrugated hose.
- the protective sheath
- four tie straps around the protective sheath, hoses and wiring. Secure the tie straps on the four
smooth central sections of the corrugated hose.
Installing the right-hand level sensor and pump and the left-hand level sensor in the fuel tank
Page 698
Junction sleeve
951 2785 Crimping tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2785 Crimping Tool
Page 584
Fuses 11A/1-8
11A/X
11B/no. Fuses In Engine Compartment

Page 745
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Control module fuel pump (FP), replacing
Note! Some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always
correct.
Removal
Vehicles with fuel pump module located on fuel tank
Open Luggage Compartment Lid/tailgate
Remove:
- luggage compartment mat/floor hatches and side panels on the right side
- backseat's seat cushion
Fold the rear seat backrest forward. Remove the right side upholstery Refer to: Upholstery, side
cushion, replacing See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Seat,
Passenger Seat/Upholstery, Side Cushion, Replacing Remove the right part of the backrest Use
new bolt, 1 pc. M10. Tighten with 50 Nm.
Page 1880
Disconnect the connector.
Installing the acceleration sensor
Note! It is essential that the acceleration sensors are installed with the connector facing upwards
and is secure in the vehicle. Otherwise movement may result in incorrect values being returned to
the system, with poorer driving characteristics, when cornering for example, as a result.

Install the M10 nut. Connect the connector. Test the function.
Page 905
- Ignition off
- the control module disconnected
terminal. To connect the breakout box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and
Service and Repair
Alarm Module: Service and Repair
Replacing the attack alarm control module
Preparatory work
The control module is located behind the left rear wheel arch.
Remove:
- the left side panel in the cargo compartment
- any RTI (road traffic information) modules
- the rear electronic module from the bracket and move to one side.
Removing the alarm control module
Remove:
- two screws for the alarm control module bracket. Disconnect the 2 connectors
- the alarm control module and bracket.
Installing the alarm control module
Install:
- the 2 connectors
- the alarm control module and bracket.
Finishing work
Install:
- the rear electronic module and bracket
- RTI modules
- the side panel and carry out a function check.

Page 1170
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 1203

Locations

Page 1193
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 786
When a driver and/or passenger airbag module has deployed:
- all seat belt tensioners, seat belt buckles and end mountings in the rear seat (and in the third row
rear seat where applicable) have been activated and should therefore be replaced
- the seat belt tensioners in the front seats are checked according to Seat belt tensioner, checking,
as activation of the tensioner function depends on whether seat belt was in use or not.
When the vehicle is subjected to collision forces without the driver and/or passenger airbag module
deploying:
- all the seat belt tensioners in the car must be checked.
Procedures When replacing seat belts that were in use in a collision, cut the seat belt to prevent
reuse.
Page 169
Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair Second Generation Power Seats
Power Seat Module (PSM), Replacing
Power seat module (PSM), replacing

Raise the seat to its highest position.
For first generation power seats:
Remove the seat from the car. See Lifting seats in and out See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
For second generation power seats:
Remove the seat from the car. See Removing power seats, tilting See: Body and
Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Remove the key.
Note! The key must be removed to ensure that the ignition is not switched on by mistake.
Wait 1 minute before starting work.
Remove the two screws. Disconnect the connector. Remove the control module.
Install:
- the control module
- the connector
- the two screws. The seat must be tightened to the floor. Tighten to 48 Nm.
- the key
Page 916
Road traffic information (RTI) up button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) up button is depressed. Not activated
Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) down button, status
This value indicates whether the RTI down button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) enter button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) enter button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) reset button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) reset button is depressed. Not
activated Activated
Windscreen washer, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the washer position. Not
activated Activated
High speed position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the high speed position. Not
activated Activated
Low speed position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the low speed position. Not
activated Activated
Intermittent position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the intermittent position. Not
activated Activated
Single sweep position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the single sweep position.
Not activated Activated
Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module, Description
Frozen values steering wheel module, description
Explanation
Not all the parameters described need to be implemented in the control module. This varies from
system to system. Frozen values are parameter values that are stored when a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) is stored.
Battery voltage, value

Drivetrain Controls - Software Update For Various Issues
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain Controls - Software Update For Various
Issues
Title Differential Electronic Module (DEV) Software (SW)
Issuer -
Func Group 4651
Func Desc final drive; Automatic Operation Clutch

Status Released
Reference VIDA, VSTG, RTJs, 21762, 21524, 23051
Attachment
Vehicle Type
CSC
Page 715
Page 311
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 845
Fault symptom[s]
- Rear windshield washing does not operate.
Checking Rear Windshield Washing
Checking rear windshield washing
Checking components
Activate the tailgate washer with the wiper switch. Read off the status.
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- To replace the wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the tailgate washer. Read off the status.
Hint: If the tailgate washer status is OK the fault is in the tailgate washer.
Was the tailgate washer status OK?
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1770
Switch off the ignition. Remove the air cleaner (ACL) housing. Detach the inlet hose between the
air cleaner (ACL) and the turbocharger (TC) from the turbocharger (TC). Open the catches and
disconnect both the connectors for the heated oxygen sensors (HO2S).
Heated oxygen sensors (HO2S), removing
See Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), replacing See: Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Replacing.
Installing the adapter cable

Page 346

Page 60
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - radio module
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------

Selecting car model
and S70 / C70. 4. S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
3 - car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70
------------------------

Page 525
The throttle angle is regulated so that the actual angle (actual value) is the same as the angle
calculated by the engine control module (ECM) (desired value). The engine control module (ECM)
also uses the values that were stored during adaptation of the throttle angle, and the actual signals
from the potentiometers.
The damper motor is controlled by a power stage integrated in the engine control module (ECM)
using a pulse width modulation (PWM) signal. The torsion from the opening and return springs in
the throttle unit is also used. If there is a fault in the engine control module (ECM) so that the
throttle unit cannot be operated or supplied with power, the springs in the throttle unit will turn the
throttle disc to the limp home position (return position). This return position gives a throttle angle
large enough to allow the car to be driven to a workshop, although with considerably reduced
drivability.
Throttle angle The throttle angle is usually gauged by potentiometer 1. For small angles the
amplified signal is used to obtain a clearer signal. The engine control module (ECM) also monitors
the throttle unit signals from the potentiometers to check that they are plausible, that they are within
the minimum and maximum limits and that the signals correspond to the same throttle angle. If
there is a difference in the signals, a fictitious throttle signal is calculated from the load signal, the
engine speed (rpm) and the prevailing conditions, particularly pressure and temperature.
The potentiometer whose signal is closest to the calculated throttle angle will then be assumed to
be correct. The other potentiometer is then classified as not functioning and a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) is stored. The system then constantly monitors the throttle angle of the remaining
potentiometer in comparison to the calculated throttle angle. If there is a difference between these
values, the engine control module (ECM) will not rely on any of the throttle unit potentiometers. The
power stage in the throttle unit is then disengaged, and the throttle switches to limp home mode
(return position).
Adaptation of the throttle unit Normally the engine control module (ECM) adapts the throttle unit
during manufacture of the car. There are a number of other occasions when the throttle unit must
be adapted. A new adaptation is obviously required if the throttle unit or the engine control module
(ECM) is replaced, but also if the software in the engine control module (ECM) is replaced. This is
because the adaptation values are stored in the EEPROM memory in the control module, at a
predetermined location in the memory for each software. These storage locations may vary
between different software, in which case a new adaptation will be required. The final reason for
adaptation is that the values for the throttle unit may have changed during its service life. Therefore
there is a routine which begins adaptation of the throttle unit if the car is left with the engine off and
the throttle on for 30 seconds (and other basic conditions for adaptation of the throttle unit are met).
A new adaptation is then carried out. If the "new" values are different from the "old" values, the new
values are used. Adaptation usually takes place automatically when the engine control module
(ECM) detects that the adaptation has not been run or that the values from a previous adaptation
are outside certain tolerances. However a number of basic conditions must be met to ensure that
the adaptation is carried out correctly:
Basic conditions for adaptation of the throttle unit:
- ignition on/engine off
- battery voltage above 10 V
- accelerator pedal (AP) released (unaffected)
- the car must be stationary (no speed signal)
- engine coolant temperature (ECT) between 5 and 100 degree C
- intake air temperature (IAT) above 5 degree C.
During adaptation, the engine control module (ECM) checks that the values obtained are within
reasonable limits. This helps to determine whether the throttle unit is functioning correctly or not.
When the adaptation has been carried out, all relevant values are stored in the EEPROM memory
in the control module so that they can be retrieved if the power supply is broken. This means that if
the battery is replaced for example, a new adaptation is not necessary.
Page 945
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - steering wheel module

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1182
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 778

Page 1850

Page 493
For the location of the relays, see:
Relay / fuse
- Ignition off
- Remove the cover from the fusebox
- Remove the relay / fuse.
Retainer
Page 1849

Page 997
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
- Turn signal lever does not work
- Windshield wiper does not work
Checking the Steering Wheel Module (SWM)

Page 888
Check the voltage between B1 and B3. The voltage should be approximately 12V. Check the
voltage between B2 and B3. The voltage should be approximately 5V. Check voltage between B3
and battery negative lead. The voltage should be approximately 0V. If voltages measured above
are OK, the fault is in the cruise-control switch unit.
- To connect the test box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Steering Wheel Buttons For RTI (Road Traffic Information)
Page 774
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 351
Applies to the S60 / S80

- Turn the handle (1) on the left-hand side through 90°.
- Fold the panel inwards to access the fusebox inside.
Illustration B
Applies to the V70
- Remove the left-hand folding panel to access the fusebox inside.
Illustration C
Applies to XC90 with two rows of seats
- Fold up the centre rear floor hatch (1) slightly
- Remove it by pulling it off the mountings at the front edge
- Remove the storage box underneath and lift it out. If the floor hatch has a carrier bag holder on
the underneath, which is secured by a strap on each of the shorter sides of the storage box, the
straps must be undone
- Remove the front floor hatch in the same way.
Applies to the XC90 with three rows of seats and an integrated carrier bag holder on the under side
of the centre floor hatch
- Fold up the centre rear floor hatch (1)
- Release the two straps on the panel underneath. Lift up the panel at the rear edge. Fold back the
floor hatch towards the panel. Lift out the floor hatch and panel.
Applies to the XC90 with three rows of seats without integrated carrier bag holders
- Lift up the centre rear floor hatch (1) at the rear edge and lift it out.
Applies to all XC90
- Remove the left-hand side floor hatch (2).
Illustration D
Page 621
10/53 Through C1-6

Climate Control Module (CCM)
3/112 Climate Control Module CCM

Page 677
Release the inner housing section on the socket housing by lifting the sleeve beside the catch and
pulling the housing section outwards. Disconnect the cable terminals. Use tool 951 2812 Terminal
removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2812 Terminal Removal Tool or951 2637 Terminal
removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637 Terminal Removal Tool , as illustrated. At the
same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Slide the receptacle housing into the connector. Press the secondary lock into place.
Sealed Connector Type 1
Connector sealed, repair

Removal Tool.
correct.
The connector has no secondary lock.
Primary lock
Page 1265

Page 554
4/52 Power Driver Seat Module PSM
4/56 Central Electronic Module CEM
4/58 Rear Electronic Module REM
4/68 Steering Angle Sensor Module SAS
4/70 Upper Electronic Module UEM

Starting System - Ign. Key Won't Turn Past Position 1
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Ign. Key Won't Turn
Past Position 1
Title Ignition key does not turn past position I (1).
Ref No US24374.1.1 en-US
Issuer -
Func Group 6400 Func Desc steering
Status Released
Reference
Attachment
Vehicle Type
CSC
DTC
Text CSC = Customer Symptom Code
Note!
If using a printed copy of this Retailer Technical Journal first check for the latest Online version.
DESCRIPTION:
An ignition key that can not be turned past Position 1(1) is most likely caused by a faulty ignition
column lock.
SERVICE:
Replace the column lock according to the procedure in VIDA function group 6400 "Steering wheel
lock replacement"
VSTG OPERATION NUMBER: 64108 Steering wheel lock replacement Time Allowance: See
VSTG
Page 1179
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Locations
7/6 Oil Pressure Sensor

Page 1709
- Install the wire on the new ejector for the level sensor and pump
- Insert the hoses and wiring into the tank via the right-hand tank hole
- Grip the right-hand level sensor and pump holder and pinch it so that the float is held in its lowest
position
- Carefully and slowly lower the holder. Carefully work the holder into place
- Pull the wire so that the hoses and wiring end up on the left side of the tank
- Install the left-hand level sensor on the ejector
- Install the switches on the underneath of the left-hand level sensor
- Remove the wire from the ejector.
Finishing
- Install the sensor, backrest, side cushion and seat cushion. See Draining the fuel tank.
Page 1774
Note! For tightening torques, see Tightening torque See: Engine, Cooling and
Install:
- the rear heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). Tighten to 45 Nm. Use tool 999 5543 SOCKET NV-22
HO2S See: Tools and Equipment/999 5543 Socket NV-22 HO2S
- the wiring for the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) in clips and clamps. Connect the wiring
- a new gasket and new nuts at the join between the three-way catalytic converter (TWC) and the
exhaust system. Tighten to 24 Nm
- the rubber mounting for the three-way catalytic converter (TWC)
- the front SIPS member. Press the brake pipe into place in the member
- the lower engine cover.
Erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Reset trim.
Page 310
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 779
Other Relays
Page 1619
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stop lamp switch, replacing
Preparatory work
Ignition off
Ignition off Remove the key.
Removing soundproofing
Remove the soundproofing on the driver's side. See:(S80), Soundproofing panel, replacing See:
Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Soundproofing Panel, Replacing (V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70) or Soundproofing panel,
replacing See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Soundproofing Panel, Replacing (S60).
Lock the brake pedal in the depressed position. Use a pedal jack.
Removal
Removing the brake lamp switch

Locations

Page 479

Page 1258
Note! Ensure that the activator has dried for at least 10 minutes before the paint is applied.
- Spray the sensor holders and the sensors. Use paint with the same colour code as the car. Use a
Volvo recommended paint. Apply a maximum of two layers of paint.
Caution! Too many layers of paint may result in partial or complete malfunction.
- Hold the bumper up against the car. Connect the connectors for the sensors to the connector
secured to the car
- Reinstall the bumper by repeating the instructions in points in reverse order
- Install the outer sensors in the holders. Connect the sensors to the cable harness. See illustration.
- Connect the pre-routed cable to the spare port in the parking assistance module (PAM)
- It is secured by Velcro strips on the left-hand side in the cargo compartment behind the wheel
arch.
Note! Ensure that the connector clicks into place and are properly secured.
Finishing work
- Clamp the sensor cable so that it does not chafe or rattle.

Page 1535
against the inner wall of the tank. If not: Slacken off the screw and adjust the position of the sensor.
Tighten as above.
Install the cover over the fuel tank unit. Tighten the nuts. Connect the cables and the connectors.
Reinstall the insulation panel and fold down the seat cushion.
Level Sensor, Fuel Tank/Fuel Pump, Replacement
Level sensor, fuel tank/fuel pump, replacement
Removal
correct.
Draining the fuel system and fuel tank
Drain:
- the fuel system. See Draining the fuel system See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Service and Repair.
- the fuel tank. See Draining the fuel tank See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air

Page 574
8/32 Igniter, Passenger Side Airbag, Stage 2
8/33-34 Front Left and Right Seat Belt Tensioner Igniter
8/36 Shift Lock Solenoid
8/37 Automatic Transmission
8/38-41 Shift Solenoid 1,2, Lock-Up Solenoid, Pressure Solenoid

Locations

Page 592
Fuses 11C/34-38
11c
11D/no. Fuses In Cargo Compartment

Page 1627
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Switch, Hazard Warning Flashers
Switch, hazard warning signal flasher, replacing
Removal
Switch
- Insert a weatherstrip tool into the gap at the side of the ventilation housing. See the illustration.
The arrows show the location of the mounting hooks
- Press the mounting hook up using a screwdriver. At the same time pry out the ventilation housing
so that the hook releases.
Repeat for the other three mounting hooks so that the ventilation housing is released.
Page 678
Page 717
Page 491
- Disconnect the electrical box from the spring strut housing by pressing it in towards the engine
compartment.
Removal
Location of fuse, 11B

Page 979
Checking the error message
Note! Many serious error messages cannot be erased from the display window. This remains in the
display window until the error concerned has been dealt with.
Does the error message indicate a serious error?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read and Reset Button on the Indicator Switch
Checking the read and reset button on the indicator switch
Activate the read and reset button on the indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read and reset button gave a correct result the fault is not in the SWM.

-------------------------------------------------
Replacing.

Service and Repair
Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Pressure sensor, master cylinder, replacing
Preparations for replacing the pressure sensor on the master cylinder (5-cylinder naturally
aspirated engine)Remove the air cleaner (ACL) and preheating hose, see: Left-hand drive, Master
cylinder, replacing, L.H.D See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Master Cylinder, Replacing, L.H.D Right-hand drive, Master cylinder,
replacing, R.H.D See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Master Cylinder, Replacing, R.H.D Cars with turbocharger (TC):
Remove the air hose between the air cleaner (ACL) and the turbocharger (TC). Remove the relay
box. Master cylinder, replacing, R.H.D See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake
Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Master Cylinder, Replacing, R.H.D
Removal
Preparations for checking the pressure sensor
Turn on the ignition. Press the dynamic stability and traction control (DSTC) button on the
dashboard (the green lamp lights in the button) so that the DSTC system is engaged.
Checking pressure sensor

Page 490
Relay Box: Service and Repair Integrated Relay/Fusebox, Engine Compartment, Replacing
Integrated relay / fusebox in engine compartment
Exposing
- Disconnect the battery lead. See Battery, replacing See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery, Replacing
- Disconnect the air cleaner (ACL) housing.
- Remove the nut for the battery leads. Disconnect the battery leads
- Remove the screws on the left and right sides of the electrical box.
Page 1125
normal for the 1-2 and 2-3 shift to be noticeably delayed when the car engine is cold. This is a
normal consequence of this function.
Temperature controlled lock-up
If the transmission temperature increases abnormally as a result of heavy load under high ambient
temperature conditions, the torque converter lock-up function is activated as often as possible
(temperature controlled lock-up). This reduces slippage and the generation of heat in the
transmission. If the temperature drops below +200 C the lock-up function will not be used.
Slipping lock-up
The slipping lock-up function provides smoother engagement with reduced vibration and decreased
noise when a gear is engaged. In this mode, the torque converter clutch is engaged, but not fully
locked. The following must be met in order for the function to activate: -
Gear selector in position D, 4 or 3
- Gear 3, 4 or 5
- The transmission input speed is 1100 rpm or more and the throttle opening is 35 % or less
- The transmission oil temperature is 40 - 120°C.
Due to the torque converter slipping between 50-200 rpm, the friction properties of the transmission
fluid are very important. The transmission fluid differs from conventional ATF oil properties. Always
use the specified fluid for this transmission. Failure to do so may compromise the function and set
a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The engine coolant must reach a certain temperature before the
function engages.
Driving uphill
The transmission control module (TCM) may change the gear shift pattern slightly when driving
uphill. This is to avoid busy shifting.
Neutral control (only available on certain models)

This function is activated when the driver stops the car and the car is stationary, at traffic lights for
example. The transmission control module (TCM) then disengages the C1 clutch which releases
the forward drive of the transmission and reduces the load on the engine. The function improves
fuel consumption and reduces vibrations at idle speed. When the driver releases the brake, the C1
clutch engages and drive is resumed. The following conditions must be met for the Neutral control
function to be activated: -
Gear selector in position D, 4, or 3 when Winter mode and Geartronic are not selected Oil
temperature above + 10°C
- Oil temperature above + 10°C
- Throttle position less than 3 %
- Brake pedal depressed
- Speed 0 km/h
- Engine speed less than 1500 rpm.
There are two time factors for engagement: There is a 2 second delay in position D when
stationary and a 5 second delay at N to D.
Shifting using Geartronic
When the gear selector is moved to the Geartronic position (MAN) the automatic transmission
remains in hydraulic position D, but when the gear selector is moved upwards (+) the gear selector
module (GSM) transmits a signal to the transmission control module (TCM) to shift up. When the
gear selector is moved downwards (-) a signal is transmitted to the transmission control module
(TCM) to shift down. The driver information module (DIM) switches the symbol in the combined
instrument panel from D to the current gear, for example 3, when the gear selector is in the MAN
position. A signal is sent to the gear selector module (GSM) to light the M LED and switches off the
other LEDs. The transmission control module (TCM) determines if shifting can be carried out and
the driver information module (DIM) indicates the current gear. If shifting is permitted the solenoids
are activated according to each specific gear pattern. However, in certain situations the
transmission control module (TCM) assumes the shifting decision. The following applies: -
When stationary only 1st, 2nd and 3rd gears can be selected. 4th gear can be selected at speeds
in excess 30 km/h and 5th at speeds in excess of 40 km/h
- Automatic down shifting occurs below a certain speed. Example: 2nd gear is selected. Automatic
down shifting occurs when shifting from 2nd gear to 1st at 2 km/h if the speed, before then,
exceeds 25 km/h. in other cases 2nd gear is retained. For example, when 3rd gear is engaged
despite the car being stationary
- Manual up shifting is required after automatic down shifting. Kick-down is not available in the
Geartronic-position (MAN)
- The permitted speed for manual down shifting corresponds to those for kick-down downshifting,
i.e. engine speed at approximately 6 000 rpm
Page 843
Was the direction indicator switch status OK?
-------------------------------------------------
Change direction indicator switch.
Other information:
- Turn signal switch, replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors and Switches - Lighting and
Horns/Turn Signal Switch/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Switch, Replacing
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the direction indicator switch status is OK the problem is in the direction indicator switch.
Yes - Fault Found
No - Checking the windshield wiper switch
-------------------------------------------------
Try replacing the control module.
Other information
- Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and
Repair
Page 135

Page 133
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 803
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 2040
Diagram Legend, See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and Instructions/Diagram Legend
53/### Junction Points
Junction Points
All references in the diagrams that begin with the number 53 (i.e. 53/###) are references to the
vehicle's electrical junction points.
Diagrams for the junction points can be found at Branching Point Diagrams. See: Power and
Ground Distribution/Branching Point/Diagrams
locations for the junction points can be found within the Harness Locations images at the vehicle
level. See: Locations/Harness Locations
Page 1690
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Replacing The
Thermostat
Replacing The Thermostat
Preparation Remove the cap from the expansion tank. Install a hose clamp on the upper coolant
hose. Raise the car. Remove the lower splashguard. Position a container under the engine drain
cock. Drain 2 liters of engine coolant. Close the cock. Install the lower splash guard. Lower the car.
Disconnect the sensor cable connector. Remove the upper timing belt cover.
Remove
NOTE: Put paper under the generator (GEN) to avoid oil spillage.
Remove:
- the servo pump
Replacing the thermostat Remove the cover and the thermostat.
Install a new thermostat with a new gasket.
NOTE: Ensure that the thermostat is positioned correctly in the thermostat housing.
CAUTION: For tightening torques not in the text, see Tightening torque.
Install:
- the servo pump
Finishing Remove the hose clip.
Fill with coolant. Install the cap on the expansion tank. Test drive the engine until the thermostat
has opened. Check for leakage. Top up the coolant and oil if necessary.
Page 1549
Hold the float arm in the centre position and press the level sensor into position.
Installing the fuel pump (FP)
Lower the pump into the tank.
Install:
- the fuel hose
- the three connectors.
Turn the pump to the installation position. Install the mounting bracket and screw. (M6) Install the
cover. Use special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5720 Wrench. For
tightening torques, see Tightening torque See: Engine, Cooling and
Note! Check that the arrow on the cap ends up between the markings on the tank. If the arrow
ends up outside the markings it will result in the tank gauge indicating the wrong value and the float
may jam against the tank's inner wall.
Installing the cover for the level sensor/fuel pump (FP)

Install:
- the cover
- the insulation panel.
Reinstall the carpet.
Finishing
Install:
- the backrest
- the screw for the hinge mounting (M10)
- the connector for the hinge
- the end mounting for the seat belt.
For tightening torques, see Tightening torque See: Body and Frame/Specifications. Install the side
cushion. (V70) Fold the seat cushion forward. (S80, S60) Install the seat cushion.
Page 2025
Fuses 11C/34-38
11c
11D/no. Fuses In Cargo Compartment

Page 1389
- Secure the new connector to the loose cable
- Pull up the sensor connector between the fuel tank and bodywork to the other connector
- Disconnect the cable from the connector
- Connect the connector for the sensor to the existing connector
- Reinstall the fuel pump (FP) cover.
Finishing work
- Fold the soundproofing carpet back into place
- Reinstall the backrest
- Install the screw. Tighten to 50 Nm
- Connect the connector
- Install the screws and the seat belts. Tighten the screws in the side of the body. Tighten to 50
Nm. Tighten the screws in the floor. Tighten to 80 Nm
- Install the side backrest panel
- Fold the seat cushion back into place
- Install the wheel. See Installing wheels See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Service and
Repair
Function test
- Read off and erase any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored in the control module
- Interrupt the diagnostic function by turning off the ignition.

Page 217
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Replacing ABS / DSTC (Dynamic Stability
and Traction Control) Control Module
Replacing ABS / DSTC (dynamic stability and traction control) control module
Preparation
Removing the battery lead

Disconnecting.
Note! There is no need to download software when replacing the ABS control module.
Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing.
Removing the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit
Brake pipe from hydraulic unit / front wheel / junction, replacing See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe From Hydraulic Unit /
Front Wheel / Junction, Replacing.
Removal
Remove:
- the pump motor connector
- the four screws. Use a 6 mm torx external socket.
Carefully lower the control module.
Checking the control module

Page 307
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 184
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 633
NOTE: Do not apply rust solvent spray or grease to the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) or
combined instrument panel connectors.
- Ignition off
- Disconnect the battery negative terminal
- Use compressed air to clean the disconnected connector
- Apply rust solvent spray 1161422 to the disconnected connectors
- Blow clean using compressed air.
NOTE: Do not fill the protective cover with grease.
- Press grease, P/N 1161417-9, into the terminals directly from the tube
- Check that all the cavities in the connectors are filled
- Use a loose male pin to ensure that contact in sockets is good. The pin should remain in position
when pulled gently.
Connector
Connectors, repair
correct.
Connector
Page 1251
- Press the centre of the clip at the bottom of the folding side panel. Press the clip until a click is
heard
- Remove the clips
- Repeat on the other side.
- Turn the handle (1) on the right-hand side through 90°.
- Fold the side panel inwards. Lift the panel out
Note! Only remove the left-hand side panel on right-hand drive cars.
Remove:
- the clips (1) in the front side panel in the cargo compartment
- the clips (2) at the top of the front edge on the rear side panel by the folding backrest
- the panel.
Note! Only remove the front left-hand side panel on right-hand drive cars.
Cable routing
Page 533

Page 619
4/7 Through 7/124

Page 151
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 2030
15/31C1
15/31C2
15/31C4
15/31C5
15/31C6
Page 1843
Disconnecting.
Page 605
20/31 Shunt, Brake Light REM
20/32 Shunt, Indicator CEM, Left
20/34 Shunt, Indicator CEM, Right
20/39 Shunt, Cargo Compartment 12V Outlet
31/No. Ground Connection

Page 1348
Switch on the ignition. Wait for 5 seconds. The symbol on the dashboard should go out.
Test driving
Test Drive Form (DSTC (dynamic stability and traction control) /brake control module), description
See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Test Drive Form (DSTC (Dynamic Stability
And Traction Control) /Brake Control Module), Description
Page 2021
Fuses 11C/9-13
Locations
Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Service and Repair
Start / Stop Switch: Service and Repair
Start operation
Starter switch, replacing
Removal
Start switch
- Remove the steering column covers.
- Remove the 2 screws
- Remove the starter switch.
Installation
Start switch
- In reverse order
- Install the steering column covers.

Page 2000
7/84 Tank Pressure Sensor

Page 1290
- Remove the cover (1).
- Remove the cable (1) from its position (4) on the cover (3)
- Install the movement sensor (2) on the cover (3) by pressing the sensor into place
- Connect the cable (1)
- Reinstall the cover and the movement sensor in the roof.

Page 1060
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Switch, Power Window, Rear Side Door, Replacing
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Switch, Power Window, Rear Side Door, Replacing
Switch, power window, rear side door, replacing
Removal
Switch
- Remove the door panel. See Panel, rear side door, replacing See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood
and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Panel, Rear Side Door, Replacing
- Release the catches. Press the switch up and off.
Installation
Switch
In reverse order
Page 42
Communications Control Module: Description and Operation System Overview
System overview
Control module
The audio module (AUM) manages functions for:
- Radio reception AM and FM
- CD playback (if the control module / car has either a CD player or a CD changer)
- Cassette playback (if the control module is equipped with a cassette player)
- Mini-Disk play back (option, Japan only)
- TV reception (option, certain markets)
- RDS reception (certain models and markets)
- Voice information from the Road Traffic Information system, RTI (road traffic information) (option,
market dependent).
The audio module (AUM) is mounted in the Audio Box in the center console. The control module is
integrated with the sound unit. They are replaced as one unit. There are three different sound units:
- HU-4XX- Integrated radio, cassette player and internal amplifier (4x25W)
- HU-6XX- Integrated radio, cassette player, CD player and internal amplifier (4x25W). Available
options: external amplifier and external CD changer
- HU-8XX- Integrated radio, 4 disc CD-changer, internal amplifier (1x25W) for the center
loudspeaker and requires an external amplifier (4x50W). An external CD changer is available as an
option.
The CD player has next/previous track, fast search forwards and backwards and random play
(RND - random). The cassette player has next/previous track, fast forward and backward and
random play (RND - random). The Mini-disk player (option, Japan only) has next/previous track,
fast search forwards and backwards and random play (RND - random). The audio module (AUM)
communicates with directly connected components and with other control modules and
components connected via Controller area network (CAN) communication. RDS-reception (Radio
Data System) is possible (market dependant) during FM transmissions. In the USA, the system is
called RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System). The loudspeakers in the front and rear doors are
connected to the control module or to an external amplifier if applicable. The loudspeakers in the
parcel shelf (S60/S80) and in the D-post (V70/V70XC) are also connected to the control module or
to an external amplifier (if applicable). There are three different loudspeaker options:
- Base Performance
- High Performance
- Premium sound (not available for the S80).
The control module continually checks both its internal operations and its input and output signals.
A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored in the control module memory if the control module
detects a fault in any of these. The diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can be read off using the
diagnostic tool via the data link connector (DLC) in the car. The audio module (AUM) has an
internal communication system called Melbus. There is communication between the audio module
(AUM), CD changer, Road Traffic Information Module (RTI) and the TV receiver. Melbus comprises
three different signals:
- MSCK, the clock signal
- MDATA, the data signal which transmits information
- MBUSY, indicates whether the data signal is busy or not.
For information, also see Signal specifications.
Signals
Page 934
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 897
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Windscreen-Wiper Switch
Checking the windscreen-wiper switch
Activate windscreen-wiper switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch gave a correct result the fault is not in the
SWM.
Page 728
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 274
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 1945
Place the sealing plate in the control module Press the throttle valve and the temperature-/pressure
sensor into place on the control module connector. Place the cupped washer with the convex side
against the temperature-/pressure sensor. Lubricate the sealing rings on the valves. Use oil. See
applicable specifications.
Carefully check that the control module sealing surface and the valve seats in the Active on
Demand Coupling (AOC) are clean, there must be no residue left from cloths or paper. Lubricate
the new O-ring using oil. See: and securely press into its seat.
Installing the Active on Demand Coupling (AOC)
Install the control module with the valves for the coupling, hold it pressed against the coupling
housing while installing the 2 x screws. Lightly tighten alternately.
Page 187
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 1550
Replacing the Fuel Pump / Level Sensor For the Right-Hand Fuel Tank
Replacing the fuel pump / level sensor for the right-hand fuel tank
Special tools:
Removal
Removing the rear seat
Remove:
- the backrest. See Backrest See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Back/Service and Repair/Backrest.
Drain:
- the fuel system. See the relevant service procedure.
Removing the level sensor / pump
Note! Use special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5720 Wrench to remove
the snap ring for the level sensor / pump.
Grip the right-hand level sensor and pump holder and pinch it so that the float is held in its lowest
position.
Removing the level sensor / pump, continued

Pulse Wheel, Drive Shaft, Replacing
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Pulse Wheel, Drive Shaft, Replacing
Pulse wheel, drive shaft, replacing
Removing the pulse wheel
- Remove the drive shaft. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle
- Secure the drive shaft in a vise with soft jaws

- Tap off the pulse wheel using a hammer and cold chisel.
Installing the pulse wheel

Page 219
into place.
Install:
Brakes/Service and Repair
Function test
Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Wheel Sensor Front, Replacing.
Page 1124
Control Module: Description and Operation Function
Function Controlling the shift solenoids when shifting
Shifting and the lock-up function is controlled by activating the solenoids in a specific pattern. The
solenoids S1-S5 determine which gear is to be used and the SLS, SLU and SLT solenoids
determine engagement by adjusting hydraulic line pressure. The basic parameters for the different
shifting points are the accelerator pedal (AP) position and the vehicle speed. The shift quality is
decided by the control of torque. The pressurization of the clutches and the brakes are adjusted by
reading the changes of the speed of the transmission input shaft during the shifting process and
comparing them to the values calculated in the transmission control module (TCM). Two shifting
patterns can be selected, normal conditions and winter mode (selected using the button). In normal
mode shifting and lock-up occur at relatively low speeds to reduce fuel consumption. In the event of
rapid accelerator pedal movements, the transmission control module (TCM) automatically shifts to
sport mode.
Shifting patterns
Shifting program Economy mode
When driving at normal acceleration the transmission control module (TCM) uses a preset shifting
program, optimized to shift for economy driving. This shifting program is suitable for "normal"
driving which provides earlier up shifts and lock-up. In addition the transmission oil pressure is
adjusted to provide smooth gear engagement.
Sport mode
The transmission switches from economy mode to sport mode if the accelerator pedal (AP) is
pressed down quickly. The conditions are that the throttle opens and the vehicle speed exceeds 50
km/h. As soon as the accelerator pedal (AP) is moved less quickly economy mode is resumed. In
the sport mode shifting program the shifting points are adjusted to provide the best possible
performance. Down shifting occurs at lower engine speed (RPM).
Extreme mode
At wide open throttle (WOT) the kick-down function is engaged and the transmission shifts to the
lowest possible gear. In this way a boost of power is achieved when overtaking for example.
Winter mode
Winter mode is selected using the (W) button on the top panel of the gear selector assembly.
Winter mode enables starting off in a high gear to prevent the wheels from spinning on a slippery
surface. This mode can also be used in other difficult situations in which the driver needs more
direct control over gear selection. Depending on the gear position, the following combinations can
be obtained: -
D The car starts in 3rd gear. Automatic shifting between 3rd, 4th and 5th gears
- 4 The car starts in 3rd gear. Automatic shifting between 3rd and 4th gears occurs earlier than in
economy mode, D position. 5th gear is locked out
- 3 The car starts in 3rd gear. There is no upshifting or downshifting
- L The car starts in 2nd gear. There is no upshifting or downshifting.
The warning lamp on the dashboard lights when winter mode is selected. If kick-down is activated
in Winter mode, the transmission uses all gears for maximum performance.
Other modes Adaptation
The transmission control module (TCM) monitors each shift during all driving conditions to fulfill
optimal and smooth shifting. This is carried out by the control module either lowering or increasing
the hydraulic line pressure used during the shift itself. The changed pressure levels are stored in
the control module memory when the car has been switched off and are retrieved on start-up. This
provides improved shifting comfort and increased service life. Adaptation occurs when the following
conditions have been met: -
Throttle opening is steady
- Oil temperature between 65°C and 110°C.
Catalytic converter start
Shifting occurs differently during engine warm up. This function is used to help the engine reach its
operating temperature by preventing torque converter lock-up and by delaying up shifts. This
function works in the D-position but not in the winter mode (W). Because of this function, it is
Page 643
Central electrical unit engine/transmission control module (ECM/TCM).
Relay box in passenger compartment/cargo compartment. See Connector relay box, repair See:
Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connector Relay Box, Repair.
Page 405

Page 2018
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 578
9/18-19 Left/Right-Hand Seat Heating Element
9/25 Rear 12V Outlet
9/32 PTC Resistor - Air Preheating
10/1-2 Left/Right-Hand Front Lamp Housing
10/3 License Pate Lighting

Page 874
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read and Reset Button on the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the read and reset button on the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Activate the read and reset button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the read and reset button status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the reset button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Page 1908
Remove the gear selector from the lever and the cable mounting from the transmission. Unhook
the mounting with the connector for the transmission from the bracket for the air cleaner (ACL)
housing. Remove the tie straps for the cable harness and the mounting in the cover for the control
system. Separate the connector for the gear-shift position sensor. Remove the gear-shift position
sensor from the mounting.
Removing the gear-shift position sensor
Remove:
- the lever for the gear shift linkage rod
- the nut, locking washer and rubber seal securing the gear-shift position sensor to the gear shift
linkage rod
- the 2 screws
- the gear-shift position sensor.
Installation
Installing the gear-shift position sensor
Install:
- the sensor. Lightly tighten the 2 screws
- the rubber washer, the lock washer and the nut on the sensor.
Tighten the nut. Lock the nut with the locking washer.
Page 463

Page 825
Active Yaw Control Sensor, Replacing
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Active Yaw Control Sensor, Replacing
Active yaw control sensor, replacing
correct.
Location
The active yaw control sensor (AYC) is under the right-hand front seat.
Preparatory work
Remove the Audio module (AUD). Remove the panels over the front screws for the seat rails (pull
straight up). Remove the 2 front screws for the seat rails. Fold the seat backwards. Fold away the
carpet. Remove the right-hand screw for the seat bracket. See the illustration.
Note! Handle the active yaw control sensor with care as it is sensitive to mechanical damage.
Removing the active yaw control sensor
Remove the 2 screws for the bracket (see the illustration). Disconnect the connector. Lift the seat
bracket. Remove the active yaw control (AYC) sensor. Replace the sensor assembly together with
the bracket.
Tightening torque
For tightening torques, see Tightening torque See: Specifications/Mechanical

Installing the active yaw control sensor

Page 2038
20/31 Shunt, Brake Light REM
20/32 Shunt, Indicator CEM, Left
20/34 Shunt, Indicator CEM, Right
20/39 Shunt, Cargo Compartment 12V Outlet
31/No. Ground Connection

Page 1227
- Carefully remove the panel (1) with the boot. Pry carefully using a weatherstrip tool.
Applies to the V70 / S60
- Remove the two screws from the dashboard environment panel.
Applies to the S80
- Move the gear selector lever as far back as possible
- Pull the panel (1) with the boot as far backwards as possible. Turn the panel as illustrated
- Remove the screws (2) from the dashboard environment panel (3).
Page 1922
Page 889
Checking the steering wheel buttons for RTI (road traffic information)
Checking the connector
- Ignition off.
Cars manufactured between 199943 - 200143 may have defective or bent terminal pins in the
connector which connect the wiring from the RTI (road traffic information) switch to the buttons on
the right-hand side of the steering wheel. As a result the ENTER and DOWN steering wheel
buttons for the road traffic information module (RTI) do not work. Check the connection to the
right-hand keypad on the steering wheel for bent or defective terminal pins. Replace the keypad if a
fault is found. Remedy as necessary
Other
- To access or replace the keypad unit on the steering wheel module (SWM), see Keypad unit,
steering wheel, replacing See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Sensors and Switches -
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Assembly/Service and
Repair/Keypad Unit, Steering Wheel, Replacing.
Page 154
Other Relays
Page 399
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1548
Carefully press in both retaining clips and lift the level sensor approx. 5 mm. Lift up the float to the
centre position and remove the level sensor.
Lift up the float arm to the centre position and remove the level sensor.
Installing the level sensor

Page 58
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Reading Off Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information, Audio Module
Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information, audio module
Reading off extended fault-tracing information, radio module

Page 1243
Remove the rear bumper. See the relevant model below. Pull the cable out of the hole in the body.
S60: Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair
(-2003) or Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair
(2004) or Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair
(2005-). S80: (-2002) or (2003) or (2004-). V70: Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (-2003) or Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (2004) or Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (2005-). V70XC: Bumper rear, replacing See:
Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (-2004) or Bumper rear, replacing See:
Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (2005-).
Removing the back-up (reversing) warning sensor

Page 287
- driver information control unit.
Disconnect contacts.
- lock and alarm receiver.
Installation of driver information control unit
Ordering software
Programming the control unit
After the control module has been replaced, the customer parameters should be programmed in
again. Finish off by checking that no diagnostic trouble codes have been displayed when replacing.
Both programming of the control module and reading the diagnostic trouble codes can be found in
VIDA vehicle communication.
Page 1313
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair
Switch, sun roof, replacing
Removal
Sun roof switch
- Ignition off
- Remove the interior lighting. See Interior lighting and upper electronic module (UEM), replacing
See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair
- Press out the catches. Pull the switch outwards and upwards
- Pull out the catch. Pull out the tie strap.
Installation
Sun roof switch

- Press in the tie strap. Press in the catch
- Correctly position the rear of the switch and press the switch into place
- Install the interior lighting. See Interior lighting and upper electronic module (UEM), replacing See:
Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair.
Page 1766
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S)
- 5 cylinder engines have two heated oxygen sensors (HO2S), front and rear
- 6 cylinder engines have four heated oxygen sensors (HO2S), front and rear for bank 1 (cylinders
1-3) and front and rear for bank 2 (cylinders 4-6)
- XC90s with 6 cylinder engines utilize the Y-concept, where the engine has two heated oxygen
sensors (HO2S) bank 1 (cyl. 1-3), bank 2 (cyl. 4-6) and a rear heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) (bank
1).
Front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) The front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) is used to provide
the Engine Control Module (ECM) with information about the remaining oxygen content of the
exhaust gases in front of the three-way catalytic converter (TWC). This is so that the Engine
Control Module (ECM) can continually check the combustion so that Lambda=1. Lambda=1 is the
ideal fuel-air ratio, with 14.7 kg air/1 kg fuel.
The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) uses current regulation and its signal characteristic is linear.
With a linear signal characteristic, the amplitude of the signal curve is low when changing the
oxygen content in the exhaust gases. The probe consists of a preheating element (see
"Pre-heating heated oxygen sensors (HO2S)") and the actual lambda sensor. The lambda sensor
is an oxygen sensitive ceramic body consisting of zirconium oxide. The control module supplies
power to the ceramic body, which reacts to the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. This in turn
affects the signal to the engine control module (ECM). In order to determine the oxygen content in
the exhaust pipe, the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) needs reference air from the surrounding air.
This reference air reaches the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) via the wiring.
CAUTION: The wiring for the heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) must not be trapped or damaged in
any way. The connectors for the heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) must not be greased under any
circumstances. The oil in the grease would disrupt the reference air and the function of the heated
oxygen sensors (HO2S).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). For further
information, see Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) diagnostic. VADIS/VIDA can be used to read off
the calculated lambda value from the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S).
Rear heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) The rear heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) is used to provide the
Engine Control Module (ECM) with information about the remaining oxygen content of the exhaust
gases beyond the three-way catalytic converter (TWC). This information is used by the Engine
Control Module (ECM) to check the function of the three-way catalytic converter (TWC). This check
is carried out when the conditions for the catalytic converter diagnostics have been met. The rear
heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) has no direct effect on regulation of the fuel/air mixture. However
the Engine Control Module (ECM) uses the signal to optimize the signal from the front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S).
Page 1983
3/123
3/124-125
3/126 Control Unit Left Front Door DDM/PDM
3/127 Control Module Front Right Door PDM/DDM
3/130 Steering Wheel Module SWM

Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Switch
3/8 Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Switch

Page 273
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 917
Measurement range: 0-28.4 V Normal value when the generator (GEN) is charging: 13.0-14.5 V
The value indicates the voltage at the steering wheel module.
Distance, value
Measurement range: 0-1048575 km The value indicates the total mileage of the car at the time the
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Measurement range: -60 to +195 °C The value indicates the passenger compartment temperature
at the time the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Measurement range: -128 to +127.75 °C The value indicates the outside temperature at the time
the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Engine running, status
The status displays whether the engine was running when the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was
stored. Yes = the engine was running No = the engine was not running
Time, value
The value displays the time that has passed since the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Reading Off Detailed Diagnostic Data
Reading off detailed diagnostic data
General information about reading off

Page 760
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 1465
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Blower fan motor passenger compartment temperature sensor, replacing
correct.
Blower fan motor passenger compartment temperature sensor, replacing
Removing the blower fan motor, passenger compartment temperature sensor
Remove:
- the dashboard environment panel. See: Comfort panel (including climate control module, CCM),
replacing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Module HVAC/Service and Repair (-2004) or:
Climate control module (CCM), replacing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Module
HVAC/Service and Repair (2005-)
- the 2 screws.
Installing the blower fan motor, passenger compartment temperature sensor
Install:
- the 2 x screws
- the dashboard environment panel. See: Comfort panel (including climate control module, CCM),
replacing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Module HVAC/Service and Repair (-2004) or:
Climate control module (CCM), replacing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Module
HVAC/Service and Repair (2005-).
Page 1575
- Ignition off
- Key out
- Disconnect the connector for the ignition switch.
Check the voltage in the central electronic module (CEM) connector, terminal #B1 (#A21).
Other information
- To access the ignition switch, see Steering wheel lock, replacing See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Steering Column Lock/Service and Repair
Page 457
Fuses 11C/21-23
Locations
Wiper Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 596
15/31C1
15/31C2
15/31C4
15/31C5
15/31C6
Page 708
Page 1347
- Install the screws. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm.
- Install the connectors.
- Remove the marking from the sensor and cable.
Checking the DSTC system

Page 80
damage to the connector pins.
Signal Specification
Signal specification, audio control module
Connecting the breakout box and checking the ground terminal
Caution! Before starting to measure, the breakout box must be connected and the ground
connections must be checked. See Checking the ground terminals See: Component Tests and
Definitions
The audio control module, green connector
Note! The connectors on the adapter cable must have the correct color-coding for the signal table
to match.
Audio control module (AUM)/External amplifier to loudspeakers, gray connector

Page 1063
Connector B
Page 372
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 158
- Disconnect the connector by pressing the catch using a small screwdriver.
Installing the rear view mirror and control module Connect the connector.
- The cable spring
- The connector cover
- The interior lighting.

Page 371
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1552
Note! Use special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5720 Wrench to tighten
the snap ring for the level sensors.
Grip the right-hand level sensor and pump holder and pinch it so that the float is held in its lowest
position. Carefully and slowly lower the holder. Carefully work the holder into place.
Lubricating the screw, level sensor and pump

Page 1917
Note! For tightening torques, see the relevant specifications.
Install the new sensors. Apply a little petroleum jelly to the O-rings for the sensors. Tighten. See
the relevant specifications.
- Install the connectors for the sensors on the mounting. Assemble the connectors
- Install the tie straps for the cable harness
- Hook the mounting for the connectors on to the bracket for the air cleaner (ACL) housing
- Secure the cable harness mounting in the control system cover.
Install the air cleaner (ACL) housing, including all hoses and electrical terminals. Check and erase
any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
Page 1057
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
- Check the communication cable (k-line) between diagnostic outlet #7 and the driver information
module (DIM) #B4 and other connected control modules for open circuit, short-circuit to ground and
short-circuit to voltage.

on the high-speed network. First when communication takes place on this cable, the high-speed
cables between the diagnostic outlet and driver information module (DIM) are connected to the
high-speed network in the vehicle. This is controlled via a relay in the driver information module
(DIM).
- Check communication cables between diagnostic outlet #6/#14 and the driver information module
(DIM) #A19/#A20 for open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to
references above.
- Also check the communication cables for thehigh-speed networkbetween the driver information
module (DIM) and the other connected control modules according to troubleshooting above.
Communication cable for engine management system Fenix 5.2
Control modules
Page 1204
Other Relays
Page 1334
Remove the pressure sensor using an extended socket.
Installation
Installing the pressure sensor

Locations

Page 1215
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Locations

Page 495
- Lift up / detach the holder and seals for the cable harnesses
- Release the connectors.
Main fuse
- Release the holder. See Retainer.
Note! The connectors do not need to be disconnected.
- Remove the nuts for the fuse
- Remove the fuse.
Main fuse location, 11A
1. See the wiring diagram for the relevant model year 2. Decals at respective integrated
relay/fusebox in the car, 3. Pocket data book, 4. Owner's Manual.
Capacitor
Page 618
List of Components By Component Number
1/1 Through 3/174

Page 1525
Remove the cover. Use special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5720
Wrench.
Remove the screw (1).
Locations
3/111 Light Switch Module LSM

Page 34

Page 1561
Install:

Page 1841
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
The function of the knock sensor (KS) is to monitor combustion knocking from the engine.
Knocking may damage the engine and reduces the efficiency of engine combustion.
If the engine control module (ECM) registers knocking from any of the cylinders, the ignition will be
retarded for that cylinder at the next combustion stage. If repeated ignition retardation does not
prevent knocking, the injection period will be increased. This has a cooling effect. On turbocharged
engines the boost pressure will also be lowered, reducing the engine load.
The sensor is made up of a Piezo electrical crystal. If there is engine knock, vibrations (sound
waves) spread through the cylinder block to the knock sensor (KS). The resultant mechanical
stress in the piezo electrical material in the knock sensors generates a voltage. This signal is
transmitted to the engine control module (ECM). The signal corresponds to the frequency and
amplitude of the sound waves. This allows the Engine Control Module (ECM) to determine if the
engine is knocking. The camshaft position (CMP) sensor and engine speed (RPM) sensor are used
to determine the operating cycle of the engine (which cylinder is igniting) and thereby which
cylinder is knocking.
The knock sensors (KS) are positioned on the cylinder block below the intake manifold.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the knock sensors (KS).
Page 1773
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Replacing
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), replacing
Special tools:
999 5543 SOCKET NV-22 HO2S See: Tools and Equipment/999 5543 Socket NV-22 HO2S
correct.
Removing the front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
Remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) wiring from the clips and clamps. Separate the wiring.
Raise the car
Remove:
- the lower engine cover
- the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). Use tool 999 5543 SOCKET NV-22 HO2S See: Tools and
Equipment/999 5543 Socket NV-22 HO2S.
Installing the front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
For tightening torques, see: Tightening torque See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Tightening Torque
Install:
- the front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). Tighten to 45 Nm. Use tool 999 5543 SOCKET NV-22
HO2S See: Tools and Equipment/999 5543 Socket NV-22 HO2S
- the lower engine cover. Lower the car
- the wiring for the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) using clips and clamps. Connect the wiring.
Removing the rear heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
Raise the car.
Remove:
- the lower engine cover
- the front SIPS member. Unhook the brake pipe from the clips
- unhook the three-way catalytic converter (TWC) from the rubber mountings
- the nuts between the three-way catalytic converter (TWC) and exhaust system. Unhooks the
three-way catalytic converter (TWC)
- the wiring for the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) from the clips and clamps. Disconnect the wiring
- the rear probe. Use tool 999 5543 SOCKET NV-22 HO2S See: Tools and Equipment/999 5543
Socket NV-22 HO2S.
Installing the rear probe

Page 1403
Install the front seat fixture to the body. Install the 4 screws. Tighten to 25 Nm. Install the protective
cover over the screws.
Checking and test driving
Checking the dynamic stability and traction control (DSTC)
Press the dynamic stability and traction control (DSTC) switch (DSTC engaged). Turn on the
ignition. Wait for five seconds. The symbol on the dashboard should go out.
Test-driving
And Traction Control) /Brake Control Module), Description.
Page 63
malfunction.
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet

(DIM).
references above.

Locations
Headlamp Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 45
Communications Control Module: Description and Operation Design
Design
1. Radio antenna. Integrated in the rear windshield on the S60/S80, in the left-hand side window on
the V70/V70XC 2. Antenna amplifier FM/AM, located in the D-post 3. Loudspeakers, positioned in
the parcel shelf (D-post V70/V70XC) 4. Keypad in the steering wheel for audio and telephone 5.
Center loudspeaker with display for cars with the Road Traffic Information module (RTI) 6. Center
loudspeaker for cars without a Road Traffic Information Module (RTI) 7. Audio module (AUM) -
Sound unit audio 8. Door-mounted loudspeakers front (treble) 9. Door-mounted loudspeakers front
(bass/mid-range) 10. External amplifier, positioned under the right-hand front seat 11. Rear
door-mounted loudspeakers 12. Antenna amplifier for the bumper antenna 13. FM antenna
integrated in the bumper 14. CD changer audio.
Antenna
The audio module (AUM) has an antenna system for AM and FM. This consists partly of an AM
antenna and partly of a dual antenna system for FM (Diversity reception). The dual antenna system
is used to reduce Multipath interference. One antenna is integrated in the rear windshield (left-hand
rear side window V70/V70XC). The other antenna is integrated in the rear bumper. The signals
from the antennae are amplified or adjusted by each individual antenna amplifier.
External amplifier
Page 153

Page 806

Locations

Page 400
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 352
Applies to the XC90
- Remove the left-hand folding panel.
Applies to the XC90
- Pull off the rubber strip at the rear edge of the door opening to the left-hand rear door opposite the
left C-post panel
- Carefully pry off the left-hand C-post panel at the sides in the top edge using a plastic
weatherstrip tool. Pull off until the three clips on the inside release. Do not damage the headlining
or the panel
- Remove the panel by pulling upwards slightly and unhooking from the side panel.
Applies to the XC90
- Remove the cover and the screws underneath for the rear headlining
- Carefully pry off the panel at the rear edge using a plastic weatherstrip tool
- Pull the rear edge of the panel downwards until all clips in the inside have released
- If the car has lighting in the panel, disconnect the connector
- Pull the panel backwards to release it.

Page 1469
Climate Control Exhaust Gas Sensor: Description and Operation
Air quality sensor
Aim:
To offer the customer a passenger compartment which is free of bad odours and pollutants.
General:
By placing an air quality sensor in the air intake it is possible to measure the amounts of polluted
air, primarily from motor vehicles. The signal from the air quality sensor is used to exclude the
pollutants by using the recirculation (REC) mode. An activated carbon filter is installed in the
heater. This filter takes care of the pollutants in the couple of seconds before the recirculation
shutter closes and on those occasions when recirculation cannot be used because of misting. The
filter and the sensor are interdependent to provide the customer with as clean a passenger
compartment as possible. The climate control system is equipped with a button to activate the
system.
The filter:
By supplying a particle filter with activated carbon, gases entering the passenger compartment can
be absorbed. The focus of exclusion is on the following substances: NO, NO2, HC(benzene,
toluene, xylene), CO, ozone. What can activated carbon absorb? Cold start: Good absorption of
petrol components is usually achieved. Manure: Ammonia is badly absorbed, however some
neutralization can be expected. Exhausts: Good separation of uncombusted hydrocarbons and
"diesel odour" is achieved. Oil odour: Good. Water treatment plants: Sulphuric acid cannot be dealt
with. Solvents Good. Pulp mills: Many odorous substances. Some can be absorbed. Odours are
complicated and are difficult to explain in terms of concentrations and percentages. A filter will
reduce odours and minimize strong odour changes and will therefore improve comfort. The car can
never be completely odourless. In some cases the odour compounds may seem unexpected
because the constituent substance compounds are modified.
Sensor:
The sensor registers NOxCO and HC. These are the most prominent compounds produced by
motor vehicles. The sensor registers increases in concentrations, for example when a tunnel is
entered or when driving behind a truck. The sensor learns the environment it is in and only reacts
to the relevant increase in concentration. One point is that the sensor reacts to CO, a compound
which activated charcoal filters cannot handle.
Page 573
8/18 EVAP Valve
8/19 Solenoid, Variable Valve Time, Inlet
8/28 Turbocharger Control Valve
8/30 Driver Side Airbag Igniter
8/31 Passenger Side Airbag Igniter

Outside Temperature Sensor, Engine Control Module

Page 1697
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing the engine speed (RPM) sensor
Removing the engine speed (RPM) sensor
Remove the tie strap from the torque rod. Open the hose clamp.
Remove:
- the hoses
- the nut for the sensor
- the sensor.
Installing the engine speed (RPM) sensor

Specifications
Braking Sensor/Switch: Specifications
Component specifications
- Mass air flow (MAF) sensor
- Air pressure sensor intake manifold (MAP)
- Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
- Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor inlet
- A/C pressure sensor
- Air conditioning (A/C) pressostat
- Sensor for fuel pressure and fuel temperature (only for vehicles with demand-controlled fuel
pump)
- Clutch pedal sensor
- Brake pedal sensor
- Impulse sensor
- Knock sensor
Page 1618
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Checking brake light switch adjustment

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 655
Fold up the secondary lock (1), as illustrated. Use an electrician's screwdriver.
Primary lock
Page 62
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
the test, first replace the cable harness then the VCT2000, if the test still indicates a
Page 928
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Reading control unit id
2 - Checking communication fault
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Checking communication fault
Selecting car model
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Locations
3/93-94 Left And Right Seatbelt Latch Switch

Page 1558
position.
Note! Watch out for the fuel tank.
Page 958
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 801
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 539
2/80 Reversing Light Relay
2/82 Relay, Heated Rear Window
2/83 Trailer Fog Light Relay
2/87 Unlocking Relay, Tailgate
2/90 Relay, Windshield Wiper, Low/High Speed

Page 1677
Install:
- the sensor
- screws. Tighten.
Connect the connector for the sensor.
Finishing
Start the engine. Check the function.

Page 1632
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Calibrating the position sensor for Bi-Xenon lamps
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Selecting car model
and S70 / C70. 4. S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
Page 248
Cut off the tie strap holding the cable section to the control module. Remove the control module.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Hint: Slacken off the uppermost nut. Leave it in place, screwed in a few turns.
Pull the control module from the mounting. Position a screwdriver between the control module
connector and its locking handle (as illustrated). Turn the screwdriver to release the catch.
Continue pulling the locking handle outwards until the connector comes away from the control
module.
Installing the control module for the engine coolant heater
Install the switch by pressing in the lock handle. Position the control module. Tighten the nuts
(2xM6). Tighten to 2 Nm.
Final check
Page 1998
7/25 Impulse Sensor

Page 913
- Checking wiring and terminals. Intermittent faults See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals.
Intermittent Faults.
Select Continue
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1116
The following components are included in the control system for automatic transmissions: -
Transmission control module (TCM) Controls activation and deactivation of the solenoids by
processing the signals from components such as the transmission input and output speed sensors
and the temperature sensor. Also stores adaptive data as well as diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
and frozen values for diagnostics
- Shift solenoid, S1 - Controls shifting in the transmission
- Lock-up solenoid, SLU - Controls the lock-up function and is also used for certain shifts
- Line pressure solenoid, SLT - Controls the transmission line pressure and neutral control
- Line pressure solenoid, SLS - Controls the transmission shifting pressure and is activated for
certain gears
- Transmission input speed sensor (input shaft speed) (1) - Provides the transmission control
module (TCM) with information about the input shaft speed from the engine
- Speed sensor (output shaft speed) (2) Provides the transmission control module (TCM) with
information about the output shaft speed from the transmission
- Oil temperature sensor (3) - Provides the transmission control module (TCM) with information
about the oil temperature of the transmission
- Gear-shift position sensor (4) - Provides the transmission control module (TCM) with information
about the selected gear position
- Gear selector module (GSM) - Provides the transmission control module (TCM) with information
about the Geartronic mode and winter mode (W) amongst others.
Signals
Page 1687
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Temperature
Sensor
Engine temperature sensor
Removal
- Jack up the car.
- Drain the coolant as described in Replacing radiator/charge air cooler (CAC) See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Turbocharger/Intercooler/Service and Repair.
- Lower the car.
- Release coolant hose from thermostat housing using pliers.
- Remove thermostat housing.

- Remove sensor.

Page 949
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking components
Hint: If the direction indicator switch status is OK the problem is in the Steering wheel module
(SWM).
Page 2058
ISR = Israel
J = Japan
KOR = Korea
N = Norway
NL = Netherlands
S = Sweden
USA = United States of America
WEU = Western Europe
Other
ACC = Accessory
AMP = Amplifier
AUDIO = Audio system
AUTO = Automatic transmission
Bi-X = Bi-Xenon
CEM = Central Electronic Module
DRL = Daytime Running Lights
DSTC = Dynamic Stability Traction Control
EXC = Exclusive
EXT.D = Extended electrical distribution
HISPEED = High speed data bus LH
= Left-hand side
LHD = Left-hand drive
LOSPEED = Low speed data bus MAN
= Manual transmission
PCL = Power Child Lock
REM = Rear Electronic Module
RH = Right-hand side
RHD = Right-hand drive
RTI = Road Traffic Information
SRS = Airbag
TELE = Mobile telephone
T = Turbo engine
W/O = Without
5CYL = 5-cylinder engine
Colors
BL = Blue
BN = Brown
GN= Green
GR = Gray
OR = Orange
P = Pink
R = Red
SB = Black
VO= Violet
W = White
Y = Yellow
Page 272
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 754
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Locations

Relays, General
Relay Box: Application and ID Relays, General
The relay locations are given two or three different designations in the wiring diagram. This is
described below.
Relays General
Page 733
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Service and Repair
Auxiliary Cabin Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Control module engine coolant heater, replacing
As the illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and / or models,
some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Preparations
Remove the battery lead. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
Remove:
- the bumper cover. See (S80), Casing, bumper front, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair (V70), Casing,
bumper front, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair (V70XC) or Casing, bumper front, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair (S60)
- the two upper screws (as illustrated) and the center screw on the left hand slide mounting
- the left air baffle.
Removing the control module for the engine coolant heater
Points to observe when replacing the control module:
- If moving a control module from one car to another, remember to note any diagnostic trouble code
(DTC)(s) and operating times before removing the control module from the car
- Always check that the terminals or pins in the control module connectors are not bent or
damaged. This may have been the cause of the fault.
Page 924
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Switch, Replacing
Removal
- Remove the parking brake lever.
Installation
- Install the parking brake lever.

Page 538
2/61 Relay, Parking Light
2/62 Low Beam/Bi-Xenon Relay
2/63 High Beam Relay
2/72 Relay, Rear Window Wiper
2/79 Brake Light Relay

Page 1972
2/80 Reversing Light Relay
2/82 Relay, Heated Rear Window
2/83 Trailer Fog Light Relay
2/87 Unlocking Relay, Tailgate
2/90 Relay, Windshield Wiper, Low/High Speed

Page 2029
15/31C1
15/31C2
15/31C4
15/31C5
15/31C6
Service and Repair
Suspension Control Module: Service and Repair
Suspension module (SUM), replacing
Removal
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Move the left-hand front seat to its rearmost position.
Remove the left-hand panel from the center console (turn the clip A■1⁄4 turn). See the illustration.
Fold the floor carpet out of the way.
Removing the suspension module (SUM)

Specifications
Engine Control Module: Specifications
Component specifications
Note! For S60/V70 2004- B5254T2 AW55-50SN US market, see Component specifications,
B5244T5, B5254T2 See: .
The component specification gives the value of the component when the connector is
disconnected. Where no value is given, it is not possible to measure a relevant value at the
component. The figure within the brackets indicates the terminal pin on the component to which the
value refers.
Locations
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 555
4/71 Cooling Fan Control Module
4/76 Remote Control Unit For Garage Door Opener
4/78 Accessory Electronic Module AEM
5/1 Driver Information Module (DIM)

Page 511
Remove:
- the connectors
- the control module by inserting a screwdriver up between the bracket and the relay box. Turn the
screwdriver so that the bracket opens out. At the same time, pull the relay box out of the bracket
towards the underside of the dashboard
- the control module from the bracket and pull downwards under the dashboard.
Remove the fuses from the central electronic module (CEM).
Hint: For the location of the fuses, see:
- The wiring diagram for the relevant model year
- The decals by the relevant fuse box in the vehicle
- The Pocket Data booklet

- The Owner's manual.
Installation
Installing the central electronic module (CEM)
Caution! The pins are fragile. Check that the connectors go straight down into the control module.
Install:
- the control module on the bracket. Press the control module forward so that the catches enter the
bracket
- the connectors
- the soundproofing panel on the driver's side
- the 2 screws on top of the control module
- the 2 connectors on top of the control module.
Note! Make sure that the rubber seal is correctly positioned in the groove.
Install:
- the cover
- the wiper arm mechanism. See: Wiper mechanism, windshield, replacing See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair/Wiper Mechanism, Windshield, Replacing
- the battery negative lead. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
Temperature Sensor, Intake (Turbocharged Engines)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Temperature Sensor, Intake
(Turbocharged Engines)
Temperature Sensor, Intake (Turbocharged Engines Only, 2002-2004)
On naturally aspirated engines, the intake air temperature sensor is integrated in the mass air flow
(MAF) sensor. On model year 2002 turbocharged engines, the temperature sensor is a stand-alone
component. On turbocharged engines from model year 2003, the temperature sensor is integrated
in the intake air pressure sensor.
The temperature sensor detects the temperature of the intake air after the charge air cooler (CAC).
This data is used by the engine control module (ECM) to calculate the boost pressure control
(turbocharger (TC) and to calculate the injection period. The control module also controls certain
diagnostic functions using the signal from the temperature sensor.
(signal) from the control module.
The resistance in the sensor changes according to the temperature of the intake air. This provides
the control module with a signal of between 0 - 5 V. The lower the temperature the higher the
voltage (high resistance). A high temperature results in low voltage (low resistance).
The temperature sensor is between the air cleaner (ACL) housing and the intake manifold (does
not apply to turbocharged engines 2003-). The temperature sensor on turbocharged engines 2003-
is integrated in the intake air pressure sensor.
The Engine Control Module (ECM) can diagnose the temperature sensor. The sensor signal can be
Page 106
Attachment
Page 1750
to calculate the boost pressure control (turbocharger (TC) and to calculate the injection period. The
control module also controls certain diagnostic functions using the signal from the temperature
sensor.
(signal) from the control module.
The resistance in the sensor changes according to the temperature of the intake air. This provides
the control module with a signal of between 0 - 5 V. The lower the temperature the higher the
voltage (high resistance). A high temperature results in low voltage (low resistance).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. The
signal can be read using VADIS/VIDA.
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor is in the intake hose for the throttle body (TB).
Fuel Level Sensor, Pump Side
7/143 Fuel Level Sensor, Pump Side

Page 1122
The gear-shift position sensor is mounted on the top of the transmission housing, on the gear shift
linkage rod. The gear selector contains a Park/ Neutral position (PNP) switch and connectors which
inform the transmission control module (TCM) about which gear is selected and if the back-up gear
is selected so that the reversing lamps can be lit. The gearshift position sensor is a position switch
which is supplied via +15. A number of trailing contacts supply power to the sensor outputs. The
combination of pins A, B, C and PA indicate the current gear selector position (see the table). The
trailing contacts can either be closed or open. There are diagnostics for the gear-shift position
sensor.
Table for the gear-shift position sensor
The value indicates the position of the gear-shift position sensor (A, B, C and PA), see the table. +
= High signal (open) - =Low signal (grounded)
Gear selector module (GSM)
The gear selector assembly is in the tunnel console. It is mechanically connected to the
transmission by a cable which moves the gear valve in the transmission control system. The gear
selector module (GSM) is positioned on the top panel of the gear selector assembly. The gear
selector module (GSM) uses serial communication to communicate with the transmission control
module (TCM) to light the gear position indicator. The indication occurs via LEDs in the top panel.
Page 1620
Remove the connector. Press the brake lamp switch housing (1) forward towards the pedal box
bracket. This is to release the white locking sleeve (2). Pull the white locking sleeve towards the tip
of the brake lamp switch as far as it will go. Press in the brake lamp switch lock catch (3) from
below with a small screwdriver. Bend the switch up, pull out.
Installation
Installing the brake lamp switch

Page 69
Communications Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Checking Ground Terminal
Checking the ground terminals
Connecting the breakout box
Connect the breakout box. See Connecting the breakout box, Audio control module See: Pinout
Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box/Connecting the Breakout Box,
Audio Control Module.
Continue - Checking the ground terminal
-------------------------------------------------

Page 688
Release the relevant secondary lock by adjusting the locks with an electrician's screwdriver, as
illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 948
Checking the windshield washing
Checking components
Hint: If the read-out of the status of the wiper switch gave a correct result, the problem is not in the
Steering wheel module (SWM).
-------------------------------------------------
Other information
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the windshield wiper switch status is OK, the fault is in the windshield wiper switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information
Page 144
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 303
Other Relays
Page 1589
7/11 Outside Temperature Sensor

Page 857
- Ignition off.
- Disconnect audio/telephone switch unit by loosening the lower connector on the audio/telephone
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
result the fault is in the audio/telephone switch unit.
- To access audio/telephone switch unit, see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 282
Other Relays
Page 690
Installation
Primary lock
the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on the cable,
The secondary lock
Finishing work
Install the relays.
Note! Take care with the positioning.
Install the relevant relay box.
Splicing the Cables

Splicing the cables
Strip the wire
Peel 5.0mm / 0.2 in of the insulation off the 4 cable ends (13/64 inches) using pliers951 2620
Stripping tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2620 Stripping Tool.
Page 327
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 105
Page 477
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 1874
Install the cable in the holder for the control module. Press the connector into place. Reinstall the
control module. Press the module into place until there is an audible click. To install, reverse the
removal procedure
Ordering software

Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair
Boot lid handle/switch
Removal
Handle/switch
To remove handle/electrical contact from boot lid the decorative panel on the boot lid must be
removed. To remove decorative panel and handle/electrical contact on boot lid, see Plastic cover,
trunk lid, replacing .
Installation
Handle/switch

Locations

Page 1995
6/95 Damper Motor, Temperature, Left-Hand Side
6/96 Damper Motor, Temperature, Right-Hand Side
6/102 Damper Motor, Defroster
6/103 Damper Motor, Floor/Ventilation
6/120 Engine Throttle Body

Gearbox Input Speed Sensor, Replacing
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Gearbox Input Speed Sensor, Replacing
Gearbox input speed sensor, replacing
Removing/installing
Removal
Remove/install the control module. See: Cover control system, replacing See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Automatic Transmission Components/Cover Control System, Replacing.
Installation
Note! For tightening torques, see applicable specifications.

Page 119
Attachment
Page 1538
tank.
Note! It is extremely important that the float arm is not broken or bent.
Remove:
- the tie straps around the protective sheath, hoses and wiring
- the net protective sheath by carefully threading it off the hoses and wiring
- the tie strap under the protective sheath.

Page 1965
Location of the sensor
The rain sensor is located in front of the rear view mirror on the inner side of the windshield.
Important service note:
When replacing the windshield on a rain-sensor-equipped car it is very important that the rain
sensor is located at the exact correct distance from the windshield inner surface. It is
recommended to use an original replacement windshield with rain sensor bracket. Extreme
precision is needed when transferring the rain sensor bracket to a new windshield if an aftermarket
windshield is used.
Page 277
Fuses 11C/34-38

Brake Fluid Level Sensor
7/4 Brake Fluid Level Sensor

Page 1050
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 681
the seal is correctly positioned and that the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on
the cable.
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool.
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 585
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 830
- Ignition on.
This service provides extended assistance when fault-tracing intermittent faults. It is primarily
intended for use when the fault cannot be found using the ordinary fault-tracing for the diagnostic
trouble code (DTC).
- Read off by clicking the VCT2000 symbol
- Read off the stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the upper list box
- Select the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the upper list box to read off the information for a
specific stored DTC.
For further information, see Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information,
steering wheel module See: Reading Off Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information,
Steering Wheel Module.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault

Page 780
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation
Main Relay (System Relay)
The function of the main relay (system relay) is to supply certain components with voltage.
The relay is mechanical and has a closing function. In the rest position the circuit in the relay is
open.
The main relay terminals (#30 and #86) are supplied with voltage by the battery. When the ignition
key has been turned and the Engine Control Module (ECM) is powered, the terminal (#85) on the
main relay is grounded by the Engine Control Module (ECM).
When the terminal (#85) is grounded, the relay is activated and a number of components are
powered via the relay terminal (#87).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the main relay.
The main relay is in the relay/fuse box in the engine compartment.

Page 1104
Page 594
Fuses 11D/8-18
11D
11E
11E/1-7 Fuses, Cargo Compartment

Page 831
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - steering wheel module
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------

Selecting car model
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 214
- Remove the screws.
Use a 6 mm torx external socket
- Carefully pull the control module down so that the terminal pin on the control module comes loose
inside the ABS modulator
- Continue pulling the control module down towards the brake lines and lift it out.
Checking the new control module
Check:
- the control module is correct (compare to the old one)
- that none of the pins on the connector are damaged
hydraulic modulator
- that no parts of the old control module seals remain on the old ABS hydraulic modulator valves.
Installation
Position the control module on the brake lines. Center the control module with the ABS modulator
valves so that the terminal pins are correctly positioned in the modulator.
Page 425
Other Relays
Page 469
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 179
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair
Control module, sun roof, replacing
The illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and / or models.
Preparations
Close the sun roof. Ignition off.
Remove the key.

Note! After removing the key, wait one minute before starting work.
Removing the sun roof control module

Adjustments
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
Gear-shift position sensor, checking/adjusting
Special tools:
999 5475 GAUGE See: Tools and Equipment/999 5475 Gauge 999 7077 Jimmy bar See: Tools
and Equipment/999 7077 Jimmy Bar
Remove the air cleaner housing ACL assembly with the intake pipe.

Page 629
Always check the control module and control module box connectors to ensure that their pins and
sockets are not bent or damaged, as this can cause faults.
Check pins and terminals particularly for this fault. See "Check Terminals Visually."
Short-Circuit to Ground, Permanent Faults
Short-circuit to ground, permanent faults
A short-circuit between a live cable and ground is often indicated by the loss of a function or a fuse
blowing when a current is passed through the cable.
Repair wiring and cable terminals, using appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Check terminals visually.
- Activate all switches and sensors in the circuit. Check whether the fuse blows
- Disconnect the connectors in the circuit to ensure that they do not affect readings.
Use an ohmmeter to take a resistance reading between the cable and ground. The ohmmeter
should read infinite resistance if no components are connected.
Check pins and terminals particularly for this fault. See "Check Terminals Visually."
Short-Circuit to Supply Voltage. Permanent Faults
Short-circuit to supply voltage. Permanent faults
A short-circuit between a cable and supply voltage is often indicated by the loss of a function or a
fuse blowing when voltage is passed through the cable.
- Use a voltmeter to take readings at various points in the circuit while operating switches and
sensors.
Voltmeter readings will depend on which circuit is tested and the status of switches and sensors,
Use the wiring diagram to determine the correct voltage in the circuit. Use an ohmmeter between
the suspect cables to detect short-circuits between them. The ohmmeter should read infinite
resistance between cables not connected to each other in the circuit. Check pins and terminals
particularly for this fault. See "Check Terminals Visually."
Inspect Terminals Visually

Page 340
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 559
6/33 Fuel Pump
6/37 Lock Motor, Fuel Filler Flap
6/38 - 39 LH and RH Headlight Level Adjustment Motor
6/44 Cooling Fan, Electrics Box, Engine Compartment
6/48 Damper Motor, Recirculation

Page 1444
Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair
Oil level sensor, replacing
correct.
Removing the oil level sensor
Warning! Hot oil can scald. Avoid skin contact with engine oil, particularly if the engine oil is dirty.
Immediately wash hands and any skin that has been in contact with oil. Use a suitable cleaning
agent and warm water. Wear protective gloves when working with engine oil.
Remove the splash guard under the engine. Only applies to cars with automatic transmissions.
Position the container under the engine oil trough. Remove the oil plug. Drain the engine oil. It is
easier to drain the oil if the engine is at operating temperature.
Remove:
- the screws for the sensor. Disconnect the connector for the sensor
- the sensor.
Installing the oil level sensor
Note! For tightening torques, see Tightening torque See: Engine, Cooling and
Install:
- the sensor
- screws for the sensor. Tighten. Connect the connector to the sensor
- the oil plug.
Finishing
Fill with engine oil. Run the engine to operating temperature. Check for any oil leakage.
Page 981
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read and Reset Button on the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the read and reset button on the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Activate the read and reset button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the read and reset button status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the reset button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Page 28
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 1089
CSC
DTC
Note!
NOTE!

JOURNAL 16761 DATED 07-01-2010. New AW TF8OSC software has been added for a stalling
condition. PLEASE UPDATE YOUR FILES.
DESCRIPTION:
The TCM Upgrades in the attached document are available to correct the complaints / symptoms
SERVICE:
If the vehicle fits in the model year or chassis range for the symptom in the attachment download a
TCM Upgrade.
Page 2028
Fuses 11E/1-7
15/30 Connecting Rail to 15/31
15/31 Engine Compartment Distribution Box
15/31A1
Page 995
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Steering Wheel Buttons For RTI (Road Traffic Information)
Locations
Horn Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1437
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
Replacing cruise control lever/turn signal indicator switch
Removal
Position the steering wheel straight ahead. Key out. Pull out steering wheel as far as possible and
lower steering column. Undo clips on panel (1).
Remove:
- upper steering wheel cover (2), by disconnecting it at the steering wheel, lifting it and pulling it
outwards.
- screws (3).
- lower steering wheel cover.
- cruise control/turn signal indicator switch and disconnect connector.
Installation
Page 1563
If the fuel tank is replaced, see next step.
position
Cable routing when replacing the fuel tank
If replacing the fuel tank, wire cannot be used. The image shows how to route the fuel lines and
electrical wiring in the tank. Use a plastic pipe at least 1.7 m long.
Hint: Use spare part plastic pipe between the carbon filter and EVAP valve.
Insert the hose through the hole for the level sensor on the left-hand side of the vehicle and press it
through the tank and take the end of the hose through the hole for the fuel pump.
Page 1078
Remove the 2x M8 screws. Disconnect the 2x connectors. Remove the control module and the
bracket.
Installation

Installing the suspension module (SUM)
Connect the 2x connectors. Install the 2x screws. (M8). Tighten.
Finishing work
Fold the carpet back into position. Install the panel for the center console. The Suspension Module
(SUM) must be programmed after replacement.
Ordering software
Finishing
Note! After replacing the Suspension Module (SUM), the position sensors and the resistance of the
shock absorbers must be calibrated.
Read off and erase any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored during the replacement. Test the
function.
Page 805

Page 593
Fuses 11D/1-7
Service and Repair
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Control module heater pad, replacing
Removing the heater pad control module
Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Remove one screw. Disconnect the
connector. Remove the control module.
Installing the heater pad control module
Install:
- the connector
- one screw
- the seat. See Removing power seats, tilting See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Page 515
The illustration shows the driver door module (DDM).
- Remove the control module, see instruction Removing the control module.
- Disconnect the catches. Lift the upper panel from the control module.
Installing the upper panel
In reverse order.
Page 826
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Description and Operation Design
Design
Steering wheel buttons
The steering wheel buttons control functions and menu selection for:
- Traffic information (option)
- Audio (option)
- Carphone (option)
- Cruise control (option).
The signals from the steering wheel buttons are transmitted via serial communication. The steering
wheel buttons are connected in series to the steering wheel module (SWM) via contact reel in the
steering wheel hub. The steering wheel buttons are connected in the following order, counted from
the contact reel:
1. Cruise control 2. Audio /carphone 3. Traffic information.
There are diagnostics for the steering wheel buttons.

Page 864
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 898
Did read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch give a correct result?
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the windscreen-wiper switch
- To replace windscreen-wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
Continue - Checking the components
-------------------------------------------------
Hint: If read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch gave a correct result the fault was in the
windscreen-wiper switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1515
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Level Sensor, Fuel Tank/Fuel Pump, Replacement
Level sensor, fuel tank/fuel pump, replacement
Removal
correct.
Drain:
- the fuel system. See Draining the fuel system See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
- the fuel tank. See Draining the fuel tank See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Remove:
- the two connectors from the underneath of the left-hand level sensor
- the left-hand level sensor from the ejector on which it is positioned.
Note! Secure a wire in the area of the ejector.The wire must be sufficiently long that it reaches over
to the opposite side of the tank with some excess remaining to ensure that it does not slide into the
tank. The wire is needed to pull the hoses and wiring back to the left-hand side of the tank after the
fuel tank unit has been replaced.
Removing the right-hand level sensor / pump

Page 1778
Remove the screws from the bracket for the gear selector cables.
Detach the cable from the lever. Use special tool 999 7077 Jimmy bar See: Tools and
Equipment/999 7077 Jimmy Bar. Remove the cable from the bracket. Move the cable to one side.
Checking the setting

Page 1166
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1931
Press in the catch on the underside of the socket. Slide out the red catch slightly.
Remove the splash guard under the engine
Drain the transmission oil. Reinstall the oil plug again. Use a new gasket. Tighten to 40 Nm.
Remove the oil temperature sensor

Page 683
illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Primary lock
the cable.
Secondary lock
Connector Fuse Holder, Repair
Connector fuse holder, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Preparatory work
Expose the relevant fusebox. Remove the fuses. Note the positions of the fuses.
Dismantling
Secondary lock
Releases the catches for the secondary lock. Slide the secondary lock to one side to access the
primary lock, as illustrated.
Navigation System - SW Upgrade Disc Guide
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - SW Upgrade Disc Guide
Title New SW upgrade disc for RTI: Quick guide (MMM MMV+, MMM2)
Ref.No US6514.1.11 en-GB
Issuer -
Partner 3 US7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group 3960
Func Desc accessories
Status Released
Reference VIDA fault tracing information
Attachment
@TJ16514110121-001b
Vehicle Type
@TJ16514110121-001c
CSC
DTC
Text
CSC = Customer symptom code RTI = Road and Traffic In formation MMM = Multi media Module
Note!
If using a printed copy of this document, always check for the latest online version.
NOTE!
THIS DOCUMENT SUPERSEDES THE PREVIOUS RETAILER TECHNICAL JOURNAL 16514,

DATED 06-30-2010. PLEASE UPDATE YOUR FILES.
Changes to this document are:

^ Jan 2011: Note added In regards to SW application disc included in service disc kit 31310029
does not contain the latest SW version
^ June: 2010 New SW upgrade discs for MMM2 (version10w22) and MMM+ (version 10w22)
^ January 2010 New SW upgrade disc for MMM2 (version 0948) New information is in red italics.
This service disc contains an update to prevent a check sum error which, if it occurs, will
permanently disable the MMM. This condition is rare. Once it occurs it cannot be corrected by
loading the service upgrade.
^ July 2009: New SW upgrade disc for MMM2 (version 0920) Updated Contains 3D map feature
and SW optimization for repeated Traffic message audio warning "traffic restrictions may apply,
please respect the local traffic regulation"
Page 1164
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1707
Installation

Page 641
Connector Control module for anti-lock brakes (ABS). See Connector control module for Anti-lock
Brake System Module (ABS), repair See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Control Module for
Anti-lock Brake System Module (ABS), Repair.
Page 687
correct.
Preparatory work
Expose the relevant relay box. Remove the relevant relays, noting their position.
Dismantling
Secondary lock
Page 1617
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 648
Tool and951 2631 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2631 Terminal Removal
Page 673
Tool
remove the primary lock, as illustrated.
Page 1910
Install the air cleaner (ACL) housing with connections.

Locations

Page 302

Service and Repair
Refrigerant Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Temperature sensor, compressor, replacing
Removal
- Separate the switches
- Remove the sensor.
Installation
- Install in reverse order.

Page 1979
3/62 Hood Alarm Contact
3/71 Gear Position Contacts
3/73 Power Child Lock (PCL) Switch
3/74 - 77 Left-Hand and Right-Hand Front Door Lock Unit
3/78 Tailgate Lock Unit

Page 722
- Ignition off. Wait for 2 minutes
- Remove the cover over the control module box. Put the cover to one side Note! Do not touch the
control module terminal pins with your fingers. Static electricity may damage components in the
control module.
- Insert tool 999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench around the control
module.
- Move the upper section of the tool backwards as far as it will go. Pull up the tool
- Carefully pull up the control module.

Installing the engine control module (ECM)
Locations

Page 365
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 909
- Ignition off
- the control module disconnected.

For the control module, connect an ohmmeter between terminal #16 on the breakout box and the
battery negative terminal.
Page 1925
Install the air cleaner (ACL) housing, including all hoses and electrical terminals.

Page 756
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1943
Differential Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Temperature / Pressure Sensor Active
On Demand Coupling (AOC), Replacing
Temperature / pressure sensor active on demand coupling (AOC), replacing
Removal
Preparatory work
Ignition off Wait 3-4 minutes after switching the ignition off to reduce oil leakage at removal.
Removing the Differential electronic module (DEM)
Caution! Clean the area around the control module thoroughly before beginning removal.
Place a container under the active on demand coupling (AOC). Disconnect the connectors to the
Remove:
- the 2 x screws for the control module
- the control module together with the seal plate and the cupped washer.
Removing the components from the Active on Demand Coupling (AOC)
Remove the throttle valve and temperature/pressure sensor from the coupling. A = Throttle valve.
B = Temperature / pressure sensor. To remove, use large pliers. Grasp the end of the throttle
valve, hold the pliers steady and pull the valve straight out.
Caution! Make sure that no damage is caused when removing the throttle valve. The valve cannot
be replaced separately. The throttle valve is removed in order to be installed in the control module.
This is done to minimize the risk of damage occurring to the contacts when installing.
Remove:
Page 1332
This check assumes that other faults that were diagnosed in the system have been rectified. Switch
off the ignition. Disconnect one connector from one of the sensors. Take out a new sensor. Install
the connector on the new sensor.
Page 713
- fuel trim
- throttle angle
- etc.
A function is limited so that the system still functions, to protect components or for safety reasons
(for example the throttle angle).
Any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are stored in the control module memory. The data can be
read off using VADIS/VIDA.
Signals The table below summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the Engine
Control Module (ECM). The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial
communication and controller area network (CAN) communication. The illustration below displays
the same information with the Volvo component designations.
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Fuel Temperature Sensor (Only Vehicles With Demand Controlled Fuel
Pumps)
The fuel pressure sensor is combined and consisted of both the fuel pressure sensor and the fuel
temperature sensor. The sensor detects the fuel pressure (the absolute pressure) and the
temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail.
Fuel pressure sensor The pressure sensor is a Piezo resistive type resistor, the resistance of which
changes with the pressure. Depending on the pressure in the fuel rail, an analog signal of 0 - 5 V is
transmitted. Low pressure results in low voltage, high pressure in high voltage.
The engine control module (ECM) then uses this signal to adjust the pressure in the fuel rail using
the fuel pump control module. Also see Function.
The pressure sensor is supplied with 5 V and grounded in the engine control module (ECM). The
pressure sensor transmits a signal indicating the fuel pressure to the engine control module (ECM)
on a separate cable.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the fuel pressure sensor. Its signals (pressure and
temperature can be read using VADIS/VIDA.
NOTE: The absolute pressure is displayed when using VADIS/VIDA parameter read outs to read
off the fuel pressure. If there is no pressure at the fuel rail, the atmospheric pressure will be
displayed.
HINT: The relative pressure (absolute pressure minus atmospheric pressure) is displayed when
reading off the fuel pressure via a manometer connected to the fuel rail.
Fuel temperature sensor The temperature sensor is an NTC sensor. The sensor is supplied with
voltage (signal) from and grounded in the engine control module (ECM).
The resistance in the sensor changes according to the temperature of the fuel. This provides the
engine control module (ECM) with a signal of between 0 - 5 V. Low temperature results in high
voltage (high resistance). High temperature results in low voltage (low resistance).
The engine control module (ECM) uses the signal to calculate the volume of the fuel.
The fuel pressure sensor is on the left-hand end of the fuel rail.
Page 572
7/172 Position sensor, Camshaft, Intake Side
8/3 Electromagnetic Clutch, Climate Control System
8/6-11 Injectors
8/17 EGR Valve

Page 651
Pull the secondary lock out to the side. Use an electrician's screwdriver, as illustrated.
Tool to remove the cable terminal lock, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully
backwards.
Page 543
3/1 Ignition Switch
3/6 Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
3/9 Brake Light Contact

Page 1172

Page 961
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Audio/Telephone Switch Unit
Checking the audio/telephone switch unit
- Ignition on.
result the fault is not in the SWM unit.
Page 628
NOTE: Do not fill the protective cover with grease.
- Press grease, P/N 1161417-9, into the female sockets directly from tube
- Check that all the terminal cavities are filled
- Use a loose male pin to ensure that the connection in the sockets is good. The pin should remain
in position when pulled gently.
Open-Circuit, Permanent Faults
Open-circuit, permanent faults
An open-circuit in a cable is indicated by a loss of one or more functions. Chafed and broken
cables or terminals that have come loose are common causes of faults in electrical systems.
- Disconnect the connectors at both ends of the cable.
Connect an ohmmeter between the ends of the cable. The ohmmeter should read approximately 0
[ohm] if there is no open-circuit in the cable
If the reading is not correct. Replace the cable and/or continue, according to "Contact Resistance
and Oxidation"
Page 604
20/3-8 Spark Plug and Ignition Coil
20/16 Capacitor
20/27 Shunt, Low Beam CEM
20/29 Shunt, Fog Light REM

Page 13
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1130
Control Module: Description and Operation Downloading Software and Replacing the Control
Module
New software can be downloaded into the transmission control module (TCM). When ordering
software, the hardware and the software in the car is compared to the data in the Volvo central
database. If the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the control module. If the
comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the database is updated with
the car configuration. When this is complete the software is downloaded. For further information
regarding downloading, see Design and Function, Downloading Software.
Page 143
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1689
- Fill up coolant.
- Check for leaks.
Page 1333
Switch on the ignition. Check whether the symbol on the dashboard lights or not. If the symbol
does not light the fault was in the old sensor. Test with the other sensor if the symbol lights.
Note! Reconnect the connector to the sensor after each test (the connectors should not be mixed
up.)
Replacing the pressure sensor. See Preparations before replacing the pressure sensor
Preparations before replacing the pressure sensor
Apply the brake pedal lightly using a pedal jack. Position paper under the master cylinder (to collect
any brake fluid spillage). Disconnect the connector from the pressure sensor.
Replacing the pressure sensor

Page 798
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1185
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 229
The control unit has built-in diagnostics, Volvo Diagnostics, which continually monitor the unit and
the input and output signals.
Diagnostic trouble codes If the control unit detects a fault, it stores a diagnostic trouble code. If, for
any reason, a fault disappears after the diagnostic trouble code has been permanently stored in the
control unit, information about the trouble code still remains in the control unit.
Reading and erasing diagnostic trouble codes Stored diagnostic trouble codes can be read from
the control unit using this facility.
Diagnostic trouble codes may be erased but only after they have been read at least once.
Reading input and output signals Status of control unit input and output signals can be continually
read using this facility.
Reading the control unit identity VADIS/VIDA identifies control units by reading the number of
codes from the control unit memory. The codes contain information on the control unit as follows:
- hardware component number (control units without software)
- software component number (control units without software)

- software component number
- diagnostic software component number.
Software Downloading New software can be downloaded into the control module for the Steering
wheel angle sensor. When ordering software, the hardware and the software in the car is
compared to the Volvo central database. If the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the
control module. If the comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the
database is updated with the car configuration. When this is complete the software is downloaded.
Page 954
Checking SWM control unit
Before continuing with trouble-shooting it is important to take note of the following:
- All tests for the current system should have been done.
- No faults should be found in the components, connectors or wires etc.
Have all the tests been done without finding any faults?
Yes - Replacing the component
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1633
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1594
Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Outside Temperature Sensor
Outside temperature sensor
Operation number: 38414-2
Remove the following items:
- door mirror's electric motor. Refer to: Motor, external mirror
- mirror cover. Refer to: Cover, external mirror .

Page 873
-------------------------------------------------
Activate reset button on indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read and reset button gave a correct result the fault is not in the
indicator switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Page 987
Fault symptom[s]
- RTI switch unit does not work.
Checking the RTI Switch

Checking the RTI switch
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
- To access the RTI switch, see the relevant service procedure.

Page 25
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 983
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read Button on the Indicator Switch
Checking the read button on the indicator switch
Activate read button on indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read button gave a correct result the fault is not in the SWM.
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing.

-------------------------------------------------
Hint: If read-out of status on read button gave a correct result the fault was in the indicator switch.
Navigation System - SW Upgrade Disc Guide
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - SW Upgrade Disc Guide
Title New SW upgrade disc for RTI: Quick guide (MMM MMV+, MMM2)
Ref.No US6514.1.11 en-GB
Issuer -
Partner 3 US7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group 3960
Func Desc accessories
Status Released
Reference VIDA fault tracing information
Attachment
@TJ16514110121-001b
Vehicle Type
@TJ16514110121-001c
CSC
DTC
Text
CSC = Customer symptom code RTI = Road and Traffic In formation MMM = Multi media Module
Note!
If using a printed copy of this document, always check for the latest online version.
NOTE!
THIS DOCUMENT SUPERSEDES THE PREVIOUS RETAILER TECHNICAL JOURNAL 16514,

DATED 06-30-2010. PLEASE UPDATE YOUR FILES.
Changes to this document are:

^ Jan 2011: Note added In regards to SW application disc included in service disc kit 31310029
does not contain the latest SW version
^ June: 2010 New SW upgrade discs for MMM2 (version10w22) and MMM+ (version 10w22)
^ January 2010 New SW upgrade disc for MMM2 (version 0948) New information is in red italics.
This service disc contains an update to prevent a check sum error which, if it occurs, will
permanently disable the MMM. This condition is rare. Once it occurs it cannot be corrected by
loading the service upgrade.
^ July 2009: New SW upgrade disc for MMM2 (version 0920) Updated Contains 3D map feature
and SW optimization for repeated Traffic message audio warning "traffic restrictions may apply,
please respect the local traffic regulation"
Page 374

Page 1634
------------------------

Diagnostic outlet

on either the low or high-speed
Page 382
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 824
The table below summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the steering wheel
module (SWM). The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial communication
and Controller area network (CAN) communication. The following illustration displays the same
information with the Volvo component designations.
Page 1090
Page 1553
Thoroughly clean and dry the O-ring mating surfaces. Install a new O-ring. Use petroleum jelly to
lubricate the screw mating surface with the fuel tank unit. This is so that the screw does not turn the
fuel tank unit when it is tightened. Press down the right fuel sensor and pump so that the fuel line is
pointing forward and to the right. Ensure that the arrow on the cover is between the markings on
the tank. Check that the O-ring does not deform. Tighten the screw. Tighten to 60 Nm.
against the inner wall of the tank. If not: Slacken off the screw and adjust the position of the fuel
tank unit. Tighten as above.
Page 723
- Check that no pins or sockets are damaged on the connector.
- Carefully press the control module down into the grooves on the inside of the control module box.
Press to the limit position
- Insert tool 999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench around the control
module.
- Move the upper section of the tool forwards as far as it will go. Pull up the tool
- Press the cover into place over the control modules
- Check that the air ducts are correctly positioned.
Ordering software
Note! After downloading the software or replacing the engine control module (ECM), the throttle
unit must be adapted according to vehicle communication input: "Adapting the throttle unit".
Finishing
Check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the repair. Test drive the car.
Check the function of the engine.
Page 2051
List of Components By Component Number
1/1 Through 3/174

Page 2005
8/3 Electromagnetic Clutch, Climate Control System
8/6-11 Injectors
8/17 EGR Valve

Page 583
10/126 Right-Hand Front Courtesy Lighting
10/129-130 Front Left and Right Parking Light
10/148 Left Hand Door Mirror Lighting
10/149 Right-Hand Door Mirror Lighting
10/150 Rear Reading Light
11A/no. Main Fuses In Engine Compartment

Page 1165
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 266
- Release the catches. Pull off the panel
- The panel has double sided adhesive tape. Ensure that any remains of the tape are removed
from the black panel.
- Remove the backing from the tape on the panel and press the panel into place.
Finishing After replacing the control module, the following must be carried out.
- Reprogram the customer programmed data
- Carry out self-adjustment of the damper motor end positions
- Test drive the car. Check that the function of the climate control system is OK
- Then check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the replacement.
Information about programming the control module, damper motor self-adjustment and reading off
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can be found under VADIS/VIDA communication.
Dashboard environment panel switches

Page 964
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor checks the temperature of the engine coolant. The
temperature of the engine coolant is required so that the engine control module (ECM) can
regulate:
- the idle speed
- the engine cooling fan (FC)
- the ignition advance
- engagement and disengagement of the A/C compressor
- diagnostic functions.
The resistance in the sensor changes depending on the temperature of the coolant. Depending on
the resistance in the sensor, a voltage (signal) is transmitted to the Engine Control Module (ECM).
At 0 degree C, the voltage is approximately 4.0 V. At 100 degree C the voltage is approximately 0.5
V. Low temperature results in high voltage (high resistance), high temperature in low voltage (low
resistance).
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is located beside the thermostat.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. The
Page 941
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
communicated with. If communication is not possible
Page 646
Tool or951 2639 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2639 Terminal Removal
Note! Wheel sensor cables are twisted pair (positive and negative signal) cables for each wheel. It
is important that paired cables are twinned in the same way when they are reinstalled in the
connector. The cables must be twisted approximately 3 times per 100 mm.
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Control Module for Anti-lock Brake System Module (ABS), Repair
Connector control module for Anti-lock Brake System Module (ABS), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Spin Control Switch
3/95 Spin Control Switch

Page 396
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 323
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 271
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 840
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Windshield Washing

Page 739
Other Relays
Page 1180
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 1157
TJ Instruction
Page 132
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1501
Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Checking the Fuel Level Sensor
Checking the fuel level sensor
Checking wiring and connectors
Check the wiring between:
connector terminal #5 for the fuel level sensors and rear electronic module (REM) terminal #A02
(#A2) connector terminal #6 for the fuel level sensors and rear electronic module (REM) terminal
#A10 (#A10) connector terminal #7 for the fuel level sensors and rear electronic module (REM)
terminal #A8 (#A8) check for an open-circuit. Check for a short-circuit to supply voltage. Check the
relevant connectors. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- For further information about signals and other values, see Signal specification See: Body and
- To connect the breakout box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Body and Frame/Body
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the
Breakout Box
- To access the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment, see Relay/fuse box cargo
compartment/Rear electronic module (REM), replacing See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit
Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Integrated Relay/Fusebox Cargo Compartment/Rear
Electronic Module (REM), Replacing
- To access the fuel level sensor connector (left-hand side), see Level sensor fuel tank, replacing
See: Service and Repair
- To access the fuel level sensor connector (right-hand side), see Level sensor, fuel tank,
right-hand/fuel tank, replacing See: Service and Repair/Level Sensor, Fuel Tank/Fuel Pump,
Replacement
Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring And Terminals.
Page 564

Page 1118
The table summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the transmission control module
(TCM). The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial communication and
Controller area network (CAN) communication. The following illustration displays the same
information with the Volvo component designations.
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Replacing The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Remove:
- the sensor from the thermostat housing. Use socket 951 2885.
NOTE: Put paper underneath the sensor to prevent coolant spillage.
Install:
- Tighten to 22 Nm, use socket 951 2885

Page 471
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 322
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1048
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Recalls Recall 07V226000: Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement
1-800-458-1552.
Page 647
Slide the catch in the direction of the arrow, as illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 1989
6/1 Windshield Wiper Motor
6/2 Windshield Washer Pump
6/3 - 4 Right-Hand and Left-Hand Headlight Wiper Motor
6/15 Sunroof Motor
6/16 Driver Seat Motor, Backrest Angle

Page 1024
The value indicates the voltage at the steering wheel module.
Distance, value
Measurement range: 0-1048575 km The value indicates the total mileage of the car at the time the
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Measurement range: -60 to +195 °C The value indicates the passenger compartment temperature
at the time the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Measurement range: -128 to +127.75 °C The value indicates the outside temperature at the time
the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Engine running, status
The status displays whether the engine was running when the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was
stored. Yes = the engine was running No = the engine was not running
Time, value
The value displays the time that has passed since the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Reading Off Detailed Diagnostic Data
Reading off detailed diagnostic data
General information about reading off

Page 1539
Remove:
Installation
Only applies to vehicles with parking heaters

Page 929
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
the vehicle or in VIDA/VCT/cable harness. If the
Page 480
Other Relays
Page 1027
2. V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90. 3. V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70. 4.
S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 2055

Page 1530
Installation
Fuel gauge sensor
- Position level sensor correctly
- Install a new rubber seal
- Connect the 2 connectors to the level sensor
- Press tube system onto level sensor
- Carefully position level sensor down with tube system and wires
- Install level sensor attaching ring but do not tighten it
- Press level sensor into position. Note position marks on cover and tank
- Tighten lock ring, first by hand and then using special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and
Equipment/999 5720 Wrench
- Install wire in rubber seal slots
- Install level sensor cover
- The rest of the section is done in reverse order.
To replace fuel gauge sensor on right side, see Right side fuel pump with level sensor See: Right
Side Fuel Pump With Level Sensor.
Level Sensor, Fuel Tank Left, Replacing
Level sensor fuel tank left, replacing
Special tools:
Preparatory work
Disconnect the battery negative lead. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Warning! Explosion risk.Use a fresh air mask.
Draining fuel tank
Note! Before draining the fuel, see: Safety regulations for handling fuel See: Powertrain
Fuel.
Insert the heavy duty hose 1.3 meters into the fuel filler pipe, measured from the edge of the
opening of the filler pipe. Pump until air comes out. V70: Fold up both sides of the rear seat.
Remove the rear seat. S80, S60: Remove the seat cushion for the rear seat.
Removal
Removing the insulation panel

Page 1533
Remove:
- the ejector
- the connectors.
Installation
Installing the left-hand level sensor
Page 1784
Install the air cleaner (ACL) housing with connections.

Page 973
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1249
- Remove the two clips on the underneath of the bumper cover
- Remove the clip for the washer hose if applicable
- Unhook the rear section from the bumper cover
- Remove the foam from the bumper cover.
Passenger compartment preparations
Note! Illustrations show a left-hand drive car. Carry out the operation on the left-hand side on
right-hand drive cars.
- Remove the sill (1) and right-hand centre console panel (2).
- Detach the floor carpet at the front passenger seat. Push the carpet to one side so that the hole to
the engine compartment is visible.
Page 877
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 448

Page 278
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1909
Adjusting the gear-shift position sensor
Adjust the gear-shift position sensor according to adjustments.
Installing the lever and the gear-shift position sensor
Install:
- the lever for the gear shift linkage rod. Tighten the nut. Tighten to 16 Nm
- the gear selector cable on the lever and transmission. Tighten to 25 Nm
- the connector for the gear-shift position sensor on the mounting. Connect the connector.
Assemble the cable harness with tie straps. Press the mounting for the cable harness into place in
the cover for the control system. Install the mounting for the connectors on the bracket.

Page 1842
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing knock sensors (KS)
Removing the knock sensor (KS)
Remove
- the cable from the battery negative terminal. First read Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
- the intake pipe between the front cover plate and the air cleaner (ACL)
Detach the pipe from the charge air cooler at the throttle housing. Push the pipe to one side
- the dip stick and its holder
- the screws for the knock sensors (KS)
- the tie strap at the connector.

Disconnect the connector. Pull the sensors downwards and past the rear edge of the starter motor
bracket.
Installing knock sensors (KS)
Install the new sensor. Tighten by hand. Route the cables on the outside of the starter motor
bracket. Align the sensors. The cable from the sensor for cylinder 2 = 3 o'clock and from the sensor
for cylinder 4 = 6 o'clock. Tighten the knock sensors (KS) to 20 Nm. Connect the knock sensor
(KS) connectors. Check that the wiring is in the correct position. Secure with a tie strap at the
starter motor bracket.
Install
- the dip stick
- the negative battery cable. First read Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Page 568

Page 906
The ohmmeter should read approximately 0 ohms.
OK - Fault Found
Not OK - Contact Resistance And Oxidation
-------------------------------------------------
Checking for open-circuits, contact resistance and oxidation For the control module,check ground
terminal 31/84 and the wiring connected to it. Check for an open-circuit. Check for contact
resistance and oxidation.
Other information:
- Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
Permanent Fault.
Page 331

Page 661
Secondary lock
Fold up the secondary lock. If necessary use an electrician's screwdriver.
Primary lock
Page 483
Release the 3 clips.
Remove:
- intermediate section
- the engine cooling fan (FC) if applicable
- the 2 screws for the connector holder at the front edge. Disconnect the retaining clips for the
connector holder using a screwdriver. Pull up the contact holder and the rubber grommet
- the screw at the rear edge of the bottom piece
- the tie straps for the cables
- the bottom section by pulling it backwards until the hook releases.
Removing the connector

Page 298
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1276
- Press in the catch (2). At the same time pull the dummy button from its socket.
Note! Keep the dummy button. The dummy button will be reused.
- Remove the old horn. The horn will not be reused.

Installation
- Take the new horn from the kit
- Insert the new left dummy button in its socket
- Press the dummy button until the catch engages
- Install the screw. Tighten the dummy button
- Connect the connector to the dummy button.
- Take the remote control keypad (from the kit) and insert it in its socket
- Press the keypad until the catch engages
- Install the screw. Tighten the keypad
- Connect the connector to the keypad.
- Reinstall the horn, according to Steering wheel mounted remote control for the radio See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module/Service
and Repair/Steering Wheel Mounted Remote Control for the Radio. Ensure that the three springs
are correctly positioned. Check that the ground lead is not trapped
- Tighten the screws crosswise. Tighten to 6.5 Nm (5 ft.lb)
- Reinstall the ground lead. Tighten the ground lead
- Connect the connector for the horn and the keypads
- Check the function of the horn. Press the horn all the way round its circumference.
Page 267
- Remove the switches.

Page 1150
TJ Instruction
Locations
Power Distribution Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1049
VIDA
Other information
Page 215
Press the control module up so that the terminal pins connect.
Install:
- the screws.
Tighten to 1.8 Nm
- the connector on the control module. Lock the connector
- the integrated relay/fusebox and the connector for the ABS unit. See Brake pipe master cylinder /
ABS unit, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service
and Repair/Brake Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing
- the integrated relay / fusebox.
Tighten the screw. Tighten to 10 Nm
Installing the battery lead
Install the battery cable. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
Loading software
Note! Switch on the ignition.
Visual check
Turn on the ignition. Wait five seconds and until the symbol for the brakes on the dashboard has
gone out. In the event of a fault (the symbol is lit). Check that the connector is connected.
Page 462

Page 1297

System Overview
Control Module: Description and Operation System Overview
System overview General
AW55-50 (and AW50AWD) is a 5-speed electronically controlled automatic transmission with a

lock-up function for the three highest gears. The transmission control module (TCM) adapts the
gear changes to ensure that the correct gear is selected for the driving mode, engine load, driver
requirements, speed etc. This gives good fuel economy combined with increased comfort by
ensuring smoother gear changes and lower noise levels. The transmission control module (TCM)
receives information about the desired gear position and driving mode from the driver. In
conjunction with the signals from a number of sensors in the transmission and the engine control
system, unlike with a purely hydraulically controlled transmission, this allows the control module to
calculate the optimal shifting points and engagement of lock-up. The control module allows for
small changes in the operating conditions and adapts the various transmission functions to ensure
that the correct gear is always selected in relation to the driving mode selected by the driver. This
adaptability guarantees smooth and consistent gear shift quality throughout the operational life of
the transmission. In order to precisely determine the gear shift and lock-up engagement points
based on the driving mode selected, the control module receives and processes information about
the following: -
Selected gear position - from the gear-shift position sensor

- Selected driving mode economy/sport reactive function programmed in the control module which
is controlled by the speed at which the accelerator pedal (AP) is depressed. Quick "pedal
movement" = sport mode. Winter (W) mode is activated using a switch on the gear selector
assembly
- Vehicle speed - from the brake control system via the Controller area network (CAN)
- Transmission input shaft rpm - from the transmission speed sensor
- The transmission output shaft rpm - from the transmission output speed sensor
- The engine speed (RPM) and torque and throttle opening - from the engine management system
via the Controller area network (CAN)
- If the brake pedal is depressed and to what extent - from the brake control system via the
Controller area network (CAN)
- If the accelerator pedal (AP) is depressed and to what extent - from the engine management
system via the Controller area network (CAN)
- Transmission fluid temperature - from the temperature sensor in the transmission
- Engine coolant temperature - from the engine control module (ECM) via the Control area network
(CAN).
Components
Page 185
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 328
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1942
Carefully check that the sealing surface on the control module and valve seats in the Active on
Demand Coupling is clean. Ensure that there is no trace of cloth or paper. Lubricate the new O-ring
with oil, P/N 116 1641-4 (0.3 liters). Press the O-ring into place in its seat.
Installing the control module for the Active on Demand Coupling
Install the control module and the valves for the coupling. Press the control module against the
coupling housing while loosely installing the screws alternately. Tighten. See the relevant
specifications. Connect the connectors to the control module and the oil pump. Fill the Active on
Demand Coupling with oil. Check the oil level. See Final drive, replacing, M58, M66 AWD,
AW50/51 AWD See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Final
Drive, Replacing. Erase any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
Page 1020
- Checking wiring and terminals. Intermittent faults See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
Intermittent Faults.
Select Continue
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1958
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Window Control Switch Button
Window Control Switch Button
Operation number: 36074
Removal
Remove control module PDM/DDM Refer to: Driver's door module / passenger door module
(DDM/PDM), replacing See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service
and Repair/Driver's Door Module / Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM), Replacing
Use: Silicone grease- PTFE, 1161 687
Installation
Page 84
Communications Control Module: Programming and Relearning
New software can be downloaded into the audio module (AUM). New software must be
downloaded when replacing the audio module (AUM). Unlike other control modules, there is no
software available for reloading the audio module (AUM). Only software for the addition of
applications is available. When ordering software, the hardware and the software in the car is
compared to the Volvo central database. If the comparison is OK the software is downloaded into
the audio module (AUM). If the comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK,
the database is updated with the car configuration. When this is complete the software is
downloaded. For further information regarding downloading, see Design and Function,
Downloading Software.
Page 36
Other Relays
Page 891
Checking the steering wheel module (SWM)
Before continuing with fault-tracing, the following must be checked:
- All tests for the relevant symptom must have been carried out
- No component, connector or wiring faults etc. should have been detected.
Have all tests been carried out and no faults detected?
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1217

Page 1168
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1479
- Remove the climate control unit. See Climate control unit, replacing, L.H.D, R.H.D See: Heating
and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair
- Pull off the temperature sensor
- Disconnect the connector from the sensor
- work the sensor loose.
Installation
In reverse order.
Page 1705
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump (FP) And Filter
Level sensor, fuel tank, right-hand/fuel tank, replacing
Removal
correct.
Drain:
- the fuel system. See Draining the fuel system
- the fuel tank. See Draining the fuel tank.

NOTE: Secure a wire in the area of the ejector.
The wire must be sufficiently long that it reaches over to the opposite side of the tank with some
excess remaining to ensure that it does not slide into the tank. The wire is needed to pull the hoses
and wiring back to the left-hand side of the tank after the fuel tank unit has been replaced.
Removing the right-hand level sensor/pump

Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
1/1 Battery
2/16 Relay, Intermittent Rear Window Wiping On/Off
2/17 Horn Relay
2/22 Relay, Climate Control System
2/23 Fuel Pump Relay

Page 1513
Install the left-hand level sensor on the ejector. Install the connectors on the underside of the
left-hand level sensor. Install a new O-ring. Lubricate the new O-ring. Use petroleum jelly. Press
the left level sensor down so that the row of protruding cables runs along the vehicle. Check that
the O-ring is not trapped. Install the screw. Use 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999
5720 Wrench. Tighten. See: Tightening torque See: Specifications/Mechanical
Specifications/Starting and Charging. Position the wiring in the cut-out in the rubber ring. Wipe up
any fuel spillage.
Locations
7/123 Clutch Pedal Sensor

Page 625
ISR = Israel
J = Japan
KOR = Korea
N = Norway
NL = Netherlands
S = Sweden
USA = United States of America
WEU = Western Europe
Other
ACC = Accessory
AMP = Amplifier
AUDIO = Audio system
AUTO = Automatic transmission
Bi-X = Bi-Xenon
CEM = Central Electronic Module
DRL = Daytime Running Lights
DSTC = Dynamic Stability Traction Control
EXC = Exclusive
EXT.D = Extended electrical distribution
HISPEED = High speed data bus LH
= Left-hand side
LHD = Left-hand drive
LOSPEED = Low speed data bus MAN
= Manual transmission
PCL = Power Child Lock
REM = Rear Electronic Module
RH = Right-hand side
RHD = Right-hand drive
RTI = Road Traffic Information
SRS = Airbag
TELE = Mobile telephone
T = Turbo engine
W/O = Without
Colors
BL = Blue
BN = Brown
GN= Green
GR = Gray
OR = Orange
P = Pink
R = Red
SB = Black
VO= Violet
W = White
Y = Yellow
Page 622

Page 1272
Cars equipped with SRS/SIPS (Airbag)
Warning! Extra care must be taken when working on cars equipped with SRS/SIPS air bags. This
is important to prevent:1. Personal injury2. Damage to or malfunction of the SRS/SIPS
system.Work on the SRS/SIPS systems or related components must be carried out by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Is the car equipped with SRS/SIPS?
Cars with SRS are most easily recognised by the letters SRS on the steering wheel pad. If the car
also has an airbag on the passenger side, the letters SRS are embossed on the dashboard above
the glove compartment. SIPS decals are located on the seat panels and the windscreen.
Do not damage the SRS wiring!
Do not trap, fray, pierce or damage the SRS wiring. SRS wiring has orange casing and/or is
plaited.
Steering and front suspension
The contact reel in the SRS system can easily be damaged when working on the steering wheel,
steering shaft or steering gear. Refer to the SRS service information for information on carrying out
such work. This is to prevent damage.
SRS warning lamp

If the SRS warning lamp lights after repairs have been carried out, take the car to an authorised
Volvo workshop.
SRS collision sensor control module
S60 / V70 (00-) / S80
The collision sensor control module is located on the transmission tunnel in the centre console,
beside the parking brake. The air bag inflation areas must not be obstructed. Never place any
objects, such as upholstery, within these areas. The panels must be able to open in the correct way
and at the right time.
WARNING! The ignition must be in position "0" and the key removed from the ignition if any
connector in the SRS system is to be disassembled. Then wait
Page 1425
Install:
- the servo pump
Finishing
Remove the hose clip. Fill with coolant. Install the cap on the expansion tank. Test drive the engine
until the thermostat has opened. Check for leakage. Top up the coolant and oil if necessary.
Page 136
Other Relays
Page 1275
- the three screws (3). Lift out the horn (4).
Applies to cars with pre-routed wiring
- Press in the catch (1) on the connector for the right dummy button
- Remove the connector from the dummy button.
- Remove the screw (1) in the dummy button on the right hand side of the horn
- Press in the catch (2). At the same time pull the dummy button from its socket. Place to one side.
If there is pre-routed wiring, continue to procedure Steering wheel mounted remote control for the
radio See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Communication
Module/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel Mounted Remote Control for the Radio.
Note! If there is no pre-routed connector the horn must be replaced. A new one is in the kit. Carry
out procedures Steering wheel mounted remote control for the radio See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module/Service and
Repair/Steering Wheel Mounted Remote Control for the Radio and Steering wheel mounted remote
control for the radio See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls
Communication Module/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel Mounted Remote Control for the
Radio.
- Remove the screw (1) in the dummy button on the left hand side of the horn
Page 1556
Remove:
- the guard for the gas tank
- the connector
- the two screws
- slacken off the level sensor and turn the pipe first 180° clockwise and then 180°
counter-clockwise. Rotate the level sensor to the correct position with a magnet
- the cable.
Installing analog level sensors
Install:
- the cable
- the level sensor. Rotate the level sensor to the correct position with a magnet
- the two screws
- the connector
- the guard for the gas tank.
Replacing the Right-Hand Level Sensor and Pump
Replacing the right-hand level sensor and pump
Removal
Note! Since the illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and / or
correct.
Depressurizing the fuel system
Depressurize the fuel system according to, Fuel system pressure release See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair
Draining fuel tank
Drain the fuel tank according to, Draining the fuel tank See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction/Service and Repair
Page 910
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Information

------------------------
Page 517
Note! Check that the control module's connectors are intact.
Installing the driver door module (DDM)
Install the upper panel. Position the control module in the hole on the door panel. Check that the
lower mounting for the control module is correctly located in the support on the door panel. Press
the control module into place.
Install:
- the connectors
- the nut and screw
- the door panel, see Replacing the front door side panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front
Door Side Panel.
Ordering software
Order software for the driver door module (DDM) according to the table below.
Finishing
Initialise the window position in the communication input.

Locations
7/8 Pressure Sensor, Climate Control System

Temperature / Pressure Sensor Active On Demand
Coupling, Replacing
Differential Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Temperature / Pressure Sensor Active
On Demand Coupling, Replacing
Temperature / pressure sensor active on demand coupling, replacing
Removal
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Wait 3-4 minutes after the ignition has been switched off to reduce oil leaks on removal.
Note! Clean the area around the control module thoroughly before beginning removal.
Position a container underneath the Active on Demand Coupling. Disconnect the connectors for the
Remove:
- the 2 screws for the control module
- the control module with the sealing plate and the cupped washer.
Removing components from the Active on Demand coupling
Remove the throttle valve and the temperature/pressure sensor from the coupling. A = Throttle
valve. B = Temperature/pressure sensor. Use a large pair of pliers for removal. Grip the end of the
throttle valve. Hold the pliers stable and pull the valve straight out.
Note! Make sure that no damage is caused when removing the throttle valve. The valve cannot be
replaced separately. The throttle valve is removed in order to be installed in the control module.
This is done to minimize the risk of damage occurring to the contacts when installing.
Remove:
Page 649
Note! Wheel sensor cables are twisted pair (positive and negative signal) cables for each wheel. It
is important that paired cables are twinned in the same way when they are reinstalled in the
connector. The cables must be twisted approximately 3 times per 100 mm.
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Page 312
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 860
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Contact Reel
Checking the contact reel
Disconnect the contact reel from the steering wheel module (SWM). Take resistance readings
between terminals #B1 and #B2. The resistance must be infinite. Take resistance readings
between terminals #B2 and #B3. The resistance must be infinite. Check the cable between terminal
#B1 and contact reel terminal #1. Check for an open-circuit. Check the cable between terminal #B2
and contact reel terminal #2. Check for an open-circuit. Check the cable between terminal #B3 and
contact reel terminal #3. Check for an open-circuit. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- For information about signals, see Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
- To access or replace the contact reel, see Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing
Page 386
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 54

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Page 170
- for first generation seats, see Lifting seats in and out See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. For second generation seats, see Removing power seats,
tilting See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Ordering software
Finishing
Control Module Heater Pad, Replacing
Control module heater pad, replacing
Removing the heater pad control module
Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Remove one screw. Disconnect the
connector. Remove the control module.
Installing the heater pad control module
Install:
- the connector
- one screw
- the seat. See Removing power seats, tilting See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Page 85
Communications Control Module: Service and Repair
Phone module (PHM), replacing
Removing the phone module (PHM)
Action before removing phone module (PHM):
Note! If possible, always read off the telephone number for the customer's private subscription
before removing the phone module (PHM).
Read off the customer's telephone number as follows:
1. Key position 1. 2. Press the ON button if the car phone is switched off (the green LED on the
phone module (PHM) should be lit up). 3. Press the YES button to activate the car phone menu
selection. 4. Press in (9, 8, 7) on the keypad. 5. Press the right arrow button twice. The "Phone
ESN" menu option now appears in the display in the driver information module (DIM). 6. Press the
right arrow button once. The "KRC" menu option will appear in the display. 7. Press once on right
arrow key. Menu selection "Phone MIN" is now shown in the display. 8. Press the YES button. 9.
The telephone number for the customer's private subscription will now appear in the display. Note
down this telephone number. 10. Press twice on the NO button to return to the phone's start
position.
To avoid accidental calls to the Volvo On Call Plus Customer Service Center, always disconnect
the power for Volvo On Call Plus if replacing the phone module (PHM). This is done by removing
the reserve battery from the phone module (PHM). See Reserve battery Volvo On Call, replacing
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Emergency Battery/Service and Repair.
Removal:
Ignition off Remove the radio/telephone. See Radio/carphone, replacing See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Cellular Phone/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Radio/Carphone, Replacing. Press in the catches at the top and bottom edges of the
phone module (PHM). Disconnect the connectors. Remove the phone module (PHM) (3).
Installing the phone module (PHM)

Page 1772
Install the adapter wiring between the existing 6-pin connectors.
Note! Ensure that the ends of the protective sheath on the adapter cable point downwards so that
water does not gather in the protective sheath.
Install:
- the inlet hose between the air cleaner (ACL) and turbocharger (TC) on the turbocharger (TC)
- the air cleaner (ACL) housing.

Page 1341
Note! Check that the snap ring is in position in the groove. Check that the ends of the snap ring lie
against the stop lug.
Install:
- The O-ring on the sensor
- lubricate the O-ring lightly using a soap solution
- the sensor for the power brake booster so that the locking lug goes into position.
Gently pull the sensor. Check that the sensor is secure. Check that the snap ring is in position.
Connect the connector to the sensor.
Locations

Page 1566
- Remove fuel pump with wire and tube system
- Release six clamps. Note clamp positions

- Position fuel pump correctly, loosen fixings and push level sensor up.
Installation
Level sensor with cable and pipe system
- Position level sensor and press firmly
- Pull out wire next to wire and tube system and install clamps. Note clamp positions.
- Attach a piece of string or steel wire onto attachments for wire and tube system on left side fuel
gauge sensor
- Install wire and tube system into fuel tank
- Pull wire and tube system towards opening for left side level sensor, and feed through.
Page 740
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation
Main Relay (System Relay)
The function of the main relay (system relay) is to supply certain components with voltage.
The relay is mechanical and has a closing function. In the rest position the circuit in the relay is
open.
The main relay terminals (#30 and #86) are supplied with voltage by the battery. When the ignition
key has been turned and the Engine Control Module (ECM) is powered, the terminal (#85) on the
main relay is grounded by the Engine Control Module (ECM).
When the terminal (#85) is grounded, the relay is activated and a number of components are
powered via the relay terminal (#87).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the main relay.
The main relay is in the relay/fuse box in the engine compartment.

Page 846
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition

Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking SWM Control Unit

Page 1345
- Remove the nut. Lift up the yaw rate sensor.
- Pry up the clamp for the lateral acceleration sensor with a screwdriver. Remove the sensor.
Installation
Yaw rate sensor / lateral acceleration sensor

Page 33
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 1730
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Pressure sensor, fuel tank, replacing
Removal
Removing the pressure sensor
Lower the tank to access the pressure sensor from above. See: Fuel tank, replacing See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement
Remove
- the screw
- the connector
- the hose clamp and hose.
Installation
Installation
In reverse order
Page 1987
4/56 Central Electronic Module CEM
4/58 Rear Electronic Module REM
4/70 Upper Electronic Module UEM

Page 947
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Windshield Washing

Page 854
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Audio/Telephone Switch Unit
Checking the audio/telephone switch unit
- Ignition on.
result the fault is not in the SWM unit.
Page 950
-------------------------------------------------
Change direction indicator switch.
Other information:
- Turn signal switch, replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors and Switches - Lighting and
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the direction indicator switch status is OK the problem is in the direction indicator switch.
Yes - Fault Found
No - Checking the windshield wiper switch
-------------------------------------------------
Try replacing the control module.
Other information
- Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and
Repair
Page 680
Tool
Primary locking
Page 1470
Climate Control Exhaust Gas Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Air quality sensor, checking
Removal
Removing the windshield wiper and cowl
Remove:
- the windshield wipers. See Wiper arm / blade, windshield, replacing See: Wiper and Washer
- the cowl over the windshield wiper recess. See Cowl and gutter, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl and Gutter, Replacing
Check
Checking the air quality sensor
- Start the car engine with the ECC automatic button in the ON position.
Page 1409
Coolant Level Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Coolant Level Sensor
The function of the engine coolant level sensor is to alert the driver if the engine coolant level in the
expansion tank is too low.
The sensor is a magnetic reed switch, which is enclosed in a pipe on the bottom of the expansion
tank. Around the pipe, on the inside of the expansion tank is a float. This float contains a magnet.
When the engine coolant level is above minimum, the float is too high in the tank to affect the
switch. However if the engine coolant level falls below the minimum level, the magnetic field acts
on the switch.
The sensor is supplied with voltage (signal) from the Engine Control Module (ECM) and grounded
in chassis. When the engine coolant level in the expansion tank is over a certain level the circuit
closes, which produces a low signal. When the engine coolant level is below a certain level the
circuit is opened by the engine coolant level sensor, which produces a high signal. When the
engine control module (ECM) detects a high signal the information about low engine coolant level
is transmitted via the Controller area network (CAN) to the driver information module (DIM), which
warns the driver.
NOTE: There are no functions controlled by the engine which are directly connected to the low
coolant level warning lamp. The Engine Control Module (ECM) only transfers the signal which is
used by the Driver Information Module (DIM).
Page 43
The table below summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the audio module (AUM).
The signal types are divided into directly connected signals and Controller area network (CAN)
communication. The illustration below displays the same information with the Volvo component
designations.
Page 1959
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Page 193

Page 1037
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Page 1071
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Module
Steering wheel module
Preparations
Note! Disconnect the battery lead.
Note! Wait three minutes before starting work.
Ignition on to turn the steering wheel to the correct position.
Removing the steering wheel module
Turn the steering wheel a 1/4 turn so that the two holes on the rear of the steering wheel are
accessible.
Insert a screwdriver in the hole on the rear at right angles to the reverse of the steering wheel. Put
the screwdriver point against the top of the spring clip as illustrated. Pry the screwdriver up against
the upper edge of the hole (2) so that the point of the screwdriver presses down the catch (1) until
the catch releases. Turn the steering wheel a 1/2 turn in the opposite direction. Repeat the process
on the other side. Turn the steering wheel to the neutral position. Fold out the steering wheel
module.
Page 1982
3/117 Ceiling Light Switch Unit
3/119 Climate Control Switch, Auto
3/121 Climate Control Switch, Defroster
3/122
Page 847
Checking SWM control unit
Before continuing with trouble-shooting it is important to take note of the following:
- All tests for the current system should have been done.
- No faults should be found in the components, connectors or wires etc.
Have all the tests been done without finding any faults?
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1386
- Remove the cover over the fuel pump (FP)
- Separate the connector for the wheel sensor
- Install a loose cable on the connector. Pull the cable from underneath between the tank and
bodywork
- Disconnect the cable from the connector. Leave the cable in place.
Removing wheel sensors

Page 642
Connector Brake Control Module (BCM). See Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), repair See:
Connectors, Repair/Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), Repair.
Page 308
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 1536
Remove:
Note! Secure a wire in the area of the ejector.The wire must be sufficiently long that it reaches over
to the opposite side of the tank with some excess remaining to ensure that it does not slide into the
tank. The wire is needed to pull the hoses and wiring back to the left-hand side of the tank after the
fuel tank unit has been replaced.

Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Speed (RPM) Sensor
The engine speed (RPM) sensor provides the Engine Control Module (ECM) with information about
the speed and position of the crankshaft. The Engine Control Module (ECM) is able to use the
signal from the engine speed (RPM) sensor to determine when a piston is approaching top dead
center (TDC). However it is unable to use the signal from the engine speed (RPM) sensor to
determine whether the piston is in the combustion stroke or whether the exhaust valve is open
(exhaust stroke). The signal from the camshaft position (CMP) sensor is also required to determine
the operating cycle of the engine.
The signal from the engine speed (RPM) sensor is also used to check the engine for misfires. For
further information, see Misfire diagnostics.
Cars with manual transmissions have a series of holes drilled in the periphery of the flywheel. Cars
with automatic transmissions have a steel ring with punched holes. This steel ring is welded to the
edge of the carrier plate. In both cases, there is 6 degree between each hole. This arrangement
creates a hole for each tooth. There are 360 degree in one revolution, 6 degree between each hole
means that there are 60 holes. However one hole is not drilled/punched, to create a reference
position (tooth) for the crankshaft. This reference position is 72 degree before the top dead center
(TDC) of cylinder 1 on a 5 cylinder engine.
The engine speed (RPM) sensor is at the rear of the engine above the flywheel.
The sensor is inductive with a permanent magnet. An alternating current is induced in the sensor
when the flywheel/carrier plate passes the engine speed (RPM) sensor. The generated voltage and
frequency increases with the engine speed (rpm). The signal varies between 0.1 - 100 V depending
on the engine speed (RPM).
The Engine Control Module (ECM) is able to determine the engine speed (RPM) by counting the
number of holes per time unit. When the reference tooth passes the engine speed (RPM) sensor,
the voltage and frequency drop momentarily to zero, even though the engine is still running. This
allows the engine control module (ECM) to determine the position of the crankshaft.
The following applies to model year 2002 onwards: If the signal from the engine speed (RPM)
sensor is incorrect or missing, the control module will use the signals from the camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, on the condition that the position of the camshaft has been adapted and the car can
be driven if there is no signal.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the engine speed (RPM) sensor. The sensor value
(engine speed (rpm)) can be read off using VADIS/VIDA.
Page 1202

Adjustments
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
Gear-shift position sensor, checking/adjusting
Special tools:
999 5475 GAUGE See: Tools and Equipment/999 5475 Gauge 999 7077 Jimmy bar See: Tools
and Equipment/999 7077 Jimmy Bar
Remove the air cleaner housing ACL assembly with the intake pipe.

Page 1529
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
Left Fuel Gauge Sensor
Left fuel gauge sensor
Removal
Preparation
- Remove rear seat as described in Rear seat assembly See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Rear Seat Assembly
- Remove insulation
- Fold floor mat in boot under.
Fuel gauge sensor
- Remove level sensor cover
- Disconnect connector
- Loosen level sensor lock ring using special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999
5720 Wrench
- Remove level sensor. It is easier if the fuel pipe bends upwards through the hole
- Disconnect the 2 connectors from the level sensor
- Loosen tube system by pressing release button down
- Remove level sensor.

Page 2033
16/46 RTI Display
16/47 GPS Antenna RTI
16/50-54 Left-Hand/Right-Hand Rear Window Antenna
16/55 - 56 Left/Right-Hand Front Tweeter
16/57 - 58 Speaker, Left/Right Hand D-Pillar

Page 626
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics For Aftersales)
VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics for Aftersales)
During the second half of 2004, VADIS (Volvo Aftersales Diagnostic and Information System) was
phased out and replaced by VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics for Aftersales). The purpose
of VIDA is to support service providers in repairing and servicing Volvo vehicles. VIDA provides
Service and Parts information, as well as diagnostic fault tracing, and software downloads. As in
VADIS, these areas are integrated into one single application. All functionality that could be found in
VADIS will be found in VIDA. However, in some particular areas, e.g., the diagnostic work flow,
search functionality, and the Parts catalogue, VIDA contains considerable enhancements when
compared to VADIS.
Volvo's VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics for Aftersales) system ties together service and
repair data, parts data, service bulletins, software (firmware) downloads, fault tracing and on-board
diagnostic as well as other related information to decrease service time.
Much of the diagnostic information provided here is presented in a manner that assumes the
technician is using the web-based Volvo diagnostic system (VIDA) to diagnose the vehicle. Volvo
does not provide any information based on performing diagnosis with a third party diagnostic tool
aside from a conversion from P Codes to Volvo ECM Codes. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Conversion Table Standardized Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)/Volvo Diagnostic
Trouble Codes
Check Terminals Visually
Cleaning female socket terminals and male pin terminals Greasing female terminals
Check terminals visually
NOTE: When checking the engine control module (ECM), do not remove the control module from
the car before the main relay has interrupted the power supply. This may take up to 4 minutes after
the ignition has been switched off and the engine cooling fan (FC) has stopped running.
Inspect the terminals visually when checking, or taking readings from, opened connectors.
- Check for oxidation. This can cause poor connections in the terminals
- Check for damage to pins and terminals. Check that they are properly inserted into the connector.
Check that the cable is properly connected to the pin or terminal. Check pins and terminals
particularly carefully
- Use a separate male terminal to check the female terminal. Check that they are secure. Pull on
the pin.
Contact Resistance and Oxidation
Contact resistance and oxidation

Page 1102
CSC
DTC
Note!
NOTE!

JOURNAL 16761 DATED 07-01-2010. New AW TF8OSC software has been added for a stalling
condition. PLEASE UPDATE YOUR FILES.
DESCRIPTION:
The TCM Upgrades in the attached document are available to correct the complaints / symptoms
SERVICE:
If the vehicle fits in the model year or chassis range for the symptom in the attachment download a
TCM Upgrade.
Page 657
correct.
Secondary lock
Pin housing
Release the front housing section on the pin housing by pulling out the rear catches while at the
same time pressing the housing section forwards.
Page 1894
Steering wheel angle sensor module (SAS), replacing
Removal
Soundproofing panel
Remove the driver's side soundproofing panel.
Control module
backwards (see the arrow). Remove the connector and the cable.
Installation
The control module

Page 865
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
- To access the cruise control switch, see RTI switch See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted
Controls Assembly/Service and Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 507
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Page 1934
Ensure that the rubber seal is in position. Install the cable clamps around the cable harnesses and
the rubber seal. Check that the rubber gasket is in place on the upper section of the connector.
Connect the connector to the transmission

Page 548
3/113 Switch, Foldable Head Restraint

Page 667
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Type 5
Connector door, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 117
^ April 2009: New SW upgrade disc P/N for MMM+ only. This kit contains two discs, One for the
boot loader SW and the other for the application SW. The old disc P/N 31215588 is still used for
the MMM systems (non HDD).
Page 1013
The ohmmeter should read approximately 0 ohms.
OK - Fault Found
Not OK - Contact Resistance And Oxidation
-------------------------------------------------
Checking for open-circuits, contact resistance and oxidation For the control module,check ground
terminal 31/84 and the wiring connected to it. Check for an open-circuit. Check for contact
resistance and oxidation.
Other information:
- Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
Permanent Fault.
Page 853
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 644
Fuse holder in passenger compartment/cargo compartment. See Connector fuse holder, repair
See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connector Fuse Holder, Repair.
Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), Repair
Page 902
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- To replace the wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing, B5244T5, B5254T2 See:
Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service
and Repair.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: The fault is in the windshield wiper switch if the windshield wiper switch status is OK.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Testing and Inspection
Body Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Connecting breakout box, rear electronic module (REM)
- Ignition off
- Expose the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment
- Remove fuses 11D/1 and 11D/2 from the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment
- Release the locking hooks on the top of the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment
- Fold the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment downwards / inwards. The
integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment can now be removed
- Slacken off the screw holding the rear electronic module (REM) connector so that it can hang free
- Disconnect the rear electronic module (REM) connector. The connector may be stiff.
Connect the adapter between the rear electronic module (REM) and its connector. Connect the
breakout box to the adapter. Breakout box wiring 951 1503.
Disconnect the breakout box in reverse order.
NOTE: Before the rear electronic control module can be checked and measurements taken, the
removed fuses must first be installed.
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Recalls Recall 07V226000: Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement
1-800-458-1552.
Page 761

Page 800
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1852
Installation
Install in reverse order. See Removal.
C/D-post sensor
Preparations
Disconnect the battery lead. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Removal
Remove:
- The side cushion.
- The connector (press the catches and pull downwards carefully)
Note! Do not pull the wiring.
- 2 screws (6 Nm).
Replace the sensor.

Page 404

Page 111
SW = Software
DESCRIPTION:If the customer experience strange behavior from the navigation system i.e. black
screen at start up, restart, reset, arrow not moving, strange route choices, abnormal ETA
(Estimated Time of Arrival) etc, always start with upgrading the unit to the latest software. By doing
this we can eliminate already corrected problems from earlier software.
PRODUCT MODIFICATION:
New SW 09w14 (C30, S40, V50, C70 MY2008-, XC90 MY 2007-) New SW 10w20 (S80 MY2007-,
V/XC70 MY 2008-, XC60 MY 2010-)
SERVICE: Check the SW version prior to an SW upgrade. If the unit already has the latest SW the
SW upgrade will not work.
For S80 -06, S60, V70, XC70, XC90, C30, C70, S40 and V50. Use the latest software upgrade
CD-ROM P/N 31266835.
In S60, V70, XC70 and S80 - MY 2006 (CU-P2001) the SW will be upgraded to version 14.05.
In C30, S40, V50, C70 -2007 and XC90 -MY 2006 (MMM) the SW will be upgraded to version
14.04.
In XC90 MY 2007-2009, C30, S40, V50, C70 MY2008-2009 (MMM+) Use the latest software
upgrade CD-ROM P/N 31310029. The SW will be upgraded to version 1404/2400
For P3 cars i.e. S80 MY 2007-, V70 MY 2008-, XC70 MY 2008- and XC60 MY 2009- use the latest
software upgrade DVD-ROM. There are four different P/N depending on region. P/N 30630953 US.
The SW will be upgraded to version 8BC6.
Note:
This is a Service SW disc only. It will NOT update map data
39725-2 Software road traffic information module (RTI) upgrade. See VSTG for time allowance.
Keypad Unit, Steering Wheel, Replacing
Steering Mounted Controls Assembly: Service and Repair Keypad Unit, Steering Wheel, Replacing
Keypad unit, steering wheel, replacing
Driver's airbag module
Remove the driver's airbag module. See Airbag driver and passenger (SRS), replacing See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair.
Keypad
Remove:
- the four screws for the bracket (1) (10 Nm)
- the two screws for the keypad kit x2 (2) (2 Nm)
- the two connectors for the keypad.
Install in reverse order

Page 1520
Install:
Note! Secure the tie strap on the smooth central section of the corrugated hose.
Locations
3/56 Fan Switch

Page 1184
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 353
Applies to the XC90
- Pull off the D-post panel starting at the top edge. Then pull downwards until the three clips on the
inside have released. Do not damage the panel
- Remove the panel by pulling upwards slightly and unhooking it from the side panel
- Disconnect the connector if the car has a loudspeaker in the D-post.
Illustration A shows the removal of the cover for the load securing eyelets
Applies to all XC90
- Fold out the load securing eyelet
- Insert a scriber with an angled tip into the hole in the top of the cover
- Turn the scriber so that the angled tip engages in the reverse of the cover (1). Pull off the cover.
Illustration B applies to XC90 with two rows of seats
Illustration C applies to XC90 with three rows of seats

Page 1531
Fold the carpet (1) out of the way. Remove the insulation panel. Cover the area (2) around the
cover and between the doors with absorbent material.
Caution! Ensure that there is no risk of dirt getting into the tank.
Removing the cap over the left-hand level sensor

Page 424

Page 98
SW = Software
DESCRIPTION:If the customer experience strange behavior from the navigation system i.e. black
screen at start up, restart, reset, arrow not moving, strange route choices, abnormal ETA
(Estimated Time of Arrival) etc, always start with upgrading the unit to the latest software. By doing
this we can eliminate already corrected problems from earlier software.
PRODUCT MODIFICATION:
New SW 09w14 (C30, S40, V50, C70 MY2008-, XC90 MY 2007-) New SW 10w20 (S80 MY2007-,
V/XC70 MY 2008-, XC60 MY 2010-)
SERVICE: Check the SW version prior to an SW upgrade. If the unit already has the latest SW the
SW upgrade will not work.
For S80 -06, S60, V70, XC70, XC90, C30, C70, S40 and V50. Use the latest software upgrade
CD-ROM P/N 31266835.
In S60, V70, XC70 and S80 - MY 2006 (CU-P2001) the SW will be upgraded to version 14.05.
In C30, S40, V50, C70 -2007 and XC90 -MY 2006 (MMM) the SW will be upgraded to version
14.04.
In XC90 MY 2007-2009, C30, S40, V50, C70 MY2008-2009 (MMM+) Use the latest software
upgrade CD-ROM P/N 31310029. The SW will be upgraded to version 1404/2400
For P3 cars i.e. S80 MY 2007-, V70 MY 2008-, XC70 MY 2008- and XC60 MY 2009- use the latest
software upgrade DVD-ROM. There are four different P/N depending on region. P/N 30630953 US.
The SW will be upgraded to version 8BC6.
Note:
This is a Service SW disc only. It will NOT update map data
39725-2 Software road traffic information module (RTI) upgrade. See VSTG for time allowance.
Page 221
Check:
STC or not)
hydraulic modulator
Installation
Install the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator

Page 1560
Remove:

Installation
Page 1893

Page 1663
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal (AP) Position Sensor
The function of the accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor is to provide the engine control module
(ECM) with information about the position of the accelerator pedal. This data is used by the control
module to deploy the shutter in the throttle unit to the correct angle.
The sensor consists of a plastic housing with two potentiometers, an Analog/Digital converter and
circuits. The potentiometers are connected to a shaft which is affected by the position of the
accelerator pedal (AP). The resistance in the potentiometers changes with the position of the
accelerator pedal (AP).
The accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor transmits an analogue and a digital signal (pulse width
modulated (PWM) signal) to the control module. These signals indicate the position of the
accelerator pedal (AP). The digital signal is generated by the sensors Analog/Digital converter.
The analog and digital signals are used at the same time by the control module to regulate the
throttle shutter angle.
The sensor is supplied with 12 V by the system relay via a fuse and is grounded to the body.
The digital signal is also used in conjunction with the analogue signal for accelerator pedal (AP)
position sensor diagnostics. The accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor signals can be read using
VADIS/VIDA. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if the engine control module (ECM) detects
a difference between the analogue and digital signals. The engine control module (ECM) then uses
a minimal value to ensure the function (limp home).
The accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor is located on the accelerator pedal bracket.
Page 546
3/62 Hood Alarm Contact
3/71 Gear Position Contacts
3/74 - 77 Left-Hand and Right-Hand Front Door Lock Unit
3/78 Tailgate Lock Unit

Page 512
Finishing
Ordering software
Programming data
Program in the data read off from the old control module (customer-programmed data for example).
This is performed via VIDA vehicle communication. Reset the service reminder indicator (SRI).
Otherwise the lamp will receive incorrect reference data. (Global time is reset when the central
electronic module (CEM) is replaced.) Reset the service reminder indicator (SRI). See: Resetting
the service reminder indicator (SRI) See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator/Service and Repair. Check that the
CAN-communication is functioning. This is done by reading off the control module ID for the central
electronic module (CEM), rear electronic module (REM) and engine control module (ECM) via
VIDA vehicle communication.
Other information
For the location of other relay and fuse boxes, see: Relays, fuse boxes and wiring See: Power and
Ground Distribution/Locations.
Page 1382
Install:
- the cable in the clip and the brackets
- the sensor in the wheel spindle. Tighten. See: Tightening torque See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Specifications/Tightening Torque.
Fitting the wheel
Install the wheels. See: Installing wheels See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Service and
Repair.
Install the air cleaner (ACL) housing. Check that the hoses are not trapped under the air cleaner
(ACL) housing.
Install:
- the plastic nut on the wheel arch side
- the inlet hose using the hose clamp (2)
- the connector (3)
- the cable using the new cable tie to the air cleaner (ACL) housing
- the turbocharger (TC) control valve on the air cleaner (ACL) housing
- the inlet hose with the 2 screws (1).

Page 1971
2/61 Relay, Parking Light
2/62 Low Beam/Bi-Xenon Relay
2/63 High Beam Relay
2/72 Relay, Rear Window Wiper
2/79 Brake Light Relay

Page 1978
3/47 Parking Brake Contact
3/56 Fan Switch
3/59 Control, Beam Adjustment

Page 228
The control module for the steering wheel angle sensor is supplied with power from the overload
relay.
Steering wheel angle sensor
The steering wheel angle sensor is incorporated with the SRS contact reel, which in turn is installed
on the steering wheel module. The steering wheel angle sensor is equipped with a disc with two
code paths. Two circuits with light diodes read off a code path each. One circuit measures the
steering angle up to 360 degrees and the other records how many complete turns the steering
wheel has turned. Both circuits measure within ±700 degrees with a precision of 4.5 degrees. This
information is transmitted to the control module for the Steering wheel angle sensor as digital
signals.
Due to the reliance of the DSTC (Dynamic stability and traction control) on information from the
steering angle sensor it is extremely important that the contact reel has been centered correctly
and that only an original Volvo steering wheel is used.
Function For information regarding the brake control module or ABS control module, refer DSTC
(Dynamic stability and traction control) in Brake Control System.
SAS Diagnostic Functions

General
Page 813
Steering Column Control Module: Service and Repair
Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing
Removal
Steering wheel module (SWM)
Remove the steering wheel. See Steering wheel module See: Steering Mounted Controls
Communication Module/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel Module. Remove the steering column
covers. See Replacing the steering column covers, B5244T5, B5254T2 See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Steering Column Cover/Service and Repair
Remove:
- 2 screws
- the connectors
- the control module with stalks and the contact reel by releasing the catches on the underside
- The windscreen wiper and indicator lamp stalks. See Washer / wiper switch, replacing, B5244T5,
B5254T2 See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper
Switch/Service and Repair and Turn signal switch, replacing, M58, M66, M66 AWD, AW50/51
AWD, AW55-50/51SN, M56 See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors and Switches - Lighting and
- the contact reel according to Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing See: Restraint
Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing
The control module is now exposed.
Installation
Programming the control module
Program the control module. See the table below:
Note! Vehicles from model year 2004 mist be loaded with software for the Steering wheel module
(SWM). Vehicles from model year 2005 shall only be loaded with software for the Steering Angle
Sensor Module (SAS) if the vehicle is equipped with DSTC.
Page 679
Primary locking
the cable.
Connector sealed, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Open the catches and pull out the secondary lock, use tool 951 2853 Terminal removal tool See:
illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 324
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1952
3/183
Page 1567
- Loosen plastic tube from slot in pump housing
- Hold float against pump housing and install fuel pump in position 2 (see figure).
- Turn fuel pump to position 1 (see figure)
- Press plastic tube firmly into slot in pump housing
- Press fuel pump down in hole
- Install lock ring and tighten by hand.
Note! Markings on cover and fuel tank.
- Tighten lock ring using special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5720
Wrench.
- Install seal and hatch onto fuel pump.

Locations

Page 588
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1030

(DIM).
references above.

Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Locations

Page 527
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Service and Repair
Throttle Body (Electronic Throttle Module), Replacing
Removal and installation
correct.
Removing the throttle body (TB)
- Remove: -
the battery negative lead.
- the air intake between the front cover plate and the air cleaner (ACL) housing
- the charge air pipe between the throttle body (TB) and the charge air cooler (CAC).
Page 367
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1615

(DIM).
references above.

Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 607
Diagram Legend, See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and Instructions/Diagram Legend
53/### Junction Points
Junction Points
All references in the diagrams that begin with the number 53 (i.e. 53/###) are references to the
vehicle's electrical junction points.
Diagrams for the junction points can be found at Branching Point Diagrams. See: Power and
Ground Distribution/Branching Point/Diagrams
locations for the junction points can be found within the Harness Locations images at the vehicle
level. See: Locations/Harness Locations
Locations

Page 1668
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor transmits signals to the engine control module (ECM) about the
mass of the intake air. This data is used by the engine control module (ECM) to calculate:
- the engine load.
V.
charge air cooler (CAC). This data is used by the engine control module (ECM) to calculate the
boost pressure control (turbocharger (TC) and to calculate the injection period. The control module
also controls certain diagnostic functions using the signal from the temperature sensor.
(signal) from the control module. The resistance in the sensor changes according to the
temperature of the intake air. This provides the control module with a signal of between 0 - 5 V.
The lower the temperature the higher the voltage (high resistance). A high temperature results in
low voltage (low resistance).
manifold.
The engine control module (ECM) has diagnostics for the air mass and intake temperature of the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor. The signals can be read using VADIS/VIDA.
Page 1394
Lift the seat bracket. Install the active yaw control (AYC) sensor. Install the 2 screws. M6 Connect
the connector.
Finishing work
Install:
- The right-hand screw for the seat bracket. M10
- The carpet
- The 2 front screws for the seat rails. M10
- The panels
- Audio module (AUD).
Calibrate as follows: VIDA\ vehicle communication\ brakes\ calibrating.
Check
Turn on the ignition. The symbol on the dashboard must go out within 5 seconds. In the event of a
fault the symbol is on continuously. Test drive the car after repair. See Test Drive Form (DSTC
(dynamic stability and traction control) /brake control module), description See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Test Drive Form (DSTC (Dynamic Stability And Traction
Control) /Brake Control Module), Description.
Page 2057
9/1 Through C1-6 (Supplement)
Wire Color Code and Other Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Ignition switch symbols
x = Accessories (audio position)

S = Powered upon insertion of key
15 = The switch remains connected during start
15| = Contact is broken while starting
30 = Constant power from the battery
50 = Start
Countries/Markets
A = Austria
AUS = Australia
B = Belgium
CDN = Canada
CH = Switzerland
D = Germany
DK = Denmark
E = Spain
EU/OS = Markets outside USA and Canada FIN
= Finland
GB = Great Britain
Page 1121
generates a current which oscillates between 7 mA and 14 mA, and whose frequency increases
with speed. Using the signal from the sensor, the transmission control module (TCM) calculates the
transmission speed, unit rpm. The transmission control module (TCM) uses information about the
input shaft speed to calculate the torque reduction to be requested from the engine control module
(ECM) when shifting. The value is also used to compare the engine speed (RPM) with the speed of
the input shaft in order to calculate the slipping rate of the torque converter. The value is also
compared with the transmission speed sensor signal in order to calculate the actual gear ratio. This
is done to check whether the value corresponds to the expected gear ratio. There are diagnostics
for the transmission input speed sensor.
Transmission output speed sensor (speed of the output shaft)
The transmission output speed sensor (speed of the output shaft) is on the reverse of the
transmission housing. The sensor provides signals to the transmission control module (TCM) about
the vehicle speed. The output shaft speed sensor is an active sensor and is supplied with 12 V.
When the pulse wheel (wheel for shift-lock) rotates the sensor generates a pulsed current
(quadratic wave) where the strength of the current depends on the position of the pulse wheel. The
signals from the coils in the sensor are then affected by a magnetic resistance element, which
generates a current which oscillates between 7 mA and 14 mA, and whose frequency increases
with speed. The control module calculates the transmission output speed using the signals from the
sensor. The signal is compared with the signal from the transmission input speed sensor and is
used to calculate the gear ratio and is also used for diagnostics. There are diagnostics for the
transmission output speed sensor.
Oil temperature sensor
The temperature sensor is an NTC sensor. The temperature sensor is on the transmission control
system inside the side cover. It gauges the temperature of the transmission fluid in the oil pan. The
temperature sensor is integrated in the cable harness. The temperature sensor is supplied with 5 V
and is grounded via the transmission control module (TCM). The control module can determine the
transmission fluid temperature by measuring the voltage drop above the NTC resistance of the
sensor. The control module stores the time the temperature has been within a certain temperature
range. If a certain temperature and time has been exceeded, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
indicating that a oil change is necessary is stored. There are diagnostics for the temperature
sensor.
Gear-shift position sensor

Switch, Left-Hand Heated Seat

Page 969
control switch is functioning the fault is outside the steering wheel module (SWM).
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1119
Control Module: Description and Operation Design
Design Control module
The transmission control module (TCM) is positioned in an air cooled plastic box in the engine
compartment together with the engine control module (ECM).
Shift solenoids S1, S2, S3, S4 and S5
The shift solenoids S1, S2, S3, S4 and S5 are positioned in the valve body in the transmission
control system, which is mounted on the front edge of the transmission. The shift solenoids (on/off
type), consist of an electrical coil which controls a hydraulic valve. The solenoids are supplied with
12 V via the transmission control module (TCM) and grounded in the control system. The shift
solenoids control shifting and the transmission control module (TCM) determines which gear is to
be used by activating them in different patterns. There is a diagnostic for the shift solenoids.
Lock-up solenoid, SLU
The lock-up solenoid, SLU is in the transmission control system, which is mounted on the front
edge of the transmission. The lock-up solenoid consists of an electrical coil which controls a
hydraulic valve. The solenoid is controlled by pulse width modulation (PWM) voltage and is
grounded via the transmission control module (TCM). The solenoid controls lock-up engagement of
the torque converter. Engagement occurs through solenoid pulsing which provides a soft lock-up
engagement function. The solenoid allows the torque converter to work in one of three modes: -
Open
- Controlled slipping
- Locked.
The hydraulic function of the solenoid is linear. There is a diagnostic for the lock-up solenoid.
Page 1396
- Remove the nut. Lift up the yaw rate sensor.
- Pry up the clamp for the lateral acceleration sensor with a screwdriver. Remove the sensor.
Installation
Yaw rate sensor / lateral acceleration sensor

Page 439

Page 373
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 1851
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair

Collision sensor, replacing
B-post sensor
Preparations
Disconnect the battery lead. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Removal
Remove:
- the B-post panel.
- the connector (press the catches and pull downwards carefully)
Note! Do not pull the wiring.
- 2 screws (6 Nm).
Replace the sensor.

Page 868
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 611
54/21 Connector
54/24 Connector
54/25 Connector
54/32 Connector
54/34 Connector
Page 1933
Pin 12: blue / red cable. Pin 13: blue / black cable. Check that the pins are correctly positioned in
the socket.
Assemble the connector

Page 712
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
System Overview
Control module
The Engine Control Module (ECM) controls the following functions:
- injectors
- ignition
- camshafts (CVVT)
- evaporative emission system (EVAP) valve
- turbocharger (TC) control
- throttle angle
- engine cooling fan (FC)
- Air conditioning (A/C) compressor
- fuel pump (only vehicles with demand controlled fuel pumps).
There is a micro-processor in the control module which receives signals from the different sensors
in the car. The micro-processor uses a program which interprets the signals from the different
sensors and how the components/functions should be controlled.
The control module has several self-learning (adaptive) functions. It continually adapts ongoing
calculations to changing circumstances (wear, air leaks, differences between different fuels etc.).
Emissions are kept low through efficient management of the injection period, ignition, evaporative
emission system (EVAP) valve and camshafts etc. Faults which affect emissions can be detected
by running diagnostics for functions and components.
The control module is in a box in the engine compartment.

The engine control module (ECM) communicates with other control modules using controller area
network (CAN) communication.
The engine control module (ECM) checks activations, input and output signals and functions using
an integrated diagnostic system. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if, after validation, the
control module detects a fault. In certain cases the faulty signal is replaced with a substitute value
or certain functions are limited.
Substitute values can be set for e.g:
- engine coolant temperature (ECT)
- mass air flow
- throttle position
- atmospheric pressure
- etc.
Mathematical calculations and signals from certain components are used to calculate the substitute
values. Other substitute values are fixed, predefined values in the control module.
The substitute value allows the car to be driven and for the emissions to be kept at a reasonable
level even though vital functions/components are faults.
Functions which are limited may be for example:
- turbocharger (TC) control
- Camshaft control (CVVT)

Page 890
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Steering Wheel Module (SWM)

Page 1853
Installation
Install in reverse order. See Removal.
Page 1579
Page 1881
Acceleration Sensor: Service and Repair Acceleration Sensor Bodywork Rear (Four-C), Replacing
Acceleration sensor bodywork rear (Four-C), replacing

correct.
Removal
Location
The rear acceleration sensor is located behind the left-hand wheel arch in the cargo compartment,
see the illustration.
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Remove the hatch in the rear side panel on the left-hand side of the cargo
compartment.
Removing the acceleration sensor

Page 210

Page 1888
- the connector
- the bracket from the position sensor
- the 2 screws.
Installation
Installing the position sensor
Install:
- the position sensor on the bracket
- the 2 screws
- the connector
- the linkage
- the nut.
Align the bracket which the position sensor is on. Press into position.
Finishing
Calibrating the position sensor
The position sensor must be calibrated after replacement. Calibrate the position sensor.
Page 926
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Reading off diagnostic data

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 966
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 415
Fuses 11B/11-23

Headlamp Alignment Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Calibrating the position sensor for Bi-Xenon lamps
The position sensor must be calibrated when replacing the rear electronic module (REM) or
position sensor for the Bi-Xenon lamps.
Note! The command for calibrating the position sensor also erases all diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) in the rear electronic module (REM). If there are diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) stored in
the rear electronic module (REM), fault trace accordingly.
- Someone must sit in the driver's seat during calibration. The person must weigh at least 75 kg.
Ensure that the car is unladen and is on a flat surface
- Ignition on
- Click on the VCT2000 symbol
- Calibrate the position sensor.
Continue - DONE

Page 542
2/119 Right Rear Power Window Down Relay
2/120 Relay-Power Windows, Power Child Lock Rear Door
2/138 - 139 Deadlock Relay, Left-Hand and Right Rear Door
2/143 Relay, Fuel Leakage Control
2/158 Locking Relay, Rear Doors, Filler Flap

Page 1966
7/149 Rain Sensor

Page 1445
Install the splashguard under the engine. Only applies to cars with automatic transmissions. Check
the oil level. Top up if required.
Page 1636

(DIM).
references above.

Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 260
Remove:
- the two screws (2) on the lower edge of the panel
- the panel (3).
Note! The radio component and the comfort panel are complementary and are mounted at the joint
with hooked mountings.
Hint: To facilitate removal: Angle the dashboard environment panel outwards so that it is possible
to insert a couple of fingers between the centre console and the dashboard environment panel. Pull
the dashboard environment panel downwards at the same angle.
Hint: The dashboard environment panel is correctly secured. Force is required to remove it.
- connectors.
Lift out the panel.
Install:
In reverse order.
Page 1004
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Windscreen-Wiper Switch
Checking the windscreen-wiper switch
Hint: If read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch gave a correct result the fault is not in the
SWM.
Page 844
Were any defects found?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
If there is a malfunction on the wiper switch or its connector in the Steering wheel module (SWM)
this may affect the direction indicator function. Disconnect the wiper lever and see if the direction
indicator function starts to work. Remedy as necessary.
Other information
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
module.
Possible source
- Defective tailgate washer.

Page 666
Page 789
- Remove the 3 control module screws (torx 30).
- Lift the control module.
Installation
Caution! Take care that nothing comes between the control module and the bodywork. This can
cause over-sensitivity or poor SRS system function.
Supplemental restraint system module (SRS)

Page 2032
16/16 Window Antenna Amplifier, Left
16/26 Central Dashboard Speaker
16/35 Alarm Siren SCM
16/36
16/45 Road Traffic Information (RTI)

Page 988
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Page 419
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 614
54/53 Connector
54/54 Connector
54/55 Connector
54/56 Connector
54/65 Connector
Page 1532
Remove the cover (2) over the level sensor. Disconnect the level sensor connector (3).
Clean the area around the level sensor thoroughly. Open the left-hand level sensor. Use: 999 5720
Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5720 Wrench.
Page 1637
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 1930
Remove the cable clamps around the wiring and the rubber seal. Remove the sockets from the
connector casing. Insert a screwdriver between the casing and socket. Press in the catch. At the
same time, slide the sockets out of the casing.
Remove the socket for the cables
Remove the socket for the cables to the oil temperature sensor. 2- pin, pins 12 and 13.
Remove the wiring pins from the socket

Page 1229
off function See: and Switch for the sensor shut off function See:
- Reinstall the panel in front of the gear selector lever, alternatively the panel with the boot.
Finishing work
- Reconnect the battery negative lead

Page 1212
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1522
trapped.
Finishing
Page 1603
-------------------------------------------------
Reverse Light Remains On
Checking reverse light contact
Checking wire and replacement of component
Check the wire between the control unit 1A and reverse light contact 2 (3/10) for a short-circuit to
voltage supply as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking
Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault , and for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring
and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault.
Also check the connectors for a short circuit to voltage supply, as described in Checking wiring and
terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault ,
and for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. If no fault is found on the wire, check
the function of the reversing lamp switch.
Hint: If reverse light contact is closed, the voltage between 1 and 2 on the contact is 0 V.
Do the necessary corrective action.
Page 2050
The first part is a type number that describes the type of component in question, for example 3/xx.
The second part of the designation is a serial number, for example, x/2.
Combined these give a component designation, for example, 3/2.
There is a list of components at Component ID List, where, with the help of the component
designation, you can read off the name of the component, for example, 3/2 = light switch. See:
Diagrams/Diagram Information and Instructions/Diagram Legend
List of type numbers
The list shows which type of component that respective type numbers refer to, for example, 3/x
switch, 6/x = electric motor, etc.
1 Battery
2 Relay
3 Switch
4 Control module
5 Driver information module
6 Electric motor
7 Sensor
8 Actuator
9 Heating element
10 Light
11 Fuse
15 Electrical distribution rail/box
16 Audio
17 Service/diagnostics
18 Contact reel
19 Meter
20 Ignition component/shunt
27 Optics
31 Ground connection
53 Junction point
54 Connector
B. Junction points
The wiring diagrams contain numbered junction points, e.g. 53/352. There is a list of junction
points. This list shows all the components that are connected to each junction point. See: Power
and Ground Distribution/Branching Point/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
The location of the junction points is shown in the "Cable harness routing in vehicle". See:
Locations/Harness Locations
C. Connectors
Connectors provide a bridge between two cables harnesses and are described in the "Connector
Views". See: Diagrams/Connector Views
D. Electrical distribution
Operation of the fuses and relays is shown in the "Electrical distribution". See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Diagrams
E. Data communication
Today's cars are equipped with a CAN network, which transmits information. Connections to this
network are shown in their entirety on the respective wiring diagrams. Complete information on
CAN communication can be found in "Data communication". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Diagrams
F. Abbreviations
A number of different abbreviations are used and these are explained in "Wire Colour Code
Identification and Other Abbreviations". See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and Instructions/Wire
Color Code and Other Abbreviations
G. Component location
The appearance and location of components is described in numerical order. See:

Locations/Component Locations/A - Z Component List
Page 599
16/16 Window Antenna Amplifier, Left
16/26 Central Dashboard Speaker
16/35 Alarm Siren SCM
16/36
16/45 Road Traffic Information (RTI)

Page 77
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Page 989
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Page 720
Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning
New software can be downloaded into the engine control module (ECM). When ordering software,
the hardware and the software in the car is compared to the information in the Volvo central
database. If the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the control module. If the
comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the database is updated with
the car configuration. When this is complete the software is downloaded.
The engine control module (ECM) is positioned in the cool box in the engine compartment.
The engine control module (ECM) contains a unique code for each car for the immobilizer. The
central electronic module (CEM) checks this code at engine start up. The engine will not start if the
central electronic module (CEM) detects an incorrect code for the immobilizer. This means that the
engine control module (ECM) cannot be switched from car to car.
The engine control module (ECM) must first be "unlocked" using a unique PIN for each car before it
can be programmed with a code for the immobilizer. When the engine control module (ECM) has
approved the PIN, the code for the immobilizer can be programmed.
The PIN and the code for the immobilizer are obtained from the Volvo central database and sent
out with the software package when software for downloading has been ordered.
All new engine control modules (ECM) have the same PIN which is preprogrammed by the control
module supplier. After the engine control module (ECM) has been programmed successfully the
original PIN for the car will be programmed in the engine control module (ECM) memory and
replace the preprogrammed PIN code.
Page 2009
8/62 Belt Tensioner Igniter, Rear Center Seat
8/64 Solenoid Valve, Engine Mounting
8/66 - 67 Left/Right Hand inflatable Curtain Igniter
8/71 - 74 Throttle Solenoid, Shift Solenoid 3, 4, 5

Page 700
Note! In 2003 the cable terminal with a pre-crimped cable section was introduced to the Volvo
range. See the illustration. This method applies for repairs with this type of cable terminal.
Caution! Ensure that the new pin has the same type of surface treatment as the old.
Caution! For repairing SRS wiring, see: Cable harness SRS system, repair See: Restraint
Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Air Bag Harness/Service and Repair/Procedures.
Preparatory work
Page 403
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 2016
10/126 Right-Hand Front Courtesy Lighting
10/129-130 Front Left and Right Parking Light
10/148 Left Hand Door Mirror Lighting
10/149 Right-Hand Door Mirror Lighting
10/150 Rear Reading Light
11A/no. Main Fuses In Engine Compartment

Page 1298

Page 675
Primary lock
The secondary lock
Connector Type 7
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Press out the secondary lock from the cable side using tool 951 2633 Terminal removal tool See:
illustrated.
Page 1542
position
Page 52
YES - Reading off audio module diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Checking communication problems
Selecting car model
and S70 / C70. 4. S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
Page 974
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
control switch is functioning the fault is outside the steering wheel module.
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Page 867
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
control switch is functioning the fault is outside the steering wheel module.
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1385
- Separate the connector at the backrest
- Slacken off the screw for the backrest
- Remove the 2 screws for the seat belts
- Angle out the backrest and pull it out of the other mounting for the backrest base
- Lift the backrest out of the car
- Fold up the soundproofing carpet
- Remove the wheel.
Removing the wheel sensor connector

Page 167
Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair Front Seat, Driver's Seat, Front Seat

Remove the key.
Install:
- the connector
- the key
Page 1047
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1613
------------------------

Diagnostic outlet

Page 1438
Note! The cruise control/turn signal switch should be in the neutral position during installation. The
pin that controls automatic cancel may otherwise be broken off.
Connect 8-pin connector (2).
Install:
- the new cruise control/turn signal indicator switch
Connect the 6-pin connector (3) from the lever to the connector (4), on the left-hand side of the
steering column.
Install:
- steering wheel covers and panel.
Function test the switch.

Page 257

Page 612
54/35 Connector
54/37 Connector
54/39 Connector
54/40 Connector
56/40A Connector
Page 1213
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Replacing The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Remove:
- the sensor from the thermostat housing. Use socket 951 2885.
NOTE: Put paper underneath the sensor to prevent coolant spillage.
Install:
- Tighten to 22 Nm, use socket 951 2885

Page 586
Fuses 11B/11-23
11B
11C/no. Fuses In Passenger Compartment

Locations

Page 630
Checking female socket terminals and male pin terminals Greasing female terminals
Inspect terminals visually
NOTE: When checking the engine control module (ECM), do not remove the control module from
the car before the main relay has interrupted the power supply. This may take up to 4 minutes after
the ignition has been switched off and the engine cooling fan (FC) has stopped running.
Inspect the terminals visually when checking, or taking readings from, opened connectors.
Repair wiring and cable terminals as required, using appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Check for oxidation. This can cause poor connections in the terminals
- Check for damage to pins and terminals. Check that they are properly inserted into the connector.
Check that the cable is properly connected to the pin or terminal. Check pins and terminals
particularly carefully
- Using a loose male connector, test to see if the female connector provides a good contact and
that the pin remains in place when the male connector is pulled lightly
- Shake the cable lightly and pull on connectors during measurement to locate damage.
Open-Circuit, Intermittent Faults
Open-circuit, Intermittent faults
An open-circuit in a cable will be indicated by the loss of a function (or functions). Chafed and
broken leads are common causes of faults. Repair wiring and cable terminals as required, using
appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Disconnect the connectors at both ends of the cable.
Check the cables visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually".
Connect an ohmmeter between the ends of the cable. The ohmmeter should read approximately 0
[ohm] if there is no open-circuit in the cable. Shake the cable lightly and pull on connectors during
measurement to locate the damage.
Page 771
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 541
2/114 Unlocking Relay, Right-Hand Rear
2/115 Relay, Deadlock, Rear Doors
2/116 Rear Power Window Up Relay
2/117 Right Rear Power Window Up Relay
2/118 Rear Power Window Down Relay

Page 706
Page 775
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1126
- If the transmission temperature becomes too high the transmission control module (TCM)
determines the shift position. The purpose is to maintain a gear where lock-up is possible at the
current speed
- Lock-up is possible in 3rd, 4th and 5th gears. (1st and 2nd gears do not have lock-up).
Other
In position MAN the lever position signal to the gear selector module (GSM) is generated as
follows: For each of the three gear selector positions a hall sensor is mounted on the printed circuit
board for the gear selector control module (GSM). A permanent magnet on the lever affects the
output signals from the sensors to the control module. The control module can read off the position
of the lever through the differences in the signal characteristics.
Shift-lock
To avoid any chance of the gear selector inadvertently moving from the P position, the car is also
equipped with an electrically operated shift-lock function. This locks the interlock pin in the gear
selector lever in the shift-lock section, locking the selector lever in the P position. To move the gear
selector from the P position, the ignition must be switched on and the brake pedal depressed. (The
stop lamp switch is activated.). The central electronic module (CEM) reads the position of the brake
pedal via direct connection to the brake pedal sensor and transmits a signal to the gear selector
control module (GSM) to deactivate the solenoid in the gear lever selector. The solenoid lock pin is
pushed in and the gear selector lock button can be pressed down as usual to select another gear.
When the ignition is in position "0", the solenoid is deactivated. In this position the shifter is
mechanically locked by the key lock cable.
Ignition switch interlock
An interlock and security feature (ignition switch interlock) is mechanically connected to the ignition
switch by a cable. The ignition switch interlock is controlled by the position of the lock cylinder in
the ignition switch and by the position of the gear selector. This means that the gear selector must
be in the P-position for the ignition key to be removed from the ignition switch. The ignition key
must be turned to position I or II before the lever can be moved from the P position. The ignition
switch interlock is used only in combination with shift-lock.
Park neutral position (PNP) function
The gear-shift position sensor has a park neutral position (PNP) function to prevent the engine
being started with a gear selected. This function prevents the engine being started unless the P or
N positions are selected. This prevents the car from lurching forwards when started. For further
information, see Design and Function, central electronic module (CEM).
Adaptation data
There are two functions for adaptation in the transmission control module (TCM) software which
can be activated: -
Resetting adaptation - carried out after replacing internal components or the entire transmission
- Adaptation function - This function helps the mechanic to adapt the transmission. It makes it
easier to reset the function of the transmission after repair or replacement of, for example:
Page 1358
The table above summarizes input and output signals to and from the Steering wheel angle sensor
control module. The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial communication
and Controller area network (CAN) communication.
Design
Control module for the steering wheel angle sensor
After initiation, with the ignition key in position II and when the steering wheel is turned 4.5 degrees
in any direction, the control module for the steering wheel angle sensor continuously transmits
information about the steering wheel angle position to the brake control unit to calculate the driving
style of the driver. The brake control module was called ABS-control module up to and including
model year 2001.
Communication between the Steering wheel angle sensor control module and the brake control
module occurs on the high speed side of the Controller area network (CAN). The control module for
the steering wheel angle sensor is positioned on a bracket inside the central electronic module.
Page 1058
VIDA
Other information
Locations
Accessory Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 729
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 384
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 79
Communications Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Connecting the Breakout Box, Audio Control Module
Connecting the breakout box, Audio control module
Special tools:
951 1507 Adapter 12-12-8-4-2 Pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1507 Adapter 12-12-8-4-2 Pin
951 1428 Breakout box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428 Breakout Box 951 1509 Adapter
13-8-6-8-2 Pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1509 Adapter 13-8-6-8-2 Pin
- Ignition off
- Expose the head unit / audio module. See Radio cassette player, replacing See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and
Repair/Radio/Cassette Player, Replacing.
Check that the male and female terminals on the unit connectors are undamaged and secure
(cannot be pressed in). Check that the cables to the female terminals are secured to the terminal
pins.
Note! In order for the below connections to be made take note of the color codes of the connectors.
Connect adapter951 1507 Adapter 12-12-8-4-2 Pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1507 Adapter
12-12-8-4-2 Pin to the audio control module (wiring side). Connect breakout box951 1428 Breakout
box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428 Breakout Box to the adapter. Audio control
moduleterminals: #A1-#A12 correspond to terminals #15-#26 on the breakout box (green
connector). #B1-#B12 correspond to terminals #1-#12 on the breakout box (gray connector).
Terminals #E1-#E8 correspond to terminals #16-#23 on the breakout box. When connecting
connector D, adapter951 1509 Adapter 13-8-6-8-2 Pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1509
Adapter 13-8-6-8-2 Pin must be used. Terminals #D1-#D6 correspond to terminals #42-#47 on the
breakout box. The breakout box is designed to facilitate reading off the control module input and
output signals when the control module is connected; and the cable and component resistance
when the control module is disconnected. The use of a breakout box reduces the risk of accidental
short-circuited cables and damage to the connector pins. For further information about signals and
other values, see Signal specification, audio control module See: Signal Specification.
Connecting the Breakout Box. Car Phone Module
Connecting the breakout box. Car phone module
Special tools: 951 1463 951 1509 951 1428
- Ignition off
- Expose the car phone module according to Phone module (PHM), replacing.
pins.
Connect adapter 951 1463 (terminal A, C) or 951 1509 (terminal D) to the connector for the unit (to
the wiring). Connect breakout box 951 1428 to the adapter. Car phone module terminals: Terminals
#A1-#A22 correspond to terminals #1-#22 on the breakout box. Connecting the hands-free in the
A-post terminals: Terminals #C1-#C22 correspond to terminals #1-#22 on the breakout box. Car
phone handset terminals: Terminals #D1-#D8 correspond to terminals #32-#39 on the breakout
box.
The breakout box is designed to facilitate reading off the control module input and output signals
when the control module is connected; and the cable and component resistance when the control
module is disconnected. The use of a breakout box reduces the risk of accidental short-circuited
cables and
Page 863
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 787
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Supplemental restraint system module (SRS), replacing
Removal
Preparations
Disconnect the battery lead. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
SRS control module
V70R (B5254T4 engine)
Remove the front storage compartment. See Center console, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing.
V70 (other engines)
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing (-2004) or
the entire center console. See Center console, replacing See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing (2005-).
V70XC/XC70
Remove the front storage compartment - see Center console, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing (-2004) - or
the entire center console - see Center console, replacing See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing (2005-).
S80
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing.
Page 959
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1195
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 7
Fuses 11B/1-10
Steering Wheel Mounted Remote Control for the Radio
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Mounted
Remote Control for the Radio

Preparations
- Remove the ignition key.
Note! Wait at least five minutes before disassembling the connectors or removing other equipment.

Page 150
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1826
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Position sensor camshaft, replacing
Removing the position sensor
Disconnect the connector from the sensor.
Remove:
- the sensor.

Page 2044
54/21 Connector
54/24 Connector
54/25 Connector
54/32 Connector
54/34 Connector
Page 434
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 1635
above.
Control modules

VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 1162
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 882
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Page 1105
TJ Instruction No 16761
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation
Fuel Pump Control Module (Only Vehicles With Demand Controlled Fuel Pumps)
The fuel pump control module powers the fuel pump and regulates the output of the pump. The fuel
pressure changes with the output of the pump.
The fuel pump control module is supplied with battery voltage by the fuel pump (FP) relay and is
grounded in the car body. The fuel pump (FP) relay is controlled by the central electronic module
(CEM) when requested by the engine control module (ECM).
The engine cannot be started if the power supply to the fuel pump control module is faulty because
the fuel pump will not then be powered.
The fuel pump control module is controlled by the engine control module (ECM) via serial
communication. The fuel pump control module then controls the fuel pump by transmitting a PWM
voltage on the ground lead for the fuel pump. This means that the voltage drop across the pump
changes, and with it the output of the fuel pump.
There are no diagnostics for the fuel pump control module. The engine control module (ECM) has
diagnostics for fuel pressure regulation and the associated components.
The pulse width modulated (PWM) signal from the engine control module (ECM) to the fuel pump
control module can be read off using VADIS/VIDA.
The fuel pump control module is on the outside on the right-hand side of the fuel tank.
Page 2046
54/43 Connector
54/44 Connector
54/45 Connector
54/50 Connector
54/51 Connector
Page 705
Page 357
Page 1485
Remove:
- the connector
- the pressure sensor.
Installation
Installing the pressure sensor
Install:
- the pressure sensor.
- the connector.
Finishing
Filling with coolant and leak tracing
Vacuum pump the air conditioning (A/C) system. See: Vacuum pumping See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Service and Repair/Vacuum Pumping. Fill the system. See: Refrigerant, filling See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant, Filling. Leak trace the system. See:
Leak tracing, fluorescent tracing agent / UV lamp See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Leak Tracing, Fluorescent Tracing Agent /
UV Lamp or: Leak tracing, electronic leak tracer See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Leak Tracing, Electronic Leak Tracer.
Installing the air baffle
Install the 2 x M6 screws for the air baffle. Tighten.

Page 1046
indicator diode is activated with a red light!
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------

Page 923

(DIM).
references above.

Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 551
3/131 Switch, Audio/Mobile Phone
3/135 RTI Switch
3/155 Automatic Transmission Program Selector

Page 349
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Service and Repair
Relay kit fog tail lamp + relay kit positive power supply
INTRODUCTION
Page 886
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 516
Body Control Module: Service and Repair Driver Door Module (DDM)
Driver door module (DDM), replacing
Preparations
Always check that the control module and control module box connectors do not have bent or
damaged terminals or sockets. This may have been the cause of the fault.
Removing the driver door module (DDM)

Ignition off.
Remove:
- the door panel, see Replacing the front door side panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front
Door Side Panel.
- the nut and screw holding the control module in place
- the connectors.
Pull up the rear edge of the door module. Pull the control module backwards and upwards. Detach
the control module from the mounting on the door panel. Press up the control module. Disconnect
the catches. Lift the upper panel from the control module.
Impulse Sensor
7/25 Impulse Sensor

Page 1283
- Turn the knob (1) on the left-hand rear panel through 90°
- Fold the panel (2) inwards.
Installation
- Disconnect the pre-routed green (GN) connector (1), taped on the cable harness under the fuse
holder. Connect the connector to the tilt sensor (2)
- Install the tilt sensor on the bracket (3)
- Reinstall the side panel in the cargo compartment. Reinstall the carpet in the cargo compartment.
See procedure Tilt sensor See: .
Only applies to the V70 (00-)
Preparations
- Remove the left foldable panel in the cargo compartment.
Installation
Page 66
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 994
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
unit.
- To access cruise control switch unit see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 59
- Ignition on.
trouble code (DTC).
For further information, see Description of reading extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
information See: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/Description of Reading Extended Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Information.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault

Page 47
Remote control from the key pad on the steering wheel is available as both an option and as
standard equipment depending on the market. The keypad is positioned on the right-hand side of
the steering wheel and is connected to the steering wheel module (SWM) via serial communication.
It is possible to control the volume (increase-decrease) and change the preprogrammed radio
stations via the keypad. The buttons are used to select a track when playing a CD, cassette or
Mini-Disk. The steering wheel module (SWM) communicates with the audio module (AUM) via the
Controller area network (CAN).
Audio remote control (option)
Remote operation from a separate wireless remote control is available as an option. This can be
used to control the volume (increase-decrease) and change the preset radio stations. The buttons
are used to select tracks when playing a CD, cassette or Mini-Disk and to change the CD when
using the CD changer. A particular frequency can be searched for, radio stations stored in the
presets, Autostores made and sources stored. The remote control is fitted with two AAA (LR03)
batteries.
Road Traffic Information system (RTI) (option)
See Design and Function, Road Traffic Information system, RTI (road traffic information).
TV-receiver (option)
See Design and Function, Road Traffic Information system, RTI (road traffic information).
Page 650
Slide the catch in the direction of the arrow, as illustrated.
Connector Data Link Connector (DLC), Repair
Connector data link connector (DLC), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Data link connector (DLC), dismantling
Expose the data link connector (DLC).
Secondary lock
Page 985
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read Button on the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the read button on the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Hint: If the read button status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the read button status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.

Page 674
At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Page 1675
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Camshaft Sensor
The function of the camshaft position (CMP) sensor is to detect the camshaft flanks. The signal
from the sensor is used by the engine control module (ECM) to determine the radial position of the
camshaft.
Each camshaft has four flanks per camshaft revolution. A pulse wheel on the camshaft consisting
of four teeth (the teeth are positioned by each flank) is used by the camshaft position sensor (CMP)
to detect the flanks.
The flanks are not symmetric on the camshaft. This allows the control module to determine which
flank has been detected and therefore which operating cycle the camshaft is in.
When the operating cycle of the camshaft is established, the control module is able to determine
which cylinder should be ignited. In the event of misfire or engine knock, the control module is also
able to determine which cylinder is misfiring or knocking. Also see Knock sensor (KS) and Engine
speed (RPM) sensor.
Data about the position of the camshaft is used during camshaft control (CVVT). See Function.
The sensor, which is a magnetic resistor with a permanent magnet, is grounded in the control
module and supplied with 5 V from the control module. When one of the teeth on the camshaft
pulse wheel passes the camshaft position (CMP) sensor, a signal is transmitted to the control
module from the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. The signal varies between 0 - 1 V and is low
when a flank passes the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor is positioned at the rear of the engine by the controllable
camshaft (CVVT).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
Page 1032
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1583
Page 1724
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Fuel Temperature Sensor (Only Vehicles With Demand Controlled Fuel
Pumps)
The fuel pressure sensor is combined and consisted of both the fuel pressure sensor and the fuel
temperature sensor. The sensor detects the fuel pressure (the absolute pressure) and the
temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail.
Fuel pressure sensor The pressure sensor is a Piezo resistive type resistor, the resistance of which
changes with the pressure. Depending on the pressure in the fuel rail, an analog signal of 0 - 5 V is
transmitted. Low pressure results in low voltage, high pressure in high voltage.
The engine control module (ECM) then uses this signal to adjust the pressure in the fuel rail using
the fuel pump control module. Also see Function.
The pressure sensor is supplied with 5 V and grounded in the engine control module (ECM). The
pressure sensor transmits a signal indicating the fuel pressure to the engine control module (ECM)
on a separate cable.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the fuel pressure sensor. Its signals (pressure and
temperature can be read using VADIS/VIDA.
NOTE: The absolute pressure is displayed when using VADIS/VIDA parameter read outs to read
off the fuel pressure. If there is no pressure at the fuel rail, the atmospheric pressure will be
displayed.
HINT: The relative pressure (absolute pressure minus atmospheric pressure) is displayed when
reading off the fuel pressure via a manometer connected to the fuel rail.
Fuel temperature sensor The temperature sensor is an NTC sensor. The sensor is supplied with
voltage (signal) from and grounded in the engine control module (ECM).
The resistance in the sensor changes according to the temperature of the fuel. This provides the
engine control module (ECM) with a signal of between 0 - 5 V. Low temperature results in high
voltage (high resistance). High temperature results in low voltage (low resistance).
The engine control module (ECM) uses the signal to calculate the volume of the fuel.
The fuel pressure sensor is on the left-hand end of the fuel rail.
Page 2002
7/122 Microwave Sensor Alarm (MMS)
7/124 Brake Pedal Sensor

Page 921
------------------------

Diagnostic outlet

Locations
Starter Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1993
6/58 - 60 Motor, Front Left and Front Right Power Window
6/62 Left-Hand Power Door Mirror
6/63 Right-Hand Power Door Mirror
6/65 Passenger Seat Motor, Up/Down Front Edge

Page 1708
NOTE: Secure the tie strap on the smooth central section of the corrugated hose.
Page 1201
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 1757
Install:
- the new pressure sensor
- the connector
- the hose on the charge air pipe.

Page 1975
2/119 Right Rear Power Window Down Relay
2/120 Relay-Power Windows, Power Child Lock Rear Door
2/138 - 139 Deadlock Relay, Left-Hand and Right Rear Door
2/143 Relay, Fuel Leakage Control
2/158 Locking Relay, Rear Doors, Filler Flap

Page 885
- Ignition off.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1404
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Yaw Rate Sensor / Lateral Acceleration Sensor (DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control)), Replacing
Yaw rate sensor / lateral acceleration sensor (DSTC (dynamic stability and traction control)),
replacing
Removal
Sensors
- Remove the center console.
- Slacken off the screws. Remove the sensors.
Installation
Sensors
In reverse order. Tighten the screws for the sensor. Tighten to 10 Nm.
Page 1026
Finishing the read off
The read off is now complete. Exit this procedure. Log off VIDA. The completed log can now be
printed or saved. Save the log to a disc or save it locally. To save it locally, name the
filevehcom.logunderC:\volvo\logs.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Reading off diagnostic data
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Selecting car model
1. S40 (04-) / V50.

Page 927
Reading Off the Control Module ID
Reading control unit id
Activate read out of control unit id by clicking on the symbol for VCT 2000.
Control unit identification
The information that is read out identifies the hardware and software version of the control unit and
its diagnostic status.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Engine Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Erasing diagnostic trouble codes
Stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can be read off and erased using this function. Diagnostic
trouble codes (DTCs) can only be erased once all the diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have been
read off at least once. When erasing diagnostic trouble codes, the diagnostic trouble code's
counter, status identifier as well as frozen values are also erased. For certain systems, stored
adaptations may also be reset when erasing.
Page 1242
Caution! The following procedure must be carried out to ensure that the connector and wiring are
not damaged when removing the bumper.
Follow the cable from the sensors in the bumper up to the control module for the back-up
(reversing) warning system. Remove the control module for the back-up (reversing) warning
system. Disconnect the connector (its cable comes from the bumper).
Note! Disconnect the correct connector. The control module for the back-up (reversing) warning
system has 2 connectors.
Removing rear bumper

Page 978
Check the voltage between terminals #B1 and #B3. Voltage should be approximately 12 V. Check
the voltage between terminals #B2 and #B3. Voltage should be approximately 5 V. Check the
voltage between terminal #B3 and the battery negative terminal. Voltage should be approximately 0
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Error Message

Page 1657
Note! The cruise control/turn signal switch should be in the neutral position during installation. The
pin that controls automatic cancel may otherwise be broken off.
Connect 8-pin connector (2).
Install:
- the new cruise control/turn signal indicator switch
Connect the 6-pin connector (3) from the lever to the connector (4), on the left-hand side of the
steering column.
Install:
- steering wheel covers and panel.
Function test the switch.

Page 2026
Fuses 11D/1-7
Page 558
6/26 Generator
6/28 Motor, Passenger Compartment Fan
6/29 Motor, Electric Cooling Fan
6/30 Washer Pump, Rear Window
6/32 Rear Window Wiper Motor

Page 943
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 192
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 339
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 476
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1055
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Page 2015
10/66 Right-Hand Low Beam
10/68 Left-Hand High Beam
10/70 Left-Hand Low Beam
10/114-115 LH and RH Vanity Mirror Lighting
10/125 Left-Hand Front Courtesy Lighting

Page 753
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 436
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1667
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (2002-2004)
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor gauges the air mass sucked into the engine. It continuously
transmits signals to the engine control module (ECM) about the mass of the intake air. This data is
used by the engine control module (ECM) to calculate:
- the engine load.
V.
manifold.
The shape of the mass air flow (MAF) sensor is slightly different on naturally aspirated engines and
also contains an air temperature sensor.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the mass air flow (MAF) sensor. The signal can be
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (2005-)
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor measures the air mass sucked into the engine. On naturally
aspirated engines and 5 cylinder turbocharged engines (except B5254T2/-T4), it also measures the
temperature of the intake air.
Air mass
Page 1011
Page 962
No - Vehicle equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Vehicle equipment
Is the vehicle equipped with RTI?
Yes - Checking the wires and components
-------------------------------------------------

Page 701
Disconnect the battery negative cable. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Removal
Keypad Road Traffic Information (RTI), Replacing
Navigation Function Selector Switch: Service and Repair Keypad Road Traffic Information (RTI),
Replacing
Keypad road traffic information (RTI), replacing
Removal
- Remove the steering wheel module
- Snap loose the key pad.
Installation

Page 177
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection
Sun roof module (SRM), calibrating
Calibration
Calibrating the sun roof module (SRM)
The sun roof must be closed. Ignition in position I.
Press the sun roof switch so that the sun roof is in the tilt position. Release the switch.
Press the switch (in the tilt position) in again for at least 5 seconds so that the sun roof closes.
Release the switch. The calibration is complete.
Note! If the sun roof has not moved to the correct position, carry out calibration again.
Hint: If the sun roof has still not moved to the correct position: Press the sun roof switch so that the
sun roof moves to the rearmost position (completely open). Release the switch. Press the switch
(in the completely open position) in again for at least 5 seconds so that the sun roof closes.
Release the switch. Close the sun roof and carry out calibration again. See steps 1 and 2 above.
For further information on the sunroof, see

Page 562
6/95 Damper Motor, Temperature, Left-Hand Side
6/96 Damper Motor, Temperature, Right-Hand Side
6/102 Damper Motor, Defroster
6/103 Damper Motor, Floor/Ventilation
6/120 Engine Throttle Body

Page 1042
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Reading control unit id

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1783
Adjust the gear-shift position sensor according to adjustments.
Installing the lever and the gear-shift position sensor
Install:
- the lever for the gear shift linkage rod. Tighten the nut. Tighten to 16 Nm
- the gear selector cable on the lever and transmission. Tighten to 25 Nm
- the connector for the gear-shift position sensor on the mounting. Connect the connector.
Assemble the cable harness with tie straps. Press the mounting for the cable harness into place in
the cover for the control system. Install the mounting for the connectors on the bracket.

Page 884
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the RTI Switch Unit
Checking the RTI switch unit

Page 1132
Note! Do not touch the control module terminal pins with your fingers. Static electricity may damage
components in the control module.
Insert tool 999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench (1) in the car around the
control module. Move the upper section of the tool backwards as far as it will go (2). Pull up the
tool. Carefully pull up the control module.

Locations

Page 1399
Test driving
And Traction Control) /Brake Control Module), Description
Page 597
15/31C1
15/31C2
15/31C4
15/31C5
15/31C6
Page 506
Note!
- Steps 1 - 16 apply to S60 and S80.
- Steps 17 - 39 apply to V70.
Applies to S60 and S80

Page 10
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 696
When the first join is completed and checked, join the rest of the wire ends in the same way.
Heating the shrink tubing
The shrink tubing ensures the electric wire is satisfactory and provides a safe join. Hold a pad or
other item behind the shrink tubing to avoid heat escaping.
Hint: Suitable setting of heat gun951 2777 Hot-air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951 2777 Hot-Air
Gun , air distribution switch in position 2 and potentiometer for temperature setting in position
between 2 and 3.
Heat the sleeve using the hot air gun951 2777 Hot-air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951 2777
Hot-Air Gun and suitable jet kit. Heat the shrink tubing rapidly to avoid heat escaping. It is very
important that the shrink tubing is correctly shrunk around the wire. It should be tight at both ends.
Note! Adjust the heat shield if necessary.
Joining the Cables
Joining the cables

Connecting
see information about SRS cables: Refer to: Cable harness SRS system, repair See: Restraint
Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Air Bag Harness/Service and Repair/Procedures
Perform battery disconnection. Refer to: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
see information about cable terminals surface treatment. Refer to: Cable terminals surface
treatment See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Cable
Terminals Surface Treatment
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Engine Speed (RPM) Sensor
The engine speed (RPM) sensor provides the Engine Control Module (ECM) with information about
the speed and position of the crankshaft. The Engine Control Module (ECM) is able to use the
signal from the engine speed (RPM) sensor to determine when a piston is approaching top dead
center (TDC). However it is unable to use the signal from the engine speed (RPM) sensor to
determine whether the piston is in the combustion stroke or whether the exhaust valve is open
(exhaust stroke). The signal from the camshaft position (CMP) sensor is also required to determine
the operating cycle of the engine.
The signal from the engine speed (RPM) sensor is also used to check the engine for misfires. For
further information, see Misfire diagnostics.
Cars with manual transmissions have a series of holes drilled in the periphery of the flywheel. Cars
with automatic transmissions have a steel ring with punched holes. This steel ring is welded to the
edge of the carrier plate. In both cases, there is 6 degree between each hole. This arrangement
creates a hole for each tooth. There are 360 degree in one revolution, 6 degree between each hole
means that there are 60 holes. However one hole is not drilled/punched, to create a reference
position (tooth) for the crankshaft. This reference position is 72 degree before the top dead center
(TDC) of cylinder 1 on a 5 cylinder engine.
The engine speed (RPM) sensor is at the rear of the engine above the flywheel.
The sensor is inductive with a permanent magnet. An alternating current is induced in the sensor
when the flywheel/carrier plate passes the engine speed (RPM) sensor. The generated voltage and
frequency increases with the engine speed (rpm). The signal varies between 0.1 - 100 V depending
on the engine speed (RPM).
The Engine Control Module (ECM) is able to determine the engine speed (RPM) by counting the
number of holes per time unit. When the reference tooth passes the engine speed (RPM) sensor,
the voltage and frequency drop momentarily to zero, even though the engine is still running. This
allows the engine control module (ECM) to determine the position of the crankshaft.
The following applies to model year 2002 onwards: If the signal from the engine speed (RPM)
sensor is incorrect or missing, the control module will use the signals from the camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, on the condition that the position of the camshaft has been adapted and the car can
be driven if there is no signal.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the engine speed (RPM) sensor. The sensor value
(engine speed (rpm)) can be read off using VADIS/VIDA.
Page 1873
Steering wheel angle sensor module (SAS), replacing
Removal
Soundproofing panel
Remove the driver's side soundproofing panel.
Control module
backwards (see the arrow). Remove the connector and the cable.
Installation
The control module

Page 632
- Check the cables visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually". Use a voltmeter to take
readings at various points in the circuit while operating switches and sensors.
The voltmeter reading depends on the circuit being tested and the positions of switches and
sensors. Use the wiring diagram to determine the correct voltage in the circuit. Use an ohmmeter
between the suspect cables to detect short-circuits between them. The ohmmeter should read
infinite resistance between cables not connected to each other in the circuit. Shake the cable lightly
and pull on connectors during measurement to locate the damage. If the reading is not correct.
Replace the cable and/or continue according to "Loose Connections (Terminals)".
Loose Connections (Terminals)
Loose connections (terminals)
Repair wiring and cable terminals, using appropriate procedures.
Loose connections in terminals may be caused by oxidation of the pins and sockets, or by a faulty
connection of a cable to its cable terminal. Loose connections produce the same faults as an
intermittent open-circuit in a cable.
Checks:
- Inspect terminals visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually". Continue according to

"Contact Resistance and Oxidation".
Contact Resistance and Oxidation
Contact resistance and oxidation
In theory, the resistance across contacts, leads and terminals should be 0 [ohm]. However, there is
always some resistance due to terminal oxidation. If resistance is too great there will be function
problems. The magnitude of the resistance before it causes a malfunction depends on the circuit
load. A guideline would be a few ohms.
Page 475
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 238
- Install the cable in the holder for the control module. Press the connector into place.
- Reinstall the control module. Press the module into place until there is an audible click.
Ordering software Order software
Programming the steering wheel angle sensor module (SAS) Program the new control module
The soundproofing panel Install the driver's side soundproofing panel.

Page 1007
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the wiper switch
Other information:
and Repair.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 455
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1526
Carefully turn the pump in order to access the fuel hose (1).
Remove:
- the hose (1)
- the three connectors (2).
Carefully lift up the pump.
Note! Ensure that the level sensor arm is not obstructed. Do not bend the arm when removing the
pump.
Removing the level sensor
Page 1198
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 748
Check carefully that the seal is in place when the hatch is installed.
Open the vehicle's cable channel and lay down the cable harness. Close the cable channel.
The control module shall be placed in the spare wheel well's rear part on the right side, between
the two markings and below the bead of sealing compound. Remove the protective tape from the
self-adhesive Velcro fastener and install the control module. Plug in the connector from the cable
harness to the control module.
Vehicles with fuel pump module originally located in spare wheel well's right trailing edge.
Install:
- new control module
- the connector to the control module
- the luggage compartment mat/floor hatches

Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Relay
The air conditioning (A/C) relay supplies the A/C compressor with voltage. The relay is controlled
by the engine control module (ECM) based on information from different signals:
- the climate control module (CCM) (via the control area network (CAN))
- the engine coolant temperature
- the position of the accelerator pedal (AP)
- the pressure in the system.
The Engine Control Module (ECM) can temporarily disengage the A/C compressor during wide
open throttle (WOT) acceleration.
The relay is mechanical. It has a closing/breaking function and is supplied with power from the
system relay.
In the rest position the circuit in the relay is open.
The system relay supplies the coil and the relay with power. The relay activates when the coil is
grounded in the engine control module (ECM), the circuit closes and the A/C compressor is
supplied with power via the relay voltage output.
The relay coil is grounded (signal) when the engine control module (ECM) receives a signal via the
Controller area network (CAN) from the climate control module (CCM) to activate the relay and
start the compressor.
Page 146
Fuses 11C/14-20
Position Sensor, Camshaft, Intake Side

Page 881
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Page 1379
Tape the connector for the new sensor to the old sensor. Lower the car.
Removing the cable duct, right-hand side
Central Electrical Unit Engine Compartment
Relay Box: Service and Repair Central Electrical Unit Engine Compartment
Central electrical unit engine compartment, replacing
Removal
Preparatory work
correct.
- Disconnect the battery negative lead. Also see Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
- Remove the power steering fluid and coolant reservoirs. Lift up and move to one side
- Remove the cover from the central electrical unit
- Remove the engine control module (ECM) Engine control module (ECM), replacing, B5244T5,
B5254T2 See: Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management/Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems/Engine Control Module/Service and Repair. Remove the transmission control
module (TCM) Transmission control module (TCM), replacing, B5244T5, AW55-50/51SN,
B5254T2, AW55-50/51SN, B5254T2, AW50/51 AWD See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and
Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair.
Removing the central electrical unit

Page 968
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]

Page 1510
Fold the carpet (1) out of the way. Remove the insulation panel. Cover the area (2) around the
cover and between the doors with absorbent material.
Caution! Ensure that there is no risk of dirt getting into the tank.
Removing the cap over the left-hand level sensor

Page 932
VIDA
Other information
Page 526
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Unit
Electronic Throttle Unit
The electronic throttle unit, using the control signal from the engine control module (ECM),
regulates the amount of air for engine combustion. This is done using an electronic shutter.
The electronic throttle unit consists of a round throttle disc on a shaft. This is turned using a DC
motor (damper motor), gear wheel and two springs, an opening spring and a return spring. The
damper motor is controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and is supplied with power by an
integrated power stage in the control module. At one of the limit positions the throttle disc is closed
so that no air can pass the throttle unit. At the other limit position the throttle disc is parallel to the
air flow so that the air is able to freely pass through the throttle unit. The throttle disc shaft is
mechanically connected to two built-in potentiometers (position sensors) which are supplied with
power by the control module. The signals from the potentiometers provide the control module with
data about the position of the throttle disc. The electronic throttle unit has a connector with six gold
plated pins.
NOTE: A damaged terminal pin surface can interfere with the function
1. Current channels, potentiometers 2. Contact strips, potentiometers 3. Spring 4. Spring 5. Throttle
disc 6. Damper motor 7. Gear wheel 8. Gear sector 9. Connector.
The electronic throttle unit is located on the engine intake manifold.
In the event of a fault, the throttle unit must be replaced as a single unit.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the electronic throttle unit.
Page 746
Remove bracket for child seat from the floor. Use new bolt and nut. 1 pc. M10, tighten with 50 Nm.
1 pc. M12, tighten with 80 Nm.
Move aside the insulating mat.
Remove:
- right floor hatch over fuel tank
- the cable harness
Disconnect:
- cable harness' connectors by wheel housing/sill and fuel pump
- cable from brackets
Cut off the cable harness as shown. This is done to make it easier to remove the cable harness.
Remove the remaining part of the cable harness with connector.
Page 235
Check:
STC or not)
hydraulic modulator
Installation
Install the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator

Page 227
The table above summarizes input and output signals to and from the Steering wheel angle sensor
control module. The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial communication
and Controller area network (CAN) communication.
Design
Control module for the steering wheel angle sensor
After initiation, with the ignition key in position II and when the steering wheel is turned 4.5 degrees
in any direction, the control module for the steering wheel angle sensor continuously transmits
information about the steering wheel angle position to the brake control unit to calculate the driving
style of the driver. The brake control module was called ABS-control module up to and including
model year 2001.
Communication between the Steering wheel angle sensor control module and the brake control
module occurs on the high speed side of the Controller area network (CAN). The control module for
the steering wheel angle sensor is positioned on a bracket inside the central electronic module.
Page 1062
Signal Specification, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
Signal specification
General
Ullow, voltage close to 0 V. UIbat, battery voltage
Note! It is important to connect the breakout box and check the ground terminals before taking
readings.
Connector A
Position Sensor, Camshaft, Intake Side

Locations

Page 1381
Remove:
- the 2 screws (1)
- the inlet hose
- the hose clamp (2)
- the connector (3)
- the tie strap for the cable.
Remove the turbocharger (TC) control valve from the air cleaner (ACL) housing
Remove:
- the plastic nut on the wheel arch side
- the air cleaner (ACL) housing.

Replacing sensor cable, left-hand side
Insert a hand under the fuse box. Disconnect the cable from the clips on the brake cable. Pull up
the sensor until the connector for the new cable is up. Remove the tape and connect the connector.
Install the cable in the clips on the brake cable.
Caution! The yellow markings on the cables must be in the clip.
Raise the car.
Installation
Note! For tightening torques, see: Tightening torque See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Specifications/Tightening Torque.
Installing the sensor and the cable

Page 1070
- Check that the two springs (1) are in position
- Press the two connectors for the sender cables for the airbag into the steering wheel module.
Note! The wiring must be routed through the existing holder (2).
- Insert the two pins on the reverse of the steering wheel module in the two springs. Ensure that the
sender cables are unimpeded
- Press the steering wheel module into the mountings. Two clicks should be heard.
- Reconnect the battery negative lead.

Page 1543
trapped.
Finishing
Level Sensor, Replacing
Level sensor, replacing
Special tools:
correct.
Preparation
Page 1512
Remove:
- the ejector
- the connectors.
Installation
Installing the left-hand level sensor
Page 1400
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Replacing the Yaw Rate Sensor (2) (DSTC)
Replacing the yaw rate sensor (2) (DSTC)
Removal
Right front seat
Remove the protective cover (1) for the screws. Remove the 4 screws. Fold back the seat.
Yaw rate sensor (2)

Page 606

Page 1923
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Output Speed Sensor, Replacing
Transmission output speed sensor, replacing
Preparations

Remove the air cleaner housing ACL assembly with the intake pipe. Pull the air cleaner (ACL)
housing out of its mountings.
Removing the sensor

Glass Breakage Sensor, Left-Hand

Page 1254
- Take the long cable from the kit. Connect to the newly prepared connector
- Route the cable to the side of the car and to the rear under the sills along the existing cable
trunks. Continue in to the cargo compartment.
Applies to left-hand drive cars
- Route the cable along the rear crossmember and onwards to the parking assistance module
(PAM) at the left-hand wheel arch.
Making holes in the bumper
- Pre-drill the holes through the centre of the markings. Use a 3 mm (1/8") diameter drill bit
- Drill out the holes. Use a 8.5 mm (21/64") diameter drill bit.
- Make the holes in the bumper casing. Use a 31 mm (17/32") hole tool (P/N 9814069).
Making holes in the rear section

Page 1944
- temperature-/pressure sensor as above
- The O-ring from the throttle valve seat in the coupling housing.
Installation
Components which are included in the kit and must be replaced
Temperature-/pressure sensor with O-ring. Washer. O-ring for the throttle valve seat.
Installing the included components
Install:
- Differential electronic module (DEM)
- the seal plate
- the washer
- the throttle plate with the O-rings
- temperature-/pressure sensor with the O-rings
- the screws.
The O-ring for the throttle valve seat is installed separately.
Placing the sealing plate in the control module

Locations

Page 1171

Page 1545
Push the carpet to one side.
Remove:
- the insulation panel
- the cover (2).
Removing the fuel pump (FP)

Page 1907
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing the gear-shift position sensor
Removal

Removing the gear selector cable and connector

Locations

Page 1017
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Information

------------------------
Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Switches lights, replacing
Removal
Light switches assembly
- Ignition off
- Remove the fuse panel cover
- Press out the light switch from behind.
Bulb
- Remove the light switch
- Twist counter-clockwise using a small screwdriver. Remove the holder and bulb.
Installation
Bulb and light switch
In reverse order.
Comfort Panel (Including Climate Control Module, CCM),
Replacing
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Comfort Panel (Including Climate Control Module,
CCM), Replacing
Comfort panel (including climate control module, CCM), replacing
Preparations
Note! Read off data from the control module before replacing the control module. This is carried out
via VIDA vehicle communication. After replacing the control module, the relevant parameters must
be programmed into the new control module.
Replacing dashboard environment panel
Ignition off. Remove the key.
Note! After the key has been removed: Wait 3 minutes before starting work.
V70
V70 has a pen holder above the gear selector panel. Remove it. See Pen holder See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Pen Holder. Remove the panel (1) above the
gear selector: Carefully pry off at the back using a weatherstrip tool.
S80
Remove the panel (1) above the gear selector: Carefully pry off at the back using a weatherstrip
tool.
Note! The gear selector must be in the rearmost position before the comfort panel can be removed.
Page 662
Tool
remove the primary lock, as illustrated. Pull the cable carefully backwards.
Page 631
If the reading is not correct. Replace the cable and/or continue according to "Contact Resistance
and Oxidation". Always check the control module and control module box connectors to ensure that
their pins and sockets are not bent or damaged, this may cause faults. Check pins and terminals
particularly carefully.
Short-Circuit to Ground, Intermittent Faults
Short-circuit to ground, intermittent faults
A short-circuit between a live cable and ground is often indicated by the loss of a function or a fuse
blowing when a current is passed through the cable. Repair wiring and cable terminals as required,
using appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Check the cables visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually". Activate all switches and
sensors in the circuit. Check whether the fuse blows.
- Disconnect the connectors in the circuit to ensure that they do not affect readings.
Connect an ohmmeter between cable and ground. The ohmmeter should read infinite resistance if
no components are connected. Shake the cable lightly and pull on connectors during measurement
to locate the damage. If the value is not correct, try a new cable and/or continue according to
"Contact Resistance and Oxidation".
Short-Circuit to Supply Voltage. Intermittent Faults
Short-circuit to supply voltage, intermittent faults
A short-circuit between a cable and supply voltage is often indicated by the loss of a function or a
fuse blowing when a current is passed through the cable.

Page 1327

Page 1177
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 2034
16/60 Integrated Mobile Telephone PHM
16/62 Hand Unit, Mobile Phone
16/64 Antenna, Mobile Telephone
16/65 Antenna Ring/Ignition Switch Lighting
16/67 Amplifier Antenna, Bumper

Page 858
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
unit.
- To access cruise control switch unit, see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
no - Checking the wires and components
-------------------------------------------------

Page 802
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1884
Note! It is essential that the acceleration sensors are installed with the soft side facing downwards
and are securely fixed in the vehicle. Otherwise movement may result in incorrect values being
returned to the system, with poorer driving characteristics, when cornering for example, as a result.

Align the new acceleration sensor. Install the M6 screw. Route and secure the cable for the new
acceleration sensor following the old cable. Remove the old cable. Connect the connector. Test the
function.
Page 759
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Intake (turbocharged Engines Only, 2002-2004)
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor detects the pressure in the intake manifold
downstream of the charge air cooler (CAC). The signal from the sensor is primarily used by the
engine control module (ECM) to check that the correct boost pressure is reached. The boost
pressure is governed by the turbocharger (TC) control valve.
The sensor, which is a piezo resistor, is grounded in the control module and supplied with 5 V from
the control module.
The resistance in the sensor changes depending on the pressure in the intake manifold, giving a
signal of 0 - 5 V. Low pressure results in low voltage, high pressure in high voltage.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. The
signal can be read using VADIS/VIDA.
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor is in the intake hose for the throttle body (TB).
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor, Intake (turbocharged Engines Only, 2005-)
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor detects the pressure in the intake manifold
downstream of the charge air cooler (CAC). On 6 cylinder turbocharged engines and B5254T2/-T4,
the temperature of the intake air is also detected.
Pressure sensor The signal from the sensor is primarily used by the engine control module (ECM)
to check that the correct boost pressure is reached. The boost pressure is governed by the
turbocharger (TC) control valve.
The sensor, which is a piezo resistor, is grounded in the control module and supplied with 5 V from
the control module.
The resistance in the sensor changes depending on the pressure in the intake manifold, giving a
signal of 0 - 5 V. Low pressure results in low voltage, high pressure in high voltage.
charge air cooler (CAC). This data is used by the engine control module (ECM)
Page 773
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 1025
- Ignition on.
This function is used to read off the diagnostic data from the control module in thebackground. If
the VIDA log function is activatedwhilethe read out is taking place, all data that is read off will be
logged. The VIDA log function allows logs to be saved or read off for example. This makes it easier
to analyze data or to include the log files in a report for example.
- VIDA log function activated (log status on).

Note! If this has not already been done, exit this procedure. Select vehicle profile and set the
logging status to On.
If the VIDA log function is already activated and has previously logged other activities which are not
required, exit this procedure and log off VIDA. The existing log can then be removed. Delete the log
and close it. Then log on to VIDA again.
Do you want to start reading off? The data read off starts automatically when YES is selected.
Yes - Reading off diagnostic data
No - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Reading off diagnostic data
Continue - Finishing the read off
-------------------------------------------------
Page 598
16/1
16/2 Amplifier
16/3-4 Right/Left Hand Front Door Speaker
16/10-11 Horn, Horn 2

Page 220
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Replacing the Control Module for ABS and
Dynamic Stability and Traction Control (DSTC)
Replacing the control module for ABS and dynamic stability and traction control (DSTC)
Preparation
Disconnect the battery lead
See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and

Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting.
Remove the air cleaner (ACL) housing
Unit, Replacing.
Remove the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit
See Replacing the brake pipe between the hydraulic unit, front wheel and junction , B5254T2 See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Replacing the
Brake Pipe Between the Hydraulic Unit, Front Wheel and Junction.
Removal
Remove the control module
Remove:
Carefully lift the control module.
Check the control module

Locations

Page 27
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 370
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 967
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Contact Reel
Checking the contact reel
Disconnect the contact reel from the steering wheel module (SWM). Take resistance readings
between terminals #B2 and #B3. The resistance must be infinite. Check the cable between terminal
#B1 and contact reel terminal #1. Check for an open-circuit. Check the cable between terminal #B2
and contact reel terminal #2. Check for an open-circuit. Check the cable between terminal #B3 and
contact reel terminal #3. Check for an open-circuit. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- For information about signals, see Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
- To access or replace the contact reel, see Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing
Page 1237
Navigation Function Selector Switch: Service and Repair Switches RTI (Road Traffic Information),
Replacing
Switches RTI (road traffic information), replacing
Removal
- Remove the steering wheel module
- Remove the keypad
- Remove the two screws from the mounting bracket
- Press the keypad out of the steering wheel cover.
Installation

Page 1246
Connect the connector to the control module for the back-up (reversing) warning system (ensure
that it is secure). Install the control module for the back-up (reversing) warning system. Reinstall
the side panel. Check the function.
Page 2014
10/44-45,51-52 RH Tail Light Lamp, Lamp 2, LH Tail Light Lamp, Lamp 2
10/46-53 Fog Light, Right/Left Rear
10/47-54 Right/Left Rear Direction Indicator
10/48-55 RH and LH Reversing Light
10/64 Right-Hand High Beam

Page 2019
Fuses 11B/11-23
11B
11C/no. Fuses In Passenger Compartment

Page 1693
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Temperature and
Pressure Sensors, Replacing
correct.
Installing the temperature and pressure sensors
Install a new sensor.

Page 933
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 216
Function test
Warning! No ABS, stability and traction control functions are available when there is
communication with the Brake control module (BCM) (Volvo Diagnostics are activated). ABS
warning lamp flashes for as long as the diagnostics are activated. To cancel the diagnostics before
test driving the vehicle, the ignition must be switched off!
See: Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Page 356
kit.
- Reconnect the towbar wiring connector.
Finishing work
- Reinstall the panel, the storage boxes and the floor hatches according to points 1-5.
Applies to the XC90
- Tighten the screws for the load securing eyelets. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lbf. ft).
Illustration A
Checking the 7-pin connector:
Illustration B
Checking the 13-pin connector:

Page 1996

Page 620
7/129 Through 10/52

Page 1521
position
Page 1628
- Squeeze the mounting hooks together on the switch. Press the switch out.
Replace bulbs
- Remove switch
- Remove the bulb.
Installation
Bulb and light switch
- Place the switch in the hole in the ventilation housing and press into place
- Press the ventilation housing into position in the instrument panel.
Note! Check that the seal for the ventilation housing is intact. Replace if damaged.Check through
the grille that the pipe for the ventilation housing aligns with the pipe from the climate control unit.
Page 125
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1578
- Ignition off
- Key out.
Check the cable between central electronic module (CEM) connector terminal #B1 (#A21) and
ignition switch connector terminal #3 (#S). Check for a short-circuit to battery voltage.
Other information
- To access the ignition switch, see Steering wheel lock, replacing See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Steering Column Lock/Service and Repair
Locations
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 519
Note!
- Steps 1 - 16 apply to S60 and S80.
- Steps 17 - 39 apply to V70.
Applies to S60 and S80

Page 1941
- the temperature/pressure sensor as above
- the O-ring from the throttle valve seat in the coupling housing.
Installation
Installing components
Install:
- control module
- the sealing plate
- washer
- the throttle valve with O-rings
- the O-ring for the throttle valve seat
- the screws.
Components that are included in the kit and must be replaced
- washer
- the O-ring for the throttle valve seat.
Position the sealing plate in the control module Press the throttle valve and temperature/pressure
sensor into place on the control module contacts. Place the cupped washer with the convex side
against the temperature/pressure sensor. Lubricate the sealing rings on the valves with oil, P/N 116
1641-4 (0.3 liters).

Page 1573
Page 1377
Page 456
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 1113

Page 587
Fuses 11C/1-8
Page 637
Connector door, see Connector door, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Type 5
Sealed connectors occur in a number of variants with different numbers of conductors. See
Connector sealed, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Sealed Connector Type 1
Page 738

Page 1043
Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
Special tools:
951 1463 Adapter 22-16-14 pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1463 Adapter 22-16-14 Pin 951
1428 Breakout box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428 Breakout Box 951 1508 Adapter 10-7-5
pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1508 Adapter 10-7-5 Pin
- Ignition off
- Expose the steering wheel module (SWM) according to Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing
See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair.
pins. Connect adapter951 1463 Adapter 22-16-14 pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1463 Adapter
22-16-14 Pin to the control module connector (wiring side). Connect the breakout box 951 1428
Breakout box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428 Breakout Box to the adapter. steering wheel
module (SWM) terminals #A1-#A22 correspond to #1-#22 on the breakout box. If the contact reel is
to be checked, connect adapter951 1508 Adapter 10-7-5 pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1508
Adapter 10-7-5 Pin to breakout box951 1428 Breakout box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428
Breakout Box. Contact reel terminals #B1-#B5 correspond to #26-#30 on the breakout box. The
breakout box is designed to facilitate reading off the control module input and output signals when
the control module is connected; and the cable and component resistance when the control module
is disconnected. The use of a breakout box reduces the risk of accidental short-circuited cables
and damage to the connector pins. For further information about signals and other values, see
Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Signal Specification, Steering
Wheel Module (SWM).
Parameter, Digital Display
Parameter, digital display

Hint: If certain values are to be updated, the engine should be running.
Page 1209
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 8
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 827
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Description and Operation Function
Function
Controlling functions and menu selection using the steering wheel buttons
See:
- Design and Function, audio module (AUM). Applies to S60, V70, V70XC/XC70 and S80
- Design and Function, audio module (AUD). Applies to XC90
- Design and Function, Road traffic information system (RTI). Applies to S60, V70, V70XC/XC70
and S80
- Design and Function, multimedia module (MMM). Applies to XC90
- Design and Function, engine management system
- Design and Function, phone module (PHM).
Controlling the headlamps and turn signal lamps
See Design and Function, central electronic module (CEM).
Horn
Windshield wiper and washer functions
Trip computer and displaying/erasing text messages
The left-hand control stalk is used to control the trip computer and to display and erase text
messages in the driver information module (DIM) (5/1). The steering wheel module (SWM) (3/130)
transmits information to the driver information module (DIM) on the Control area network (CAN)
indicating which function is selected. The trip computer menu is controlled using the ring on the
left-hand control stalk. Turn the ring forwards or backwards to scroll through the menu one step at
a time. Some menu selections, such as average speed and fuel consumption, can be reset using
the RESET button. Error messages displayed in the driver information module display are erased
using the READ button. For additional information about the trip computer and text messages, see
Design and Function, driver information module (DIM).
Page 839
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking Contact Reel
Checking contact reel
Disconnect contact reel from SWM control unit. Check resistance between B1 and B2. The
resistance should be infinite. Check resistance between B1 and B3. The resistance should be
infinite. Check resistance between B2 and B3. The resistance should be infinite. Check wire B1
between contact reel 1 for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals.
Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Check wire B2 between
contact reel 2 for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault
See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Check wire B3 between contact reel 3
for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Do the necessary corrective action.
- For information on signals, see Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
- To connect a test box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
- To access/replace the contact reel, see Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing.
Page 148
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 1612
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1034
Reading Off the Control Module ID
Activate read out of control unit id by clicking on the symbol for VCT 2000.
Control unit identification
The information that is read out identifies the hardware and software version of the control unit and
its diagnostic status.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1883
Acceleration Sensor: Service and Repair Acceleration Sensor Suspension Front (Four-C),
Replacing
Acceleration sensor suspension front (Four-C), replacing

correct.
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Raise the car.
Remove the M6 screw. Leave the acceleration sensor hanging from its cable.
Page 1572
Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Check the Key Sensor In the Ignition Switch
Check the key sensor in the ignition switch
Checking the key sensor signal
- Ignition off.
Check the voltage in the central electronic module (CEM) connector, terminal #B1 (#A21). The
voltage must be battery voltage. Remove the key from the ignition switch. The voltage must now be
approximately 0 V.
Other information
- To access or replace the central electronic module (CEM) connector, see Central electronic
module (CEM), replacing See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control
Module/Service and Repair/Central Electronic Module (CEM), Replacing
- To connect the breakout box to the control module, see Connecting the breakout box See: Body
and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic
Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box/Connecting the Breakout Box, Central Electronic Module
(CEM)
Page 576
8/62 Belt Tensioner Igniter, Rear Center Seat
8/64 Solenoid Valve, Engine Mounting
8/66 - 67 Left/Right Hand inflatable Curtain Igniter
8/71 - 74 Throttle Solenoid, Shift Solenoid 3, 4, 5

Page 2020
Fuses 11C/1-8
Page 1009
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
and Repair.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 1451
Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Replacing the Oil Pressure Sensor
Replacing the oil pressure sensor
Removing the oil pressure sensor
Remove the hose from the charge air pipe.
Remove:
- the connector from the oil pressure sensor
- the oil pressure sensor. Use a long 24 mm socket.
Place paper underneath in case of oil leakage.

Installing the oil pressure sensor
Page 35

Page 134

Page 998
Checking the steering wheel module (SWM)
Before continuing with fault-tracing, the following must be checked:
- All tests for the relevant symptom must have been carried out
- No component, connector or wiring faults etc. should have been detected.
Have all tests been carried out and no faults detected?
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 510
Remove the 2 screws.
Hint: The soundproofing panel sits in a groove at the pedal box.
Remove the soundproofing panel by pulling it straight down and back.
Removing the central electronic module (CEM)

Steering Angle Sensor: Description and Operation
Control Module for the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
System Overview
Control module
1. Control module for the steering wheel angle sensor 2. Steering wheel angle sensor 3. Reference
groove 4. Encoder for steering movements.
Only cars equipped with DSTC (dynamic stability and traction control) have a steering wheel angle
sensor control module. The easiest way to determine if a car is equipped with DSTC (Dynamic
stability and traction control) is to search for a switch, marked DSTC, positioned in the panel on the
climate control module.
The Steering wheel Angle Sensor Module is positioned on the side of the central electronic module.
The only function of the steering wheel angle sensor is to process the signals from the steering
wheel angle sensor. The signals used by the DSTC system. The steering wheel angle sensor is
mounted on the steering wheel module and is directly connected to the steering angle sensor via a
connector on the steering wheel module. The Steering wheel angle sensor control module
transmits signal information via the high-speed side of the Controller area network (CAN) to the
brake control module, model year 2002- or the ABS control module, model year 1999-2001.
If a fault occurs the control module for the steering angle sensor detects this and a diagnostic
trouble code (DTC) is stored at the same time as the DSTC function is switched off.
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored in the control module for the steering wheel angle sensor.
This information can be read off using the diagnostic tool via the data link connector (DLC) in the
car.
Signals for the control module for the steering wheel angle sensor
Page 249
Test run the heater. Check the function of the heater. See Engine coolant heater, test running See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Auxiliary Cabin Heater/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Engine Coolant Heater, Test Running. Check that no diagnostic trouble codes
(DTC) have been stored during the repair work.
Install:
- the two upper screws (as illustrated) and the center screw on the left hand slide mounting
- the bumper cover. See (S80), Casing, bumper front, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair (V70), Casing,
bumper front, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair (V70XC) or Casing, bumper front, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair (S60)
- the air baffle
- the battery lead. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and
Page 1478
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Temperature sensor, evaporator, replacing
Temperature sensor, evaporator, replacing
Removal Left-hand drive cars
- Remove the soundproofing panel on the driver's side. See Soundproofing panel, replacing See:
Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Soundproofing Panel, Replacing
- Pull off the temperature sensor
- Disconnect the connector from the sensor
- work the sensor loose.
Installation
In reverse order.
Removal Right-hand drive cars
Wipers/Washers - Rain Sensor Function/Limitations
Rain Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Rain Sensor Function/Limitations
NO: 36-38 DATE: 10-27-2004 MODEL: S60/V70/XC70/S80/XC90 (MY03-04). SUBJECT: Rain
Sensor Function. REFERENCE: Owners manual, VADIS - Design and Function, Sect 36, UEM.
This Tech Note supersedes the previous TNN 36-38 dated 2-4-03. Please update your files.
Description
This Tech Note is intended to provide functional features, how to operate and what the limitations
of the Rain Sensor are.
Rain Sensor Function
The rain sensor is a very convenient feature when used as intended.
However, its operation can be confusing as it has been reported in its first two model years
(MY2003-2004). It also has some limitations and some important functionality features.
In order to achieve high customer satisfaction on vehicles equipped with rain sensors, it is very
important that customers driving a rain sensor equipped car of MY2003-04 understand how to
operate and are aware of the limitations of the feature.
1) Activation
On MY 2003-04 cars, the rain sensor replaced the intermittent function. The rain sensor function is
activated by putting the column stalk in the rain sensor position (similar to the intermittent wiping
position on cars without rain sensor). This may be confusing to owners with previous Volvo
experience. It also limits the performance and functionality of the wiper system when the rain
sensor has not been activated properly.
2) De-activation and re-activation - Important!
The rain sensor must be re-activated each time the ignition has been turned off.
On MY 2003-2004 cars this is done by moving the column stalk to another position and back to the
rain sensor position. If the column stalk on a MY 2003-2004 car with rain sensor has been left in
the rain sensor position, there will be no wiper function at all when the car is started. This could be
confusing since there is no indication of the sensor being on or off.
To directly activate the wipers the stalk must be moved to one of the two continuous-wiping
positions. To reactivate the rain sensor, the stalk must be moved to any other position and back to
the rain sensor position.
A customer with a rain-sensor-equipped car should be aware of this, preferably make a habit of
returning the column stalk to the 0 position each time he or she leaves the car, to make sure the
rain sensor is correctly reactivated at the next time of use.
3) Sensitivity and thumbwheel settings
The rain sensor is sensitive to lighting conditions, and the sensitivity may change at dusk/dawn and
at night. The thumbwheel sensitivity adjustment is there to compensate for this, as well as to adjust
to different customer preferences.
4) Confirmation wiper strokes
Upon activation the rain sensor always immediately makes one stroke of the wipers to confirm the
activation. Also when the sensitivity is increased by turning the thumbwheel clockwise there will
always be one immediate stroke to help the driver quickly clear the field of view.
5) Limitations - Important!
The rain sensor function might not work properly under following conditions:
^ Worn wiper blades.
^ Icing, salt or other substances smearing on the windshield.
^ Dirt, scratches, or other items in the sensor's field of view.
The critical area is the sensor area on the windshield in front of the inner rear view mirror foot, see
pictures of location of the sensor.
Page 1169
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 883
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 1210
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 315
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 832
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------

Page 1580
Yes - Verification
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing the ignition switch

Page 1068
- the connector (2) for the horn and the keypads
- the three screws (3). Lift out the horn (4).
Applies to cars with pre-routed wiring
- Press in the catch (1) on the connector for the right dummy button
- Remove the connector from the dummy button.
- Remove the screw (1) in the dummy button on the right hand side of the horn
- Press in the catch (2). At the same time pull the dummy button from its socket. Place to one side.
If there is pre-routed wiring, continue to applicable procedure.
Note! If there is no pre-routed connector the horn must be replaced. A new one is in the kit.
- Remove the screw (1) in the dummy button on the left hand side of the horn
- Press in the catch (2). At the same time pull the dummy button from its socket.
Note! Keep the dummy button. The dummy button will be reused.
Page 1072
Disconnect the two connectors (1) for the ignition cables in the airbag. Remove the steering wheel
module.
Installing the steering wheel module
Install:
In reverse order.
Note! Ensure that the wiring is not trapped during installation.
To adjust the steering wheel, see Steering wheel, replacing See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel, Replacing.
Locations
Steering Column Control Module: Locations

Page 1592
Press the temperature sensor in the door mirror.
Finishing work
XC70
Remove the door mirror. See Rearview mirror, replacing See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and
Repair/Rearview Mirror, Replacing. V70 2000-, S60
Install the door mirror. See Replacing the mirror See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and
Repair/Door Mirror, Replacing.
Model years 2004-
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Remove the door mirror. See Door mirror, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair.
Removal
Remove the temperature sensor using a screwdriver as illustrated
Remove:
- the connector
- the terminal pins from the connector
- the temperature sensor.
Installation
Page 992
- Ignition off.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1882
Remove the M8 screw. Disconnect the connector.
Installation
Note! It is essential that the acceleration sensors are installed with the connector facing upwards
and is secure in the vehicle. Otherwise movement may result in incorrect values being returned to
the system, with poorer driving characteristics, when cornering for example, as a result.

Install the M8 screw. Connect the connector.
Finishing work
Install the hatch in the side panel. Test the function.

Page 1056
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Locations

Page 437
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 671
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Type 6
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 931
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet

(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
Page 2004
7/149 Rain Sensor
7/164 Sensor Module DSTC

Page 1052
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - digital display

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 925
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1367

Page 1704
7/153 Sensor, Fuel Level LPG

Page 736
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 2049
How to use the wiring diagram
The descriptions below apply in general to all wiring diagram information, although not all sections
are necessarily contained in this information.
A. Component designation
Every component has a component designation that consists of two parts.

Page 1976
3/1 Ignition Switch
3/9 Brake Light Contact

Page 2017
Fuses 11A/1-8
11A/X
11B/no. Fuses In Engine Compartment

Page 243
Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Description and Operation
Engine Cooling Fan (FC)/Engine Cooling Fan (FC) Control Module
The engine cooling fan (FC) has two functions. One is to cool the engine compartment, the other is
to cool the condenser when the air conditioning (A/C) compressor is working.
The engine control module (ECM) transmits a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal to the engine
cooling fan (FC) control module. The control module then activates the fan at different speeds. The
speed of the engine cooling fan (FC) is determined by the engine control module (ECM),
depending on the coolant temperature (based on the signal from the engine coolant temperature
(ECT) sensor) and the vehicle speed.
The temperature conditions for engagement of the different engine cooling fan (FC) stages may
vary slightly, depending on the engine variant and the equipment level.
The temperature conditions apply when:
- the A/C is off
- no faults are detected by the Engine Control Module (ECM).
WARNING: The engine cooling fan (FC) may start itself for some time after the engine has been
switched off. This is normal.
The engine cooling fan (FC) and its control module are behind the radiator.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the engine cooling fan (FC). The fan can be
activated using VADIS/VIDA.
Page 51
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Reading off audio module diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)

2 - Checking communication problems
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
Page 1916
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor/Output Speed Sensor,
Replacing
Input speed sensor/output speed sensor, replacing
Removal
Preparations
1. The intake manifold 2. The hose from the mass air flow (MAF) sensor 3. Connector.
Pull the air cleaner (ACL) housing out of its mountings.
Removing the cable harness
Remove the mounting for the cable harness from the cover for the control system. Unhook the
mounting with the connectors for the cable harness from the bracket for the air cleaner (ACL)
housing. Remove the tie straps from the cable harness. Separate the connectors for the
transmission output speed sensor and the transmission input speed sensor. Unhook the
connectors from the mounting. Clean thoroughly around the sensors. Remove the sensors and the
cable harness.
Installation
Page 836
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 76
Attempt New Test - Connecting the breakout box
-------------------------------------------------
Reading the User Information, AUM
Reading the user information
Reading the user information, AUM

- Ignition on.
- If the audio unit is equipped with a cassette player: insert a tape and select cassette deck with the
"SOURCE" knob.
- If the audio unit is equipped with a CD player: insert a CD and select CD with the "SOURCE"
knob.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a CD changer: insert a CD in the CD changer and select CD
Changer with the "SOURCE" knob.
- If the audio unit is equipped with an MD player: insert an MD and select MD with the "SOURCE"
knob
Activate user information read-out by clicking on the VCT 2000 symbol.
- For more information about user information, see AUM diagnostic functions See: Description and
Operation/AUM Diagnostic Functions.
Acceleration Sensor Bodywork Front (Four-C), Replacing
Acceleration Sensor: Service and Repair Acceleration Sensor Bodywork Front (Four-C), Replacing
Acceleration sensor bodywork front (Four-C), replacing

correct.
Location
The front acceleration sensors are under the headlamps. See the illustration.
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Raise the car.
Remove the M10 nut.

Page 213
Disconnect the connector from the control module. Press the catch and pull up the connector. Pull
the connector up a maximum of 90 ° (any more and the connector will break). Pull the connector up
from the control module.

Page 1054
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - digital display
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Selecting car model
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Page 797
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 189
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 903
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Trailer Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection
-------------------------------------------------
Locations

Page 309
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 907
Select Continue when the fault has been remedied.
-------------------------------------------------
Verification
Page 595
Fuses 11E/1-7
15/30 Connecting Rail to 15/31
15/31 Engine Compartment Distribution Box
15/31A1
Page 1904
Remove the screws from the bracket for the gear selector cables.
Detach the cable from the lever. Use special tool 999 7077 Jimmy bar See: Tools and
Equipment/999 7077 Jimmy Bar. Remove the cable from the bracket. Move the cable to one side.
Checking the setting

Page 980
-------------------------------------------------
Activate reset button on indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read and reset button gave a correct result the fault is not in the
indicator switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Page 127
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 1534
Install the left-hand level sensor on the ejector. Install the connectors on the underside of the
left-hand level sensor. Install a new O-ring. Lubricate the new O-ring. Use petroleum jelly. Press
the left level sensor down so that the row of protruding cables runs along the vehicle. Check that
the O-ring is not trapped. Install the screw. Use 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999
5720 Wrench. Tighten. See: Tightening torque See: Specifications/Mechanical
Specifications/Starting and Charging. Position the wiring in the cut-out in the rubber ring. Wipe up
any fuel spillage.
Page 395
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 453
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 472
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 553
4/50 Electronic Throttle Module ETM

Page 1149
DTC
Note!
NOTE!

JOURNAL DATED 06- 15-2010. DEM 0006 has been added to the DTC table in TIE. PLEASE
UPDATE YOUR FILES.
DESCRIPTION:
The DEM Upgrades in the attached document are available to correct the complaints / symptoms
SERVICE: If the vehicle fits in the model year or chassis range for the symptom in the attachment
download a DEM Upgrade.

Page 72
-------------------------------------------------
Verification
Page 1274
- Insert a screwdriver in the hole on the reverse of the steering wheel, at right angles to the rear
surface of the steering wheel
- Insert a screwdriver as far as possible to determine the position of the end of the spring clip (1)
- Position the end of the screwdriver on top of the spring clip
- Pry the screwdriver upwards towards the upper edge of the hole (2) until the spring releases and
one side of the steering wheel module springs out and releases from the mounting
- Turn the steering wheel 180°. Carry out the procedure on the other side
- Turn the steering wheel to the neutral position.
- Fold the steering wheel module out
- Remove the two connectors (1) for the sender wiring on the airbag.
Note! The connectors are tightly secured. Do not use tools to disconnect the connectors.
- Place the steering wheel module to one side.
Remove:
- the screw (1). Remove the ground lead
- the connector (2) for the horn and the keypads

Page 1504
Checking floats and wiring
Check that the floats for the fuel levels sensors have not stuck. Check the cable inside the fuel tank
between the two sensors. Check for a short-circuit to supply voltage. Check for a short-circuit to
ground. Check for an open-circuit. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access or replace the fuel level sensor (left-hand side), see Level sensor fuel tank, replacing
See: Service and Repair
- To access or replace the fuel level sensor (right-hand side), see Level sensor, fuel tank,
right-hand/fuel tank, replacing See: Service and Repair/Level Sensor, Fuel Tank/Fuel Pump,
Replacement
Page 1129
Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic
Functions
Transmission control module (TCM) diagnostic functions General
The control module has a built-in diagnostic system, the Volvo on-board diagnostic (OBD) system.
This system continuously monitors its own system and the input and output signals.
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
The control module will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if it detects a fault. If a fault
disappears for any reason after the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been permanently stored in
the control module, information about the fault remains stored in the control module.
Reading and erasing diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
trouble codes (DTCs) can only be erased when all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have been
read at least once.
Reading off input and output signals
Using this function, the status of the control module input and output signals can be continuously
read off. For further information about parameters, see Description of parameters
Activating components
This function allows components to be activated so that their functions can be checked. For further
information about activations, see Description of activations
Reading off the control module identification
VADIS identifies the control modules by reading off a number of codes from the control module
memory. The codes contain the following information about the control module: -
the hardware P/N (control modules without software)
- the hardware serial number (control modules without software)

- the software P/N
- the diagnostic software P/N

Page 752
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 417
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 1200
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 147
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 1782
Remove the gear selector from the lever and the cable mounting from the transmission. Unhook
the mounting with the connector for the transmission from the bracket for the air cleaner (ACL)
housing. Remove the tie straps for the cable harness and the mounting in the cover for the control
system. Separate the connector for the gear-shift position sensor. Remove the gear-shift position
sensor from the mounting.
Removing the gear-shift position sensor
Remove:
- the lever for the gear shift linkage rod
- the nut, locking washer and rubber seal securing the gear-shift position sensor to the gear shift
linkage rod
- the 2 screws
- the gear-shift position sensor.
Installation
Installing the gear-shift position sensor
Install:
- the sensor. Lightly tighten the 2 screws
- the rubber washer, the lock washer and the nut on the sensor.
Tighten the nut. Lock the nut with the locking washer.
Page 68
Vehicle Communication Information, Audio Module (AUM)
Description of reading extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information
Contents

Page 1593
Route the cable for the temperature sensor to the connector.
Install:
- the cable terminals in the connector
- the connector
- the temperature sensor in the door mirror
- the door mirror. See Door mirror, replacing See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair.
Page 977
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 82
Audio control module (cable between the audio module and the CD changer/navigation unit)
External amplifier
10CD changer
Page 971
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 549
3/117 Ceiling Light Switch Unit
3/121 Climate Control Switch, Defroster
3/122
Outside Temperature Sensor Door Mirror, Replacing
Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Outside Temperature Sensor Door
Mirror, Replacing
Outside temperature sensor door mirror, replacing
Note! For model years 2004- (S60, S80 and V70 2000- except XC70 and XC90) see Model years
2004-.
Removal
Preparatory work
correct.
Ignition off.
XC70
Remove the door mirror. See Rearview mirror, replacing See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and
Repair/Rearview Mirror, Replacing. V70 2000-, S60
Remove the door mirror. See Replacing the mirror See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and
Repair/Door Mirror, Replacing.
Removing the outside temperature sensor
- Remove the temperature sensor using a screwdriver as illustrated
- Disconnect the terminal pin from connector
- Remove the temperature sensor.
Installation
Installing the outside temperature sensor
Route the cable for the temperature sensor to the connector. Install the terminal pin in the
connector.
Page 1023
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) up button is depressed. Not activated
Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) down button, status
This value indicates whether the RTI down button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) enter button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) enter button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) reset button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) reset button is depressed. Not
activated Activated
Windscreen washer, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the washer position. Not
activated Activated
High speed position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the high speed position. Not
activated Activated
Low speed position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the low speed position. Not
activated Activated
Intermittent position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the intermittent position. Not
activated Activated
Single sweep position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the single sweep position.
Not activated Activated
Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module, Description
Frozen values steering wheel module, description
Explanation
Not all the parameters described need to be implemented in the control module. This varies from
system to system. Frozen values are parameter values that are stored when a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) is stored.
Battery voltage, value
Measurement range: 0-28.4 V Normal value when the generator (GEN) is charging: 13.0-14.5 V
Left Fuel Gauge Sensor
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Left Fuel Gauge Sensor
Left fuel gauge sensor
Removal
Preparation
- Remove rear seat as described in Rear seat assembly See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Rear Seat Assembly
- Remove insulation
- Fold floor mat in boot under.
Fuel gauge sensor
- Remove level sensor cover
- Disconnect connector
- Loosen level sensor lock ring using special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999
5720 Wrench
- Remove level sensor. It is easier if the fuel pipe bends upwards through the hole
- Disconnect the 2 connectors from the level sensor
- Loosen tube system by pressing release button down
- Remove level sensor.

Page 1676
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Position sensor camshaft, replacing
Disconnect the connector from the sensor.
Remove:
- the sensor.

Page 1067
- Turn the steering wheel 90° so that is in the position illustrated and so that the two holes on the
reverse of the steering wheel are accessible.
- Insert a screwdriver in the hole on the reverse of the steering wheel, at right angles to the rear
surface of the steering wheel
- Insert a screwdriver as far as possible to determine the position of the end of the spring clip (1)
- Position the end of the screwdriver on top of the spring clip
- Pry the screwdriver upwards towards the upper edge of the hole (2) until the spring releases and
one side of the steering wheel module springs out and releases from the mounting
- Turn the steering wheel 180°. Carry out the procedure on the other side
- Turn the steering wheel to the neutral position.
- Fold the steering wheel module out
- Remove the two connectors (1) for the sender wiring on the airbag.
Note! The connectors are tightly secured. Do not use tools to disconnect the connectors.
- Place the steering wheel module to one side.
Remove:
- the screw (1). Remove the ground lead

Page 2054
10/53 Through C1-6

Page 1981
3/113 Switch, Foldable Head Restraint

Page 1218

Page 1452
Install:
- the new pressure sensor
- the connector
- the hose on the charge air pipe.

Navigation System - Various Malfunctions
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Various Malfunctions
TIE - Technical Journal
Title: New SW upgrade disc for RTI, MMM, MMM+, and MMM2 available
Ref No: US15493.10.2 en-GB
Issuer: -
Partner: 3 US 7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group: 3972 Func Desc road navigation
Status: Released
Status Date: 2010-06-03
Issue date: 2010-06-03
Reference:
Attachment Vehicle Type
CSC
DTC
Text
This RTJ supersedes the previous one dated June 2, 2010, Changes to this document are:
- SW version corrected to 8BC6.
- Note added for clarification of Service SW disc purpose.
CSC = Customer Symptom Code
DTC = Diagnostic Trouble Code
MMM = Multi Media Module

Page 1920
Detach the base for the transmission input speed sensor from the other bases.
Replacing the sensor
Clean thoroughly around the sensor.
Remove the sensor
Install the new sensor
Apply a little Vaseline to the sensor O-ring. Tighten to 5.5 Nm.
Assembling the connector
Ensure that the rubber seal is in position. Install the tie straps around the rubber seal.
Installing the gear selector cable

Page 1517
tank.
Remove:

Page 178
- Design See: Body and Frame/Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof / Moonroof/Description
and Operation/Design
- Function See: Body and Frame/Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof /
Moonroof/Description and Operation/Function
Page 180
Remove:
- the upper electronic module (UEM). See Interior lighting and upper electronic module (UEM),
replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair
- the first connector
- 1 screw.
Detach the control module and lift it down.
Remove:
- the second connector
- the control module for the sun roof.
Installing the sun roof control module
Note! For tightening torques, see relevant specfications.
Install:
- the small connector
- 1 M6 screw. Tighten
- the large connector
- the upper electronic module (UEM). See Interior lighting and upper electronic module (UEM),
replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair.
Calibrate the control module for the sun roof. See Sun roof module (SRM), calibrating See: Body
and Frame/Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof / Moonroof/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Sun Roof Module (SRM), Calibrating.
Page 2052
4/7 Through 7/124

Page 702
Disconnect the cable terminal that is to be replaced. See: Connectors, repair See:
Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connectors, Repair.
Hint: If several cable terminals are to be replaced at the same time, spread out the splice points, as
illustrated.
Cut the cable at a suitable point. Note the length of the new cable terminal cable.
Installation
Select a cable terminal with the same area as the old one. Select a butt connector that corresponds
to the cable area. The butt connector is the same color as the cable terminal cable. Cut the new
cable terminal cable to a suitable length. Splice the cables. See: Joining the cables See:
Wiring/Joining the Cables.
Finishing work
Reinstall the cable harness. If necessary use a crimping sleeve and tie straps. Connect the battery
negative lead. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting
Page 485
Disconnecting.
Page 431
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 855
No - Vehicle equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Vehicle equipment
Is the vehicle equipped with RTI?
Yes - Checking the wires and components
-------------------------------------------------

Page 694
Clamp the shrink tubing tightly.
Press the handles of the pliers fully together to obtain a correct joint, the pliers automatically
release their grip afterwards.
Page 18
Other Relays
Page 799
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 104
^ April 2009: New SW upgrade disc P/N for MMM+ only. This kit contains two discs, One for the
boot loader SW and the other for the application SW. The old disc P/N 31215588 is still used for
the MMM systems (non HDD).
Page 1574
Is the voltage OK?
No - Checking the ignition switch
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the ignition switch

Page 569
7/124 Brake Pedal Sensor

Page 714
Page 1544
Drain the tank. See Fuel tank, draining See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Service and Repair. Applies to V70:
Lift up the right-hand seat cushion. Remove the right side cushion. See Side cushion See: Body
and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Side Cushion. Applies
to the S60:
Remove:
- the seat cushion. See Upholstery, seat cushion, replacing See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat
Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Seat, Passenger Seat/Upholstery, Seat Cushion, Replacing
- the right-hand side cushion. See Side cushion See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Side Cushion.
Applies to all models:
Disconnect the connector at the hinge.
Remove:
- the mounting screw for the hinge
- the screw for the hinge end mounting.
Release the strap/straps of the folding mechanism for the seat belt buckle. (Hooked into place on
the lower edge of the backrest). Lift out the backrest.
Removing the cover for the level sensor/fuel pump (FP)

Page 1999

Page 623

Page 732
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 46
The 4X50W amplifier is positioned under the right-hand front seat. It is used to amplify the audio
output signal. The external amplifier is an option for the HU-4XX and HU-6XX. The amplifier is
installed as standard with the HU-8XX.
Bass speakers
An extra bass speaker with an integrated amplifier (option) is available as an option on the
V70/V70XC. This is mounted in the cargo compartment and supplemented with two loudspeakers
in the D-posts.
CD changer (option)
The CD changer is mounted on the left-hand side of the cargo compartment. The changer can take
ten discs in a special magazine. The CD changer has disc selection, next/previous track, and
random play (RND - random). The CD changer is controlled by the audio module (AUM) and is
connected to the control module by connectors. The signals between the audio module (AUM) and
the CD changer are transmitted via Melbus communication. The V70/V70XC cannot be equipped
with both the road traffic information system (RTI) and the CD changer.
Remote control
Turn Signal Switch, Replacing
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch, Replacing
Turn signal switch, replacing
Removal
Turn signal lamp switch
- Ignition off
- Remove the upper and lower steering column covers. See Replacing the steering column covers,
B5244T5, B5254T2 See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Steering Column
Cover/Service and Repair
- Remove the 2 screws for the switch
- Remove the rubber boot.
Note! The pins on the switch are fragile.
- Carefully pull the switch straight out.
Installation
Turn signal lamp switch
- Install the rubber boot.
Note! The pins on the switch are fragile.

Page 509
Remove the wiper mechanism according to: Wiper mechanism, windshield, replacing See: Wiper
and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair/Wiper Mechanism, Windshield,
Replacing
Removing the soundproofing panel on the driver's side

Page 1036
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Page 1771
Note! Ensure that the ends of the protective sheath on the adapter cable point downwards so that
water does not gather in the protective sheath.
Install:
- the adapter cable between the existing 4-pin connectors
- a tie strap as illustrated.

Page 513
Body Control Module: Service and Repair Door Module (Power Windows, Power Mirrors, Child
Locks, Central Locking), Front Doors
Door module (power windows, power mirrors, child locks, central locking), front doors
Replacing the driver door module (DDM) and passenger door module (PDM)
Preparations
Always check that the control module and control module box connectors do not have bent or
damaged terminals or socket / sleeves. This may have been the cause of the fault.
This method of removal applies to both the driver door module (DDM) and the passenger door
module (PDM).
The illustration shows the driver door module (DDM).
- Ignition off
- Remove the door panel
- Remove the nut and screw holding the door module
- Pry up the rear edge of the door module. Pull the door module backwards and upwards. Remove
the door module from its mounting on the door panel
- Press up the door module.
To remove the upper panel, see Removing the upper panel.

Page 74
- Ignition off
- Main unit / audio control module disconnected.

terminal.
Page 993
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 876
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read Button on the Indicator Switch
Checking the read button on the indicator switch
Hint: If read-out of status on read button gave a correct result the fault is not in the SWM.
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing.

-------------------------------------------------
Hint: If read-out of status on read button gave a correct result the fault was in the indicator switch.
Page 1005
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the windscreen-wiper switch
- To replace windscreen-wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
-------------------------------------------------
Hint: If read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch gave a correct result the fault was in the
windscreen-wiper switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 930
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Page 261
Note! If any of the outer hooks break off, this must be "rectified".Tape the 3.5 mm thick component
measuring 20 x 20mm on the back of the comfort panel. Use double-backed adhesive tape.Fix the
other side of the piece with double-backed adhesive tape so that there is a solid anchorage when
reinstalling against the centre console.
Front panel, replacing

Page 468
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse/Relay Identification and Location

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 389

Page 78
Communications Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Description of Reading Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information
Description of reading extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information
Contents
Signal strength
Indicates signal amplitude in the interval 0-255. To obtain corresponding dBA■µV-value, use the
following conversion table.
Due to tolerances of the units, the values in the conversion table shall be regarded as approximate.
Note! Parameters that show status of the buttons are only available for vehicles equipped with
steering wheel buttons as well as on model year 2005 and later.
The following buttons refer to the steering wheel buttons. Buttons have two possible status modes:
Off = Control module does not consider selected button pressed in. On = Control module considers
selected button pressed in.
Buttons Volume up
The value shows if the button for adjusting volume up is pressed in. Volume down
The value shows if the button for adjusting volume down is pressed in. Next up
The value shows if the button for selecting next sound track or radio station is pressed in. Next
down
The value shows if the button for selecting previous sound track or radio station is pressed in.
On-button, telephone (green telephone)
The value shows if the on-button for the telephone is pressed in. Off-button, telephone (red
telephone)
The value shows if the off-button for the telephone is pressed in.
Page 1426
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Temperature and
Pressure Sensors, Replacing
correct.
Installing the temperature and pressure sensors
Install a new sensor.

Page 986
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Page 9
Fuses 11C/1-8
Fuses 11C/9-13
Page 834
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
communicated with. If communication is not possible
Page 470
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 788
- Push the boot to one side and disconnect the connector.

Page 317

Service and Repair
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair
Replacing the yaw rate sensor (1) and the lateral acceleration sensor in the center console (DSTC)
Removal
Yaw rate sensor
The yaw rate sensor (1) and the lateral acceleration sensor is positioned on a bracket under the
parking brake lever. The yaw rate sensor is positioned under the right front seat.
Note! These sensors must be handled with extreme care. If one of the sensors is dropped, it must
be replaced.
Replacing the yaw rate sensor (1) / lateral acceleration sensor
- Lift the cover off the center console locker
- Remove the panel (use a small screwdriver).
The bracket for the yaw rate sensor (1) / lateral acceleration sensor
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Mark up a cable and the corresponding sensor (the connectors are not interchangeable).
- Remove the connectors.
- Lift up the bracket past the parking brake cables
The sensors (yaw rate sensor (1) / lateral acceleration sensor)

Page 1540
Install:

Page 591
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 1919
Remove:
- the screws from the bracket for the gear selector cable
- the cable from the lever. Move the cable to one side
- the screws for the large connector. Separate the connector.
Disassembling the large connector
Remove:
- the tie straps around the rubber seal for the connector and cable harness
- the rubber seal.
Insert a screwdriver between the casing and socket. Press in the lock while sliding the bases out of
the casing.
Page 300
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 849
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
Is the car equipped with the Road Traffic Information (RTI) system?
-------------------------------------------------

Page 953
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition

Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking SWM Control Unit

Page 401
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 669
Tool
Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Trouble-Shooting Information
Condition
Possible source
- Faulty sensor
- Open circuit/short circuit to ground in power supply
- Open circuit in ground wire.
Fault symptom[s]
- Trip computer indicates too soon that fuel tank is empty
- Fuel gauge not working.

Page 354
- Fold up the seats in the third row (applies to cars with three rows of seats)
- Remove the screws (2) for the load securing eyelets in the left-hand side panel
- Remove the covers (3) over the front mountings for the left-hand side panel by prying them off
using plastic weatherstrip tool or a small screwdriver
- Remove the screws (4)
- Remove the clip (5) at the bottom of the storage compartment in the panel (applies to cars with
three rows of seats)
- Pull up the panel slightly at the top edge so that the clips on the inside release. Remove the panel
by pulling it straight upwards.
Connection
Illustration A applies to the S80 and the S60
Illustration B applies to the V70 (00-)
Illustration C applies to the XC90

Page 561
6/67 Pump, Fuel Leakage Control
6/69 Damper Motor, Ventilation/Floor/Defroster
6/71 Valve, Speed-Dependent Power Steering
6/92 - 93 Motor, Rear Left and Right Power Window

Page 1360
The control unit has built-in diagnostics, Volvo Diagnostics, which continually monitor the unit and
the input and output signals.
Diagnostic trouble codes If the control unit detects a fault, it stores a diagnostic trouble code. If, for
any reason, a fault disappears after the diagnostic trouble code has been permanently stored in the
control unit, information about the trouble code still remains in the control unit.
Reading and erasing diagnostic trouble codes Stored diagnostic trouble codes can be read from
the control unit using this facility.
Diagnostic trouble codes may be erased but only after they have been read at least once.
Reading input and output signals Status of control unit input and output signals can be continually
read using this facility.
Reading the control unit identity VADIS/VIDA identifies control units by reading the number of
codes from the control unit memory. The codes contain information on the control unit as follows:
- hardware component number (control units without software)
- software component number (control units without software)

- diagnostic software component number.
Software Downloading New software can be downloaded into the control module for the Steering
wheel angle sensor. When ordering software, the hardware and the software in the car is
compared to the Volvo central database. If the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the
control module. If the comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the
database is updated with the car configuration. When this is complete the software is downloaded.
Page 652
Data link connector, assembling
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), Repair
Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 29
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 866
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Locations
3/135 RTI Switch

Page 610
54/12 Connector
54/13 Connector
54/14 Connector
54/16 Connector
54/20 Connector
Page 14
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1656
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Replacing Cruise Control Lever/Turn Signal Indicator
Switch
Replacing cruise control lever/turn signal indicator switch
Removal
Position the steering wheel straight ahead. Key out. Pull out steering wheel as far as possible and
lower steering column. Undo clips on panel (1).
Remove:
- upper steering wheel cover (2), by disconnecting it at the steering wheel, lifting it and pulling it
outwards.
- screws (3).
- lower steering wheel cover.
- cruise control/turn signal indicator switch and disconnect connector.

Installation
Page 676
Primary lock
Tool to remove the center cable terminals, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully
backwards.
Page 1765
L4 Engine W/1 Exhaust Banks & 1 Catalysts

Replacing ABS / DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction
Control) Control Module
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair Replacing ABS / DSTC (Dynamic Stability and
Traction Control) Control Module
Replacing ABS / DSTC (dynamic stability and traction control) control module
Preparation
Removing the battery lead

Disconnecting.
Note! There is no need to download software when replacing the ABS control module.

Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing.
Removing the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit
Brake pipe from hydraulic unit / front wheel / junction, replacing See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe From Hydraulic Unit /
Front Wheel / Junction, Replacing.
Removal
Remove:
Carefully lower the control module.
Checking the control module

Page 2035
16/68 Antenna, Bumper
16/71 Amplifier, Right-Hand Window Antenna (1)
16/73-74 Window Antenna Amplifier 2, Left and Right
16/77 Microphone, Mobile Telephone
16/78 Speaker. Mobile Telephone

Page 341
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 852
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1133
Carefully press the control module down into the grooves on the inside of the control module box.
Press down all the way. Insert tool 999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench
around the control module. Move the upper section of the tool forwards to stop and pull it up. Press
the cover into place over the control modules. Check that the air ducts are correctly positioned.
Connect the battery negative lead. First read Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Ordering software
Finishing
Check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the repair.
Page 1188
Other Relays
Page 796
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 975
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 262
Removal
- Release the catches. Pull off the panel
- The panel has double-sided adhesive tape. Ensure that any remains of the tape are removed
from the black panel.
Installation
- Remove the backing from the tape on the panel and press the panel into place.
Ordering software
Finishing
After replacing the control module, the following must be carried out.
- Reprogram the customer programmed data
- Carry out self-adjustment of the damper motor end positions
- Test drive the car. Check that the function of the climate control system is OK
- Then check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the replacement.
Information about programming the control module, damper motor self-adjustment and reading off
diagnostic trouble codes can be found under VIDA vehicle communication.
Dashboard environment panel switches

Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor checks the temperature of the engine coolant. The
temperature of the engine coolant is required so that the engine control module (ECM) can
regulate:
- the idle speed
- the engine cooling fan (FC)
- the ignition advance
- engagement and disengagement of the A/C compressor
- diagnostic functions.
The resistance in the sensor changes depending on the temperature of the coolant. Depending on
the resistance in the sensor, a voltage (signal) is transmitted to the Engine Control Module (ECM).
At 0 degree C, the voltage is approximately 4.0 V. At 100 degree C the voltage is approximately 0.5
V. Low temperature results in high voltage (high resistance), high temperature in low voltage (low
resistance).
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is located beside the thermostat.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. The
Page 1471
- Spray quick rust penetrator 116 1422 QUICK RUST SOLVENT 200ml:SPRAY See: Tools and
Equipment/116 1422 Quick Rust Solvent 200ml:Spray into the opening for the air quality sensor.
Note! Only spray a little.
If the air quality sensor and the other electronics are fault free, the damper for the air intake should
close very soon.
Page 764
Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation
Fuel Pump (FP) Relay, (2002-2004)
For information about the fuel pump (FP) relay for model year 2005-, see Design and Function,
central electronic module (CEM).
The following applies for model year 2002-2004
The fuel pump (FP) relay supplies the fuel pump with power. The relay also cuts the power to the
pump when the ignition is switched off or if the engine stops. In cars with demand controlled fuel
pumps, the above function applies to the fuel pump control module. The central electronic module
(CEM) also cuts the power to the relay if the supplemental restraint module (SRS) transmits a
message indicating that an airbag has deployed.
The central electronic module (CEM) activates and deactivates the relay when requested by the
engine control module (ECM) (via the Controller area network (CAN)).
When the ignition is switched on, the engine control module (ECM) sends a signal to the central
electronic module (CEM) via the controller area network (CAN) to run the fuel pump (FP) for one
seconds. This is so that the pressure increases in the fuel system, shortening the start time.
When the flywheel in the engine rotates (generating a signal from the engine speed (rpm) sensor),
the engine control module (ECM) will transmit a request to the central electronic module (ECM) via
the Controller area network to start the fuel pump (FP). In the event of the engine stopping, the
Engine Control Module (ECM) cancels the activated fuel pump signal. The central electronic
module (CEM) then switches off the fuel pump (FP).
There is a directly connected cable between the engine control module (ECM) and the central
electronic module (CEM). In the event of a fault in the Control area network (CAN), this cable is
used for the "activated fuel pump" signal.
Diagnostic Functions
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Description and Operation Diagnostic
Functions
Diagnostic functions
General
The control module has a built-in diagnostic system, Volvo Diagnostic, which continuously monitors
internal functions as well as input and output signals.
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if the control module detects a fault. 35 diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) can be stored. A fault which is detected in the most recent operating cycle is defined
as permanent. Other faults which are detected are defined as intermittent.
Reading and erasing diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
trouble codes (DTCs) can only be erased once all the diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have been
read off at least once.
Reading off input and output signals
This function can be used to continuously read off the status of the control module's input and
output signals. For further information about parameters, see Description of parameters See:
Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/Description of Parameters.
Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information
This function can be used to read parameters, status identifiers and counters stored at the same
time as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). These are called frozen values. For further information,
see Frozen values steering wheel module, description See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool
Testing and Procedures/Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module, Description.
Reading the control module identification
VIDA identifies control modules by reading off a number of codes from the control module memory.
The codes contain the following information about the control module:
- hardware P/N (control module without software)
- hardware serial number (control module without software)
- software P/N
- diagnostic software P/N.

Page 772
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 571
7/149 Rain Sensor

Page 497
- Remove the cover from the fusebox.
- Remove the holder. See Retainer
- Disconnect the air cleaner (ACL) housing
- Cut off the triple clamps for the battery leads.

Page 385
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 589
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 577
8/81 Solenoid, Variable Valve Timing Outlet
9/1 Front 12V Outlet
9/2 Heated Rear Window
9/12-13 Left/Right Seat Heater
9/16 - 17 Left/Right-Hand Backrest Heating Element

Page 1557
Disconnect:
Note! Fasten a wire in the area of the ejector.The wire must be long enough that it reaches over to
the opposite side of the tank with some excess remaining to ensure that it does not slide into the
tank. The wire is needed to pull the hoses and wiring back to the left side of the tank after the fuel
tank unit has been replaced.

Page 552
3/183

Page 915
Cruise control -button, status
The value indicates whether the -button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control resume button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control resume button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control disengage button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control disengage button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone search+ button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone search+ button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone search- button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone search- button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone volume+ button, status
The value indicates whether the audio / carphone volume+ button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio /carphone volume- button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone volume- button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Carphone YES button, status
This value indicates whether the carphone YES button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Carphone NO button, status
This value indicates whether the carphone NO button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) right-hand button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) right-hand button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) left-hand button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) left-hand button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Page 265
- Remove the pen holder above the gear selector panel.
- Remove the panel (1) above the gear selector:
- Carefully pry off at the back using a weatherstrip tool.
- Remove the two screws (2) on the lower edge of the panel
- Remove the panel (3).
Note: The radio component and the dashboard environment panel are complementary and are
mounted at the join with hooked mountings.
Hint: To facilitate removal: Angle the dashboard environment panel outwards so that it is possible
to insert a couple of fingers between the center console and the dashboard environment panel.
- Pull the dashboard environment panel downwards at the same angle. Hint: The dashboard
environment panel is correctly secured. Force is required to remove it.
- remove the connectors. Lift out the panel.

Note: If any of the outer hooks break off, this must be rectified.
Tape the 3.5 mm thick component measuring 20 X 20 mm to the reverse of the dashboard
environment panel. Use double-sided adhesive tape. Fix the other side of the piece with
double-sided adhesive tape so that there is a solid anchorage when reinstalling against the center
console.
Front panel, replacing

Page 791
Warning! The ignition must not be switched on when the SRS ignition cable connector is being
removed or installed.
When all components have been installed:
- switch ignition to position II
- reconnect the battery negative lead.
Note! Check that the SRS indicator lamp is not defective by turning the key to position II. The SRS
indicator lamp should light and go out after approximately seven seconds.
- Check that the SRS indicator lamp is not lit constantly. If the lamp is lit constantly use the data link
connector (DLC) or VCT2000 to trace the fault.
Relay Box: Locations Fuse/Relay Identification and Location

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 1038
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet

(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
Page 763
Other Relays
Page 332

Page 755
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 609
54/7 Connector
54/8 Connector
54/9 Connector
54/10 Connector
54/11 Connector
Page 2007
8/32 Igniter, Passenger Side Airbag, Stage 2
8/33-34 Front Left and Right Seat Belt Tensioner Igniter
8/36 Shift Lock Solenoid
8/37 Automatic Transmission
8/38-41 Shift Solenoid 1,2, Lock-Up Solenoid, Pressure Solenoid

Page 1326

Page 1988
4/76 Remote Control Unit For Garage Door Opener
4/78 Accessory Electronic Module AEM
5/1 Driver Information Module (DIM)

Page 567

Page 41
-4403 Servo error
- Read-out error in 4-disc CD changer
- Faulty CD
- Dirt in CD compartment
- Faulty CD
-44F2 Error in selecting CD
- Faulty CD
-44F3 Pick-up error
-4501 Cassette feed error
- Dirt in cassette compartment
- Faulty cassette
- Faulty cassette player
- Condensation on CD or in 10-disc CD changer
- Faulty CD
-4603 Servo error
- Read-out error in 10-disc CD changer
- Faulty CD
- Faulty CD cartridge
- Faulty CD
-46F2 Error in selecting CD
- Faulty CD
-46F3 Pick-up error
Reading the control unit identification
VIDA identifies control units by reading the number of codes from the control unit memory. The
codes contain information on the control unit:
- hardware component number (control unit without software)
- hardware series number (control unit without software)
- diagnostic software component number

Page 316

Page 1559
tank.
Remove:

Page 12
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 498
- Remove the nut for the battery leads. Disconnect the battery leads
- Remove the screws on the left and right sides of the electrical box
- Disconnect the lower section of the electrical box from the spring strut housing by pressing it in
towards the engine compartment.
Installation
Note! For tightening torques, see: Tightening torque See: Specifications/Mechanical

In reverse order.
Caution! Ensure that the seals are correctly positioned when installing the holder.
Note! Tighten screw 4 in the integrated fuse / relay box. Tighten to 2 Nm.
Page 1614
above.
Control modules

VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 70
- Ignition off
- Main unit disconnected.
terminal.
Page 1576
Page 550
3/123
3/124-125
3/126 Control Unit Left Front Door DDM/PDM

Page 2012
10/5-6 Front Left and Right Fog Light
10/13-14 Front Left/Right Direction Indicator
10/15-16 Direction Indicator, Left/Right Front Fender

Page 492
For the location of the fuses, see:
Relay location
Page 295
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 2031
16/1
16/2 Amplifier
16/10-11 Horn, Horn 2

Page 1051
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1640
Headlamp Alignment Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing position sensors for Bi-Xenon lamps
Raise the car.
Remove:
- the connector
- the nut for the lever arm
- the bracket with the sensor. Press the bracket (it is sprung) and pull it backwards from the rear
axle.
Transfer the bracket to the new position sensor.

Rear Left Angle Sensor

Page 1402
Install the connector. Install the sensor on the bracket. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm. Install the
bracket on the body. Tighetn to 10 Nm. Fold back the floor carpet.
Front seat
Page 1211
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 1994
6/67 Pump, Fuel Leakage Control
6/69 Damper Motor, Ventilation/Floor/Defroster
6/71 Valve, Speed-Dependent Power Steering
6/92 - 93 Motor, Rear Left and Right Power Window

Page 893
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the readout of tailgate wiper status was OK, the fault was caused by a damaged fuse or
relay. The fuse can blow if relays are activated in the wrong order. This can happen when the key
is turned from position I to position II and the wiper arm is activated at the same time.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- For replacing the wiper switch: Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and Repair
Page 563

Page 1139
Carefully check that the mating surface for the control module and the valve seats in the Active on
Demand Coupling are clean. There must be no lint or traces of paper or rags. Lubricate the new
O-ring with oil, P/N 116 1641-4 (0.3 litres). Press the O-ring into place in its seat.
Installing the control module for the Active on Demand Coupling
Install the control module with valves in the coupling. Hold the control module pressed against the
coupling housing while the 2 screws are installed and lightly tightened alternately. Tighten. See the
relevant specifications. Connect the connectors to the control module and the oil pump. Fill the
Active on Demand Coupling with oil. Check the oil level. See Clutch (AOC), replacing, M58, M66
AWD, AW50/51 AWD See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Clutch (AOC), Replacing. Erase any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
Ordering software
Order software for the differential electronic module (DEM) according to the table below.
Page 473
Fuses 11C/21-23
Page 348
Other Relays
Page 638
Connector sealed, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Sealed Connector Type 2
Connectors, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Sealed
Page 518
Body Control Module: Service and Repair

Locations

Page 859
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1226
- Turn the ignition key to position O
- Cars with manual gearboxes: Remove the ignition key

Note! Wait at least five minutes before disassembling the connectors or removing other electrical
equipment.
Applies to the V70 (00-)
- Carefully pry off the panel in front of the gear selector lever. Use a plastic weatherstrip tool as
illustrated
- Move the gear selector lever as far back as possible.
Applies to the S80

Page 1726
Installation
Lubricate the O-ring on the new fuel pressure sensor. Use: Lubricant, 1161580
Install the following items:
- the fuel pressure sensor
- screwTorque: M5, 5 Nm
- cable tie
- the connector
- cable in the cable tie.
Start the engine and check that there are no leaks.

Bank 1, Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor

Page 1383
Finishing
Function testing after replacement
Read off any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Erase diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Ignition off.
Start the engine. Check that the stop (brake) warning lamp does not light. If the stop (brake)
warning lamp lights, the car must not be driven.
Test driving
Test drive the vehicle. See: Test Drive Form (ABS), description See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and
Diagnostic Overview/Test Drive Form (ABS), Description.
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection
Checking brake light switch adjustment
- VIDA connected to the vehicle.
- Start the engine.
Activate readout of components by clicking on the symbol for VCT2000. Slowly press down the
brake pedal. Check the pedal position sensor's value when the brake light switch status changes
from Off to On. The pedal position sensor shall have a value of at least 0.8 mm when the brake
light switch status changes from Off to On. If the pedal position sensor's value is below the value
given above, the brake light switch shall be readjusted.
Other information
- To adjust the brake light switch: Stop lamp switch, replacing See: Service and Repair.
Continue - DONE

Page 922
above.
Control modules

VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Power Driver's Seat Module
Power Seat Control Module: Locations Power Driver's Seat Module

Page 1173
Other Relays
Page 390

Locations

Page 1228
- Carefully angle the dashboard environment panel out using a plastic weatherstrip tool so that it is
possible to insert a couple of fingers to gain access to the side of the dashboard environmental
panel
- Remove the dashboard environment panel. Pull it downward, maintaining the same angle.
- Disconnect the connectors on the reverse of the dashboard environment panel.
Note! If any of the outer hooks break off, these must be repaired. See the section dealing with the
dashboard in the Workshop manual in VIDA.
- Remove the cigarette lighter
- Position the dashboard environmental panel as illustrated
- Detach the surround (1) by carefully pushing down the three catches (2) in the holes (3) using a
small screwdriver. At the same time pry out the surround using a thin weatherstrip tool. Starting at
the 12 volt socket (4), pry up one corner. The surround is tightly secured so take care not to
damage any components
- Remove the surround.
Installation
- See the driver's manual for the position of the switch. Remove the switch blank. Install the new
switch (1)
- Reinstall the surround and the cigarette lighter
- Connect the connectors to the dashboard environment panel. Reinstall the dashboard
environment panel, see procedure Switch for the sensor shut
Page 908
Service and Repair
Ride Height Sensor: Service and Repair
Position sensor suspension rear (Four-C), replacing
Preparatory work
Ignition off
Ignition off. Raise the vehicle.
Removal
Remove:
- the nut for the linkage
- the position sensor. Press in the catch hook and angle the bracket downwards
Page 1639
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Calibrating the position sensor for Bi-Xenon lamps

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 350
- NOTE! Read through the whole installation instruction before starting the work.
- The front page gives the date of this edition and the edition it replaces
- The second page shows the tools needed for the installation and the contents of the installation
kit
- The illustrations display the procedure in order of operation. The order of operation is repeated in
the text section
- Cut out the text page in order to follow the illustrations and text at the same time.
Cars equipped with SRS/SIPS (Airbag)
Warning! Extra care must be taken when working on cars equipped with SRS/SIPS air bags. This
is important to prevent:1. Personal injury2. Damage to or malfunction of the SRS/SIPS
system.Work on the SRS/SIPS systems or related components must be carried out by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Is the car equipped with SRS/SIPS?
Cars with SRS are most easily recognised by the letters SRS on the steering wheel pad. If the car
also has an airbag on the passenger side, the letters SRS are embossed on the dashboard above
the glove compartment. SIPS decals are located on the seat panels and the windscreen.
Do not damage the SRS wiring!
Do not trap, fray, pierce or damage the SRS wiring. SRS wiring has orange casing and/or is
plaited.
Steering and front suspension

The contact reel in the SRS system can easily be damaged when working on the steering wheel,
steering shaft or steering gear. Refer to the SRS service information for information on carrying out
such work. This is to prevent damage.
SRS warning lamp
If the SRS warning lamp lights after repairs have been carried out, take the car to an authorised
Volvo workshop.
SRS collision sensor control module
S60 / V70 (00-) / S80
The collision sensor control module is located on the transmission tunnel in the centre console,
beside the parking brake. The air bag inflation areas must not be obstructed. Never place any
objects, such as upholstery, within these areas. The panels must be able to open in the correct way
and at the right time.
WARNING! The ignition must be in position "0" and the key removed from the ignition if any
connector in the SRS system is to be disassembled. Then wait at least five minutes. Then
disconnect the battery negative lead before disassembling any of the connectors.
Relay kit fog tail lamp + relay kit positive power supply
Note! Kit illustration A applies when connecting the positive power supply function. Kit illustration B
applies when connecting a fog tail lamp.
Preparatory work
Illustration A
Communications Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Reading Off Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
Reading off diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
Reading off audio module diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
- Ignition on.
- Select FM with the "SOURCE" knob.
- Select AM with the "SOURCE" knob.
- If the audio unit has a cassette player: Insert a cassette and select the cassette deck with the
"SOURCE" knob.
- If the audio unit has a CD player: Insert a CD and select CD with the "SOURCE" knob.
- If the car has a CD changer: Insert a CD in the CD changer and select CD changer with the
"SOURCE" knob.
Read off diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) by clicking on the VCT 2000 symbol.
Numeric Result 0 - Fault Found

Page 1969
2/32 Engine Management System Main Relay
2/33 Fuel System Relay

Page 1321
Install:
- The O-ring on the sensor
- the sensor for the brake servo so that the locking lug goes into position. Press the snap ring into
its original position if necessary.
Gently pull the sensor. Check that the sensor is secure. Connect the connector.
Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Fault-Tracing Information
Condition
No DTCs stored.
Possible source
- The key sensor (pin in the ignition switch) has jammed in the key position.
- Short-circuit to battery voltage in the cable from the key sensor.
Fault symptom[s]
- Cannot be activated/deactivated
- Alarm does not operate
- Central locking does not operate

Page 1745
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Replacing knock sensors (KS)
Removing the knock sensor (KS)
Remove
- the cable from the battery negative terminal. First read Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Detach the pipe from the charge air cooler at the throttle housing. Push the pipe to one side
- the dip stick and its holder
- the screws for the knock sensors (KS)
- the tie strap at the connector.

Disconnect the connector. Pull the sensors downwards and past the rear edge of the starter motor
bracket.
Installing knock sensors (KS)
Install the new sensor. Tighten by hand. Route the cables on the outside of the starter motor
bracket. Align the sensors. The cable from the sensor for cylinder 2 = 3 o'clock and from the sensor
for cylinder 4 = 6 o'clock. Tighten the knock sensors (KS) to 20 Nm. Connect the knock sensor
(KS) connectors. Check that the wiring is in the correct position. Secure with a tie strap at the
starter motor bracket.
Install
- the dip stick
- the negative battery cable. First read Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Page 653
Press in the active catches on both sides of the socket housing and slide out the receptacle
housings.
Primary lock
Page 2045
54/35 Connector
54/37 Connector
54/39 Connector
54/40 Connector
56/40A Connector
Page 1458

Page 850
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation
Stop Lamp Switch
The task of the stop lamp switch is to provide the engine control module (ECM) with information
about the position of the brake pedal.
A signal is transmitted to the engine control module (ECM) when the brake pedal is pressed. The
engine control module (ECM) disengages the cruise control (if activated). The brake pedal sensor
also disengages cruise control. For further information, see Design and Function, Brake system,
design.
The stop lamp switch is supplied with power from the ignition switch (terminal 30). When the brake
pedal is depressed the switch closes and a high signal (12 V) is transmitted to the engine control
module (ECM).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the stop lamp switch. The status of the switch can
be read using VADIS/VIDA.
The stop lamp switch is on the pedal box by the brake pedal.
Page 398
Fuses 11C/14-20
Page 496
- Remove the holder from the lower section. See Lower section
- Disconnect the capacitor from the lower section / mounting hooks.
Lower section
Page 1271
Steering Mounted Controls Assembly: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Mounted Remote
Control for the Radio
Service and Repair
Turbo Boost Sensor: Service and Repair
correct.
Installing the temperature and pressure sensors Install a new sensor.

Page 938
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - steering wheel module
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------

Selecting car model
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 617
The first part is a type number that describes the type of component in question, for example 3/xx.
The second part of the designation is a serial number, for example, x/2.
Combined these give a component designation, for example, 3/2.
There is a list of components at Component ID List, where, with the help of the component
designation, you can read off the name of the component, for example, 3/2 = light switch. See:
Diagrams/Diagram Information and Instructions/Diagram Legend
List of type numbers
The list shows which type of component that respective type numbers refer to, for example, 3/x
switch, 6/x = electric motor, etc.
1 Battery
2 Relay
3 Switch
4 Control module
5 Driver information module
6 Electric motor
7 Sensor
8 Actuator
9 Heating element
10 Light
11 Fuse
15 Electrical distribution rail/box
16 Audio
17 Service/diagnostics
18 Contact reel
19 Meter
20 Ignition component/shunt
27 Optics
31 Ground connection
53 Junction point
54 Connector
B. Junction points
The wiring diagrams contain numbered junction points, e.g. 53/352. There is a list of junction
points. This list shows all the components that are connected to each junction point. See: Power
and Ground Distribution/Branching Point/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
The location of the junction points is shown in the "Cable harness routing in vehicle". See:
Locations/Harness Locations
C. Connectors
Connectors provide a bridge between two cables harnesses and are described in the "Connector
Views". See: Diagrams/Connector Views
D. Electrical distribution
Operation of the fuses and relays is shown in the "Electrical distribution". See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Diagrams
E. Data communication
Today's cars are equipped with a CAN network, which transmits information. Connections to this
network are shown in their entirety on the respective wiring diagrams. Complete information on
CAN communication can be found in "Data communication". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Diagrams
F. Abbreviations
A number of different abbreviations are used and these are explained in "Wire Colour Code
Identification and Other Abbreviations". See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and Instructions/Wire
Color Code and Other Abbreviations
G. Component location
The appearance and location of components is described in numerical order. See:

Locations/Component Locations/A - Z Component List
ABS/TCS - DTC's 0076 and 0117
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - DTC's 0076 and 0117
NO: 59-11
DATE: 10-10-2005
MODEL: S80, V70, XC70, S60, XC90.
M. YEAR: 2003 - 2004
CHASSIS: See list below
SUBJECT: BCM, DTC 0076 & BCM 0117 (updated with VIDA method)
THIS TECH NOTE SUPERCEDES THE PREVIOUS 59-11 DATED 12-17-03. PLEASE UPDATE
YOUR FILES. THIS UPDATE IS DUE TO METHOD CHANGE WITHIN VIDA DESCRIPTION:
DSTC (Dynamic Stability Traction Control system) equipped vehicles within the chassis range
shown may set BCM (Brake Control Module) DTC 0076 after performing a BCM software
download. On the XC90 DTC 0117 may also accompany BCM DTC 0076.
SERVICE: Configure the BCM by following the sequence listed below.
1. Using VIDA, go to Information/fault tracing/diagnostic trouble codes and associated procedures.
2. Select BCM DTC - 0076 Control module, Faulty configuration.
3. Answer the questions in this order:
A. Was the DTC generated after the BCM was reprogrammed? YES
B. Does the car equipment correspond to the car configuration? NO
C. Does the car have TRACS, STC or DSTC? YES
4. Then follow the procedure to reset BCM configuration. Select the START button; the yellow
status indicator should go from yellow to green.
5. After configuring the BCM it may be necessary to clear DTCs using VIDA.
Page 2027
Fuses 11D/8-18
11D
11E
11E/1-7 Fuses, Cargo Compartment

Page 1541
Install:
Note! Secure the tie strap on the smooth central section of the corrugated hose.
Page 1252
Installing the cable harness from the bumper
Note! Illustrations "Installing the cable harness from the bumper" show a left-hand drive car. Carry
out the procedure on the left-hand side of the car on right-hand drive vehicles.
- Take the short cable harness from the kit
- Disconnect the smaller connector from the cable
- Secure the watertight connector (1) with the plastic clamp / steel clip from the kit
- Secure the plastic clamp around the connector. Secure the steel clip around the steel edge on the
right-hand side of the car.
- Pull the cable end with loose pins into the engine compartment
- Route the cable (1) as illustrated. Conceal the cable under the fuse holder and expansion tank
- Ensure that it will not be damaged by heat or wear
- Clamp the cable. Use tie straps from the kit.
Routing the cable to the passenger compartment
- Raise the car

Page 1387
Note! Blow clean around the sensor using compressed airbeforeremoving.
- Remove the mounting screws for the sensor. Pull out the sensor
- Disconnect the wiring from the brake hose
- Remove the sensor wiring.
Installation
Installing wheel sensors

Page 381
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 1257
Note! The tape adheres immediately.
Caution! Incorrect positioning of the sensors may result in partial or complete malfunction.
Installing the sensors and cable harness
Note! Applies to left-hand drive cars. When installing on the right-hand drive cars, the connector on
the cable harness must protrude from the left-hand side of the bumper.
- Take the sensors and cable harness from the kit
- Install the two inner sensors in the sensor holders so that they engage securely. The outer
sensors are installed from underneath after the bumper is reinstalled on the car
- Connect the cable harness connectors to the sensors. The loose connector for the cable harness
must now protrude from the side of the bumper. See the illustration.
Note! A click should be heard when connecting. The noise confirms that the catch has locked.
- The cable harness must be secured along the inside edge of the bumper above the foam. Secure
the cable. Use butyl tape. Use activator (P/N 8637076) as an undercoat to increase adhesion.
- Reinstall the foam and rear section in the bumper cover
- Reinstall the two clips on the underneath of the bumper cover
- Ensure that all catches secure properly.

Page 1621
Note! Check that the white locking sleeve has been completely withdrawn towards the tip of the
brake lamp switch. Also check that the catches (4) do not catch against the white locking sleeve.
Note! Brake pedal must be depressed.
Install:
- the connector
- the brake lamp switch. Check location of switch in bracket.
Press the brake lamp switch into place. There is a click when the catches engage with the bracket.
Remove the pedal jack The brake lamp switch is now set to the default adjustment. Check the
function of the brake lamp.
Finishing
Check the shift-lock function
Note! In cars with automatic transmissions and shift-lock, check that the shift-lock is working.
Checking the brake lamp switch

Note! Only applies to vehicles of model year 2002-.
Check the brake lamp switch adjustment.
Installing soundproofing
Install the soundproofing. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Soundproofing Panel, Replacing
Page 1607
Install the cables in the connector with the opening for the primary lock facing up as illustrated.
Press in the secondary lock.
Joining cables
Splice the new connector with cables to the existing wiring. See: Joining the cables See: Sensors
and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Rain Sensor/Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Wiring/Joining
the Cables
Installing connectors
Install the connector with cables on the back-up lamp switch. Install a tie-strap as illustrated so that
the cable harness is not in contact with the gear selector cable.
Install the air cleaner (ACL) housing. Test the function.

Page 56
------------------------
Page 1018
Attempt New Test - Checking the ground terminal
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Power Supply and Ground Terminals. Permanent Fault
Checking the power supply and ground terminals. Permanent fault
Checking power supply and ground terminals
22 in the passenger compartment fusebox for the steering wheel module. Note! If the fuse is blown,
check the circuit after the fuse. Check for a short-circuit to ground before replacing the fuse. Then
replace the fuse. For further information about the circuit after the fuse, refer to the appropriate
wiring diagram. Check the cable for power supply between fuse 22 in the passenger compartment
fusebox and the control module terminals #A1 and #A6. Check for an open-circuit. Check the
ground lead between control module #A22 and ground terminal 31/84. Check for an open-circuit.
Check ground terminal 31/84. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access and replace the control module see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See:
Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair
- Checking wiring and terminals. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Back-Up Warning Sensor, Replacing
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Back-Up Warning Sensor, Replacing
Back-up warning sensor, replacing
Special tools:
981 4214 PLUG CAP PLIERS See: Tools and Equipment/981 4214 Plug Cap Pliers
Note! The control module for the back-up (reversing) warning system is in the right wheel arch. The
accessory electronic module and, for the V70 and V70XC, the remote starter unit are also
positioned there.
Removal
Removing the side panel
Ignition off. Remove the side panel on right-hand side.
Disconnecting the connector

Page 2036
16/79 Bass Speaker
17/13 Data Link Connector
17/17 Jump Start Connection
17/19 12V Outlet, Cargo Compartment
18/4 Contact Reel

Page 904
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Checking the Ground Terminal for the Steering Wheel Module
Checking the ground terminal for the steering wheel module

Page 940
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 226
Traction Control Module: Description and Operation
Control Module for the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
System Overview
Control module
1. Control module for the steering wheel angle sensor 2. Steering wheel angle sensor 3. Reference
groove 4. Encoder for steering movements.
Only cars equipped with DSTC (dynamic stability and traction control) have a steering wheel angle
sensor control module. The easiest way to determine if a car is equipped with DSTC (Dynamic
stability and traction control) is to search for a switch, marked DSTC, positioned in the panel on the
climate control module.
The Steering wheel Angle Sensor Module is positioned on the side of the central electronic module.
The only function of the steering wheel angle sensor is to process the signals from the steering
wheel angle sensor. The signals used by the DSTC system. The steering wheel angle sensor is
mounted on the steering wheel module and is directly connected to the steering angle sensor via a
connector on the steering wheel module. The Steering wheel angle sensor control module
transmits signal information via the high-speed side of the Controller area network (CAN) to the
brake control module, model year 2002- or the ABS control module, model year 1999-2001.
If a fault occurs the control module for the steering angle sensor detects this and a diagnostic
trouble code (DTC) is stored at the same time as the DSTC function is switched off.
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored in the control module for the steering wheel angle sensor.
This information can be read off using the diagnostic tool via the data link connector (DLC) in the
car.
Signals for the control module for the steering wheel angle sensor
Page 703
. Test the function.
Page 1655
- Insert the switch straight in from the side in the correct position. Carefully press the switch into the
micro-switch. Ensure that the pins are in the correct positions in the micro-switch
- Install the screws for the switch
- Install the upper and lower steering column covers. See Replacing the steering column covers,
B5244T5, B5254T2 See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Steering Column
Cover/Service and Repair
Page 1245
Connect the connector to the sensor. Install the sensor in the holder and press it down so that the
catches lock the sensor.
Installing the rear bumper
Install the rear bumper. See: S60: Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear
Bumper/Service and Repair (-2003) or Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear
Bumper/Service and Repair (2004) or Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear
Bumper/Service and Repair (2005-). S80: (-2002) or (2003) or (2004-). V70: Bumper rear,
replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (-2003) or Bumper rear,
replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (2004) or Bumper rear,
replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (2005-). V70XC:
Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (-2004) or
Bumper rear, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair (2005-).
Installing the connector

Page 1516
position.
Note! Take care with the fuel tank.
Page 1906
Check and erase any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Check the gear-shift position sensor
positions: Use the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system.
Page 704
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Connector A
Page 580
10/17-18 Lamp Housing, LH/RH Tail Light
10/19 Auxiliary Brake Light
10/25 Ceiling Light, Cargo Compartment
10/29 Glove Compartment Lighting
10/43-50 RH and LH Brake Light

Page 494
- Remove the cover from the fusebox
- Remove the battery leads from the holder
- Remove the screws from the holder.

Page 329
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Switch, Hazard Warning Signal Flasher, Replacing
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Switch, Hazard Warning Signal Flasher, Replacing
Switch, hazard warning signal flasher, replacing
Removal
Switch
- Remove the loudspeaker grille. See Central loudspeaker, replacing See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/Central
Loudspeaker, Replacing
- Remove the screws for the loudspeaker and for the display screen mountings
- Lift up the loudspeaker and display screen. Press out the switch for the hazard warning signal
flasher
Installation
- In reverse order.
Page 118
Page 757
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
Clutch Pedal Sensor (Manual Transmissions Only)
The clutch pedal sensor provides the Engine Control Module (ECM) with information about the
position of the clutch pedal.
This information is used by the control module to switch off the cruise control.
The sensor signal is also used by the control module to prevent engine start if the clutch pedal is
not pressed (certain markets).
The sensor consists of a sliding potentiometer which is supplied with power by the control module
(signal) and which is grounded in the control module.
The resistance in the sensor drops when the clutch pedal is pressed.
The Engine Control Module (ECM) can diagnose the clutch pedal sensor. The status of the switch
can be read using VADIS/VIDA.
The sensor is on the pedal box by the clutch pedal.

Page 1905
Note! When adjusting the gear-shift position sensor, press the tool down to the flat surfaces below
the thread on the shaft.
Remove the lever. Install adjustment tool 999 5475 GAUGE See: Tools and Equipment/999 5475
Gauge on the gear shift linkage rod. Check that the shaft is in the N position. The groove on the
tool must align with the marking on the gear position sensor. If adjustment is required, see the
following procedure in this section.
Remove the nut for the cable duct. Lift the cable duct away from the screw. Slacken off the screws
for the gear-shift position sensor. Rotate the gear position sensor so that the mark on the switch
aligns with the groove on the tool. Tighten the screws for the sensor. Tighten to 25 Nm. Remove
the adjustment tool.
Installing the lever and gear selector cable
Install:
- the lever on the gear shift linkage rod. Tighten to 16 Nm

Page 345
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays

Page 55
Diagnostic outlet

(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 942
with the driver information module (DIM), check the voltage feed and ground for the control module.
VIDA
Other information
Page 1832
Install
- the sensor. Use anewnut. Tighten to 10 Nm
- the connector
- the hoses and close the clamp
- the tie strap on the torque rod.

First Generation Power Seats
Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair First Generation Power Seats

Remove the key.
Install:
- the connector
- the key
Page 1219
Other Relays
Page 1929
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Temperature sensor, transmission fluid, replacing
Note! Avoid skin contact with the transmission fluid.
Preparations
Unit, Replacing
Remove the connector from the transmission
Separate the connector. Ensure that the rubber gasket in the upper section of the connector
remains in place. Remove the mounting screws. Lift the connector.
Separate the connector

Page 86
Install:
- the connectors and the control module (3)
- the radio/telephone. See Radio/carphone, replacing See: Accessories and Optional

Equipment/Cellular Phone/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radio/Carphone,
Replacing.
Note! Ensure that the keypad engages in the radio and frame.
Install the applicable software.
Activating private car phone subscriptions
When changing Phone module (PHM), the customer's phone number must be programmed
manually in the new phone module. The telephone company carrying the subscription must also
get information about the phone module's ESN (Electrical Serial Number) to enable connection of
the subscription to the new phone module. To program telephone numbers and read off the ESN
(Electrical Serial Number), see Private telephone subscription, activation See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Cellular Phone/Service and Repair/Procedures.
Activating Volvo On Call Plus

1. Go to the desktop on the computer. Click the icon for "Volvo On Call Plus". 2. Find the correct
vehicle using the vehicle's VIN-number or the customer's name 3. Select Repair Verification, ECU
replaced from the menu 4. Activate the system. See Activation procedure for Volvo On Call Plus
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Emergency Contact
Button/Service and Repair/Activation Procedure For Volvo On Call Plus.

Page 880
Fault symptom[s]
- RTI switch unit does not work.
Checking the RTI Switch

Checking the RTI switch
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:

Page 838
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - steering wheel module

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 281

Page 1537
position.
Note! Take care with the fuel tank.
Page 2013
10/17-18 Lamp Housing, LH/RH Tail Light
10/19 Auxiliary Brake Light
10/25 Ceiling Light, Cargo Compartment
10/29 Glove Compartment Lighting
10/43-50 RH and LH Brake Light

Page 1035
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Reading control unit id
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Selecting car model
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Page 1208
Fuses 11B/1-10
Drivetrain Controls - Software Update For Various Issues
Control Module: Customer Interest Drivetrain Controls - Software Update For Various Issues
Title Differential Electronic Module (DEV) Software (SW)
Issuer -
Func Group 4651
Func Desc final drive; Automatic Operation Clutch
Status Released
Reference VIDA, VSTG, RTJs, 21762, 21524, 23051
Attachment
Vehicle Type
CSC
Page 965
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
unit.
- To access cruise control switch unit, see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
no - Checking the wires and components
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1509
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Level Sensor, Fuel Tank Left, Replacing
Level sensor fuel tank left, replacing
Special tools:
Preparatory work
Disconnect the battery negative lead. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Warning! Explosion risk.Use a fresh air mask.
Draining fuel tank
Note! Before draining the fuel, see: Safety regulations for handling fuel See: Powertrain
Fuel.
Insert the heavy duty hose 1.3 meters into the fuel filler pipe, measured from the edge of the
opening of the filler pipe. Pump until air comes out. V70: Fold up both sides of the rear seat.
Remove the rear seat. S80, S60: Remove the seat cushion for the rear seat.
Removal
Removing the insulation panel

Page 1474
Connect the connector. Insert the cable through the hole as far as possible. Place the sensor with
seal (the smooth side facing upward) in the groove. Turn the sensor about 60° clockwise until it
stops. Check that the air quality sensor is secured properly. Make sure the cable is pulled in as far
as possible.
Installing cover panel and windscreen wiper
Close the shutter for the air intake. Install the windscreen wiper cover panel and the windscreen
wiper according to Wiper arm / blade, windshield, replacing See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arm / Blade, Windshield, Replacing.
Vehicles manufactured 2005-
Calibrate the climate control module (CCM) according to VIDA/DIAGNOSTICS/VEHICLE

COMMUNICATION/Calibrating the Climate control module (CCM).
Page 615
54/79 Connector
54/106 Connector
How to Use the Wiring Diagrams

Page 1335
Install the pressure sensor. Tighten to 25 Nm. Connect the connector. Remove the pedal jack.
Checking the pressure sensors visually
Bleeding the brake system
With the bleeding unit. Brake system, bleeding (using bleeding unit) See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System, Bleeding (Using Bleeding Unit) Without
the bleeding unit. Brake system bleeding See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service
and Repair/Brake System Bleeding
Airing
Bleed the circuit that the pressure sensor is on. If both the pressure sensors have been replaced,
bleed the whole system.
Checking the brakes

Brake disc front, calibrating See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Brake Disc Front, Calibrating Brake disc rear, calibrating See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Testing and Inspection/Brake
Disc Rear, Calibrating
Relay box - air cleaner (ACL) housing
Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing, B5254T2 See: Brakes and Traction
Unit, Replacing
Air cleaner (ACL)
Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing, B5254T2 See: Brakes and Traction
Unit, Replacing
Page 163

Page 1000
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the readout of tailgate wiper status was OK, the fault was caused by a damaged fuse or
relay. The fuse can blow if relays are activated in the wrong order. This can happen when the key
is turned from position I to position II and the wiper arm is activated at the same time.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- For replacing the wiper switch: Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and Repair
Page 875
Hint: If the read and reset button status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 299
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1112

Page 1422
- Fill up coolant.
- Check for leaks.
Page 1779
Note! When adjusting the gear-shift position sensor, press the tool down to the flat surfaces below
the thread on the shaft.
Remove the lever. Install adjustment tool 999 5475 GAUGE See: Tools and Equipment/999 5475
Gauge on the gear shift linkage rod. Check that the shaft is in the N position. The groove on the
tool must align with the marking on the gear position sensor. If adjustment is required, see the
following procedure in this section.
Remove the nut for the cable duct. Lift the cable duct away from the screw. Slacken off the screws
for the gear-shift position sensor. Rotate the gear position sensor so that the mark on the switch
aligns with the groove on the tool. Tighten the screws for the sensor. Tighten to 25 Nm. Remove
the adjustment tool.
Installing the lever and gear selector cable
Install:
- the lever on the gear shift linkage rod. Tighten to 16 Nm

Page 900
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the wiper switch
Other information:
and Repair.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 627
Repair wiring and cable terminals, using appropriate procedures. In theory, the resistance across
contacts, leads and terminals should be 0 [ohm]. However, there is always some resistance due to
terminal oxidation. If this resistance becomes too great the result will be a malfunction. The
magnitude of the resistance before it causes a malfunction depends on the circuit load.
Checks:
- Check the cables visually according to "Check Terminals Visually."
NOTE: Do not apply rust solvent spray or grease to the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) or
combined instrument panel connectors.
- Ignition off
- Disconnect the battery negative terminal
- Use compressed air to clean the disconnected connector
- Apply rust solvent spray 1161422 to the disconnected connectors
- Blow clean using compressed air.

Page 380
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 901
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking Windshield Washing
Checking windshield washing
Checking components
Page 856
- Ignition off.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 190
Fuses 11C/34-38

Page 1691
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Replacing the
Thermostat and/or Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Replacing the thermostat and/or engine coolant temperature sensor
Special tools:
951 2885 Sleeve See: Tools and Equipment/951 2885 Sleeve
Replacing the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Remove:
- the sensor from the thermostat housing. Use socket951 2885 Sleeve See: Tools and
Equipment/951 2885 Sleeve.
Note! Put paper underneath the sensor to prevent coolant spillage.
Install:
- Tighten to 22 Nm, use socket951 2885 Sleeve See: Tools and Equipment/951 2885 Sleeve
Preparation
Remove the cap from the expansion tank. Install a hose clamp on the upper coolant hose. Raise
the car. Remove the lower splashguard. Position a container under the engine drain cock. Drain 2
liters of engine coolant. Close the cock. Install the lower splash guard. Lower the car. Disconnect
the sensor cable connector. Remove the upper timing belt cover.
Remove
Note! Put paper under the generator (GEN) to avoid oil spillage.
Remove:
- the servo pump

Remove the cover and the thermostat. Install a new thermostat with a new gasket.
Note! Ensure that the thermostat is positioned correctly in the thermostat housing.
Caution! For tightening torques not in the text, see Tightening torque See: Engine, Cooling and
Page 67
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - radio module

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 716
Page 871
Check the voltage between terminals #B1 and #B3. Voltage should be approximately 12 V. Check
the voltage between terminals #B2 and #B3. Voltage should be approximately 5 V. Check the
voltage between terminal #B3 and the battery negative terminal. Voltage should be approximately 0
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Error Message

Page 894
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the tailgate wiper switch status is OK the fault is in the tailgate wiper.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- For replacing and programming and replacing the control module: Steering wheel module (SWM),
replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair
Page 937
- Ignition on.
trouble code (DTC).
For further information, see Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information,
steering wheel module See: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Reading Off
Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information, Steering Wheel Module.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault

Page 1296

Page 1502
Yes - Fault Found
No - Checking the resistance of the sensor
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the resistance of the sensor
Check the resistance of both the fuel level sensors. The resistance across each sensor may vary
between 12 ohms (full fuel tank) and 383 ohms (empty fuel tank).
Hint: The resistance of the left fuel level sensor can be measured between terminals #5 and #6 on
the connector for the fuel level sensors. The resistance of the right fuel level sensor can be
measured between terminals #6 and #7 on the connector for the fuel level sensors.
Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access the connector/replace the fuel level sensor connector (left-hand side), see Level
sensor fuel tank, replacing See: Service and Repair
- To access the connector/replace the fuel level sensor connector (right-hand side), see Level
sensor, fuel tank, right-hand/fuel tank, replacing See: Service and Repair/Level Sensor, Fuel
Tank/Fuel Pump, Replacement.
Page 1028
------------------------

Diagnostic outlet

Page 1669
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor, replacing
S60, V70 2000-, V70 XC 2001-/XC70, S80, XC90
- For 1999-, see Mass air flow (MAF) sensor, replacing, B5254T2 See: .
S60, V70 2000-
- For B5254T4, see Mass air flow (MAF) sensor, replacing , B5244T5 See: .
Page 1767
The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) uses voltage control. The signal characteristic is binary. With a
binary signal characteristic, the amplitude of the signal curve changes considerably when changing
the oxygen content in the exhaust gases. Otherwise its components and function are the same as
the front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S).
CAUTION: The wiring for the heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) must not be trapped or damaged in
any way. The connectors for the heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) must not be greased under any
circumstances. The oil in the grease would disrupt the reference air and the function of the heated
oxygen sensors (HO2S).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the rear heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). The signal
can be read using VADIS/VIDA.
Preheating of the heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) only
functions above a certain temperature, approximately 300 degree C. The normal operating
temperature is between 300-900 degree C. The heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) are electrically
pre-heated so that operating temperature is rapidly reached. This also ensures that the heated
oxygen sensors (HO2S) maintain a normal operating temperature and to prevent condensation
which could damage the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S).
The heater element in the probe consists of a positive temperature coefficient (PTC) resistor. The
system relay supplies the heater element with voltage. The element is grounded in the engine
control module (ECM). When the control module grounds the connection a current flows through
the PTC resistor. When the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) is cold, the resistance in the PTC
resistor is low and a large current will flow through the circuit. The current from the Engine Control
Module (ECM) is pulsed at first to prevent condensation damage to the heated oxygen sensor
(HO2S). Depending on the temperature, allowances are made for factors such as the dew point. As
the temperature in the PTC resistor rises, the resistance rises, the current falls and switches in
stages to a constant current. The pre-heating time for the front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) is
short, approximately 20 seconds.
Probe preheating begins as soon as the engine is started. The heater element heats the heated
oxygen sensors (HO2S) to approximately 350 degree C. The probes maintain this as a minimum
temperature.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the heater element.
Page 1021
Contents
- Frozen values steering wheel module, description See: Scan Tool Testing and
Procedures/Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module, Description
Note! The parameters that can be read off for the steering wheel module display how the steering
wheel module interprets the position on the buttons and control stalks. In the event of a fault in the
buttons or the wiring, the status will be constantly On or Off depending on the position on the
buttons and control stalks.
High beam flash, status
The value is displayed if the high beam flash is activated. Not activated Flash Rocker position high
beam / low beam
Read button, status
The value indicates if the read button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Reset button, status
The value indicates if the reset button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Right-hand indicator lamps, status
This value indicates whether the right-hand indicator lamps are activated. Not activated Activated
Left-hand indicator lamps, status
This value indicates whether the left-hand indicator lamps are activated. Not activated Activated
Cruise control on / off button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control on / off button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control +button, status
This value indicates whether the +button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control -button, status

Page 32
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 735
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 237
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) Module, Replacing
Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module (SAS), Replacing
Removal
Soundproofing panel Remove the driver's side soundproofing panel.
Control module
backwards (see the arrow in the figure).
Remove the connector and the cable.
Installation
The control module

Page 429
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1423
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Replacing The
Thermostat
Replacing The Thermostat
Preparation Remove the cap from the expansion tank. Install a hose clamp on the upper coolant
hose. Raise the car. Remove the lower splashguard. Position a container under the engine drain
cock. Drain 2 liters of engine coolant. Close the cock. Install the lower splash guard. Lower the car.
Disconnect the sensor cable connector. Remove the upper timing belt cover.
Remove
NOTE: Put paper under the generator (GEN) to avoid oil spillage.
Remove:
- the servo pump
Replacing the thermostat Remove the cover and the thermostat.
Install a new thermostat with a new gasket.
NOTE: Ensure that the thermostat is positioned correctly in the thermostat housing.
CAUTION: For tightening torques not in the text, see Tightening torque.
Install:
- the servo pump
Finishing Remove the hose clip.
Fill with coolant. Install the cap on the expansion tank. Test drive the engine until the thermostat
has opened. Check for leakage. Top up the coolant and oil if necessary.
Page 1244
Press down the spark plug cap rod 981 4214 PLUG CAP PLIERS See: Tools and Equipment/981
4214 Plug Cap Pliers between the sensor and the two upright catches on the holder so that the
catches release from the sensor. Carefully pull up the sensor. Disconnect the connector.
Installation
Installing the back-up (reversing) warning sensor

Page 520
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Page 191
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 232
Check:
STC or not)
hydraulic modulator
Installation
Installing the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator

Locations
Fuel Door Release Relay: Locations

Fuses 11A/1-8
Page 65
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 2041
54/1B Connector
54/3LA-G Connector
54/3LH Connector
54/3RA-G Connector
54/4 Connector
Page 747
Raise the car
Remove:
- the connector from the control unit
- control module from the vehicle
- cable harness from its brackets
- cable harness from the vehicle
Check that the fuel line is located in its clamps.
Vehicles with fuel pump module located in spare wheel well's right trailing edge.
Remove:
- luggage compartment mat/floor hatches so that spare wheel well can be released
- the connector from the control unit
- the control module from Velcro fastener
Installation
Vehicles with fuel pump module originally located on fuel tank.
Connect a new cable harness to the connector by the sill and the fuel tank. Place the cable
harness in the seal ring's slot and in the bracket on the body. Install the floor hatch and tighten with
6 Nm.
Page 1178
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 44
Page 635
Page 1061
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - digital display

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Diagram Information and Instructions
Rain Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
1/1 Battery
2/16 Relay, Intermittent Rear Window Wiping On/Off
2/17 Horn Relay
2/22 Relay, Climate Control System
2/23 Fuel Pump Relay

Page 1041
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 2024
Fuses 11C/24-28
Fuses 11C/29-33
Page 234
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair Replacing the Control Module for ABS and Dynamic
Stability and Traction Control (DSTC)
Replacing the control module for ABS and dynamic stability and traction control (DSTC)
Preparation
Disconnect the battery lead
See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and

Unit, Replacing.
Remove the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit
See Replacing the brake pipe between the hydraulic unit, front wheel and junction , B5254T2 See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Replacing the
Brake Pipe Between the Hydraulic Unit, Front Wheel and Junction.
Removal
Remove the control module
Remove:
Carefully lift the control module.
Check the control module

Page 684
Fuse holder cargo compartment.
Fuse holder passenger compartment.
Primary lock
Page 999
Condition
module.
Possible source
- Defective tailgate wiper.
Fault symptom[s]
- The rear windshield wiper motor does not operate.
Checking the Tailgate Wiper
Checking the tailgate wiper
Checking components
Activate the tailgate wiper using the wiper switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the wiper switch status is OK, the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
No - Replacing components
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing components
Check the tailgate wiper fuse; replace as necessary. Replace relay 2/16.
Other information:
- For further information about the fuses and relays, see the Wiring Diagram
- To access the relay/fuse box in the cargo compartment: Relay/fuse box cargo compartment/Rear
electronic module (REM), replacing See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse
Block/Service and Repair/Integrated Relay/Fusebox Cargo Compartment/Rear Electronic Module
(REM), Replacing
Page 1187

Page 2043
54/12 Connector
54/13 Connector
54/14 Connector
54/16 Connector
54/20 Connector
Adapter Wiring Switch, Replacing
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Adapter Wiring Switch, Replacing
Adapter wiring switch, replacing
Removing heated oxygen sensors (HO2S)
The connectors for the heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) are on the transmission.
Preparations
Page 1508
Installation
Fuel gauge sensor
- Position level sensor correctly
- Install a new rubber seal
- Connect the 2 connectors to the level sensor
- Press tube system onto level sensor
- Carefully position level sensor down with tube system and wires
- Install level sensor attaching ring but do not tighten it
- Press level sensor into position. Note position marks on cover and tank
- Tighten lock ring, first by hand and then using special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and
Equipment/999 5720 Wrench
- Install wire in rubber seal slots
- Install level sensor cover
- The rest of the section is done in reverse order.
To replace fuel gauge sensor on right side, see Right side fuel pump with level sensor See: Right
Side Fuel Pump With Level Sensor.
Page 1565
- Remove hatch and seal from fuel pump
- Loosen fuel pipe
- Loosen fuel pump lock ring using special tool 999 5720 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999
5720 Wrench
- Pull up fuel pump to position 1 (see figure) and release plastic tube.
- Turn fuel pump to position 2 (see figure)
- Hold float against pump housing, then turn fuel pump forwards and lift it up
- Pull wire and tube system out using string or steel wire.
Level sensor with cable and pipe system

Page 446

Volvo - S60 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2003

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Volvo - S60 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2003

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volvo - S60 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2003

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Page 1740

Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair

Control System, Fuel Supply

Temperature and pressure sensors, replacing

Removal and Installation

Removing the temperature and pressure sensors

Installing the temperature and pressure sensors Install a new sensor.

- Defective tailgate wiper.

- Defective control module.

- The rear windshield wiper motor does not operate.

Checking the Tailgate Wiper

Checking the tailgate wiper

Was the tailgate wiper status OK?

Yes - No Fault Found

Cargo Compartment Fuses

Was a fault detected?

Yes - Fault Found

- No SWM DTCs are stored in the Central electronic module (CEM).

- No DTCs are stored in the Steering wheel module (SWM).

- Faulty turn signal lamp switch.

- Faulty control module.

Checking the Turn Signal Lamp Switch

Checking the turn signal lamp switch

Passenger Compartment Fuses

- Reinstall the connectors, components etc.

Was the function OK?

Yes - Fault Found

Do you want to exit fault-tracing?

Yes - FAULT-TRACING FAILED

3/85-86 Rear Left and Right Door Power Window Switch

3/91 Switch, Left-Hand Heated Seat

3/92 Switch, Right-Hand Heated Seat

Connecting the Volvo Communication Tool 2000 (VCT 2000)

Connecting the Volvo Communication Tool 2000 (VCT 2000)

Connecting the Volvo Communication Tool 2000 (VCT 2000)

Reading off extended fault-tracing information, steering wheel module

7/136 Glass Breakage Sensor, Right-Hand

7/137 Glass Breakage Sensor, Tailgate

7/139 Brake Pressure Sensor 1

VCT2000 and cable harness

Continue - Fault Found

Instrument Panel Control Module: Service and Repair

Replacing the driver information control unit

Removal of driver information control unit

- the dashboard cover panel.

- the sensor. Use anewnut. Tighten to 10 Nm

- the hoses and close the clamp

- the tie strap on the torque rod.

Was the audio / carphone switch status OK?

Yes - Fault Found

No - Checking components and wiring

Checking components and wiring

No - Replacing the component

Replacing the component

Test by replacing the control unit.

Yes - Fault Found

Power Door Lock Relay: Locations

Fuse/Relay Identification and Location

Fuses in the Engine Compartment